AN ABSTRACT OF THE THESIS OF
Virginia Carroll Flaherty
for the degree of
Master of Arts
in Interdisciplinary Studies in Anthropology, English, and Foreign
Languages and Literatures
presented on
March 9, 1979
Title: SCHULENBURG'S TSIMSHIAN GRAMMAR
Abstract approved
Redacted for Privacy'
Walt C. Kraft
Part One, "The Grammar" of A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg's
Die Sprache der Zimshran-Indianer in Nordwest-America (The
Language of the Tsimshian Indians in Northwest America)
Braunschweig: Richard Sattler, 1894, has been translated from
German into English under the title Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar. Glosses from Part Two, "The Glossary, " have been provided
in translation when their inclusion clarifies or aids in the understanding of points of grammar, word lists, or language samples. References by Schulenburg to source materials have been expanded into a
more complete form whenever it was possible to do so from the
materials available. Corrections in borrowed materials have been
made whenever the need for such was noted.
C)
Copyright by Virginia Carroll Flaherty
May
1979
All Rights Reserved
Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar
by
Virginia Carroll Flaherty
A THESIS
submitted to
Oregon State University
in partial fulfillment of
the requirements for the
degree of
Master of Arts
Completed March 1979
Commencement June 1979
APPROVED:
Redacted for Privacy
Professor German and Linguistics
in charge of major
Redacted for Privacy
Associate Proas-sor of English
Redacted for Privacy
Assistant Professor of Anthropology
Redacted for Privacy
Head -
of Foreign Languages and Literatur6
Redacted for Privacy
Dean of Graduate School
Date thesis is presented
March 9, 1979
Typed by Clover Redfern for
Virginia Carroll Flaherty
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar represents a focusing of my
explorations and interests, and it gives me great pleasure to acknowledge those who have been influential in whatever accomplishment this
translation may represent.
I would like to express my appreciation to Bob Kiekel who was
instrumental in organizing my MAIS degree program and committee.
I was fortunate in having an excellent committee Dorice
Tentchoff, Hubert Wubben, Richard Daniels, and Walter Kraft. Their
suggestions and expertise have been very helpful. Walter Kraft
deserves special thanks. He devoted many hours to overseeing the
actual translating.
My sincere thanks go, too, to John A. Dunn, a committee
member until taking a position at the University of Oklahoma. He
suggested the project, itself, and his knowledge and enthusiasm have
been much appreciated.
I am eternally grateful to Christine Sjogren for her insight and
her encouragement, in general. Her friendship is a continuing source
of inspiration.
My most heartfelt appreciation is reserved for my family for
their understanding, their patience, and their help. With love and
gratitude, I mention my husband, Frank, especially; our children,
Stephanie and Griffith; and my parents, Virginia and Elmer Kerns.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION
PREFACE PAGES
Schulenburg's Title Page
Schulenburg's Dedication
Schulenburg's Forward
Schulenburg's Table of Contents
Schulenburg's Ethnological Introduction
SCHULENBURG'S BOOK I: THE GRAMMAR
Chapter I:
Chapter II:
Chapter III:
Chapter IV:
Chapter V:
Phonology and Stress
The Structure of the Language
The Pronouns
The Verb
Formatives
Chapter VI: Numerals
Chapter VII: The Simple Sentence
Chapter VIII: The Complex Sentence and the Means
for Joining Clauses Together
Appendix:
Language Samples
Schulenburg's Corrections and Addenda
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1
8
8
9
10
12
26
36
37
41
62
81
96
143
168
198
219
257
259
SCHULENBURG'S TSIMSHIAN GRAMMAR
TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION
Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar is an English translation of
the first part of Dr. A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg's analysis of one
of the dialects of the Tsimshian language, Die Sprache der
ZsimshTan-Indianer (Braunschweig: 1894). The Tsimshian Indians,
natives of northern British Columbia and southeastern Alaska, reside
on offshore islands, along the mainland coast, and in the inland territory drained by the Nass and Skeena Rivers. According to John A.
Dunn of the University of Oklahoma, today the Tsimshian speak three
different languages which together contain a total of nine separate
dialects. These languages and their dialects make up a language
family called, appropriately, Tsimshianian.
The individual languages and dialects are:
Nas s -Gitksan
Nass or Nishga
Gitksan
Kitwancool
Coast Tsimshian
Metlakatla (Alaska)
Port Simpson
Terrace (Kitselas)
Kitkatla
Hartley Bay
Southern Tsimshian
Klemtu (only seven speakers left in 1977)
2
Franz Boas notes in his grammar The Tsimshian Indian
122EILa_ge, a published in 1911 within the Handbook of American Indian
b
that three principal dialects could be distinguished at
that time. They were the Tsimshian proper spoken on the Skeena
River, the Nissqa4 spoken on the Nass River, and the Gitkcan
(Gyitkshan) spoken on the upper Skeena. Boas's grammar covered
the first two of these dialects while the Tsimshian dialect, alone, was
the subject of the earlier Schulenburg work. The Tsimshian dialect
is Coast Tsimshian in the 1880's and 1890's.
Schulenburg's work consists of the grammar, with its appendix
of language samples, and a glossary. "The Glossary, " in turn> is
made up of two parts a Tsimshian-German section and a GermanTsimshian section. With the addition in translation of pertinent
explanatory material from "The Glossary, " and the inclusion of the
list of corrections and addenda which Schulenburg placed at the end of
The Glossary, " this English translation of "The Grammar" becomes
a. unit complete in itself. For this reason and, also, in order to
preserve some sense of the original publication, Schulenburg's title
page, dedication, forward, ethnological introduction, and complete
table of contents have all be included.
As Schulenburg mentions in his forward, the material upon
which he based the formulation of his grammar came out of the
Tsimshian text of the translations of the four Gospels made by Bishop
William Ridley of Caledonia for the Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge in London. These translations are listed in the bibliography
for Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar. Also, Boas, who had visited
the Indians of British Columbia in the winter of 1886-87 and again in
a,LS
aA
facsimile reproduction (1971) is available from The Shorey
Book Store, 815 Third Avenue, Seattle, Washington 98104.
bBureau of American Ethnology, bull. 40, pt. 1.
3
the summer of 1888, and Schulenburg were in communication, and
Schulenburg incorporated grammatical notes and language samples
which he received from Boas into his own description of Tsimshian,
which, of course, was written in German. Schulenburg's liberal use
of the Boas grammatical material appears throughout his grammar in
English identical in form to the Boas explanation and analysis of
Tsimshian published in 1890 in the Report of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science Committee on the Northwestern Tribes
of the Dominion of Canada. c This Report is mentioned by Schulenburg
in his forward and is listed in the bibliography for Schulenburg's
Tsimshian Grammar.
These sections in English taken directly from the Report are
single spaced for identification in this English translation. In these
sections and in numerous other instances throughout "The Grammar"
and The Glossary" where Tsimshian terms or words or even particles of words in the Boas orthography are used, or simply given as
a point of information, Schulenburg acknowledges Boas either with
"Boas" or with "B. " If a reference to Boas in "The Grammar" can be
found in the British Association for the Advancement of Science
Report, it is cited in double brackets as "1889 Boas Report" with the
appropriate page number and, when helpful, the heading on the page
under which the reference occurs is given. Occasionally, the
acknowledgement to Boas for borrowed material is missing. The
missing acknowledgement is cited within double brackets. To avoid
any possible confusion, it is to be noted that the translator and
Schulenburg possessed copies of the Boas Report to the British
Association for the Advancement of Science from two different
cThe Boas grammar of 1911 published by the Bureau of
American Ethnology analyzes the Tsimshian materials in a completely
different manner.
4
sources. The pagination of the translator's copy of the Report, as
cited in the bibliography, is different from the pagination of the British
Association for the Advancement of Science Report mentioned by
Schulenburg in his forward. The translator's copy of the Boas
grammatical material is found in the comprehensive report of the
fifty-ninth meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of
Science held at Newcastle-Upon-Tyne in September of 1889.
Apart from the individual Tsimshian words or particles of
words, themselves, Schulenburg's examples of the language are of
three types. They are either excerpts from the Book of Common
Tsimshian myths recorded by Boas, or verses from the
Gospel translations made for the Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge. The Gospel verses, more precisely portions thereof, are
amply used throughout the work to illustrate points of grammar.
Beginning with the third chapter where the verse examples become so
numerous, two examples out of every longer selection of examples are
included in order to illustrate each grammar rule, or word, or form
in this translation. In those places where a given form will change
depending on its environment or upon the situation, for instance,
where a pronoun will change according to the preceding vowel or consonant, an example of each possibility is included if Schulenburg has
included it. However, like the first two chapters, the chapter on the
verb, Chapter IV, is intact. Except for the verse examples,
Schulenburg borrowed all of the other material from Boas. In this
chapter, because so much of it is borrowed material, and because of
the stated verbal character of Tsimshian (Chapter II), all of
Schulenburg's verse examples are given.
Each verse example used by Schulenburg consists of Ridley's
Tsimshian translation of the verse followed by its translation into
German. The German translations do not come from Martin Luther's
5
translation of the New Testament. They may be Schulenburg's
translations tailored to fit the particular case in question. Because of
the difficulties inherent in translating each of these particular examples from German into English, the English translations of verse
were taken from the King James Version. Whenever the King James
Version of the verse is markedly different from the German verse,
the German verse is translated and the King James Version, or parts
thereof, appears in double brackets appropriately labeled as such for
that one example. Whenever Schulenburg inserts his comments in
parentheses into a verse, these comments appear in double brackets in
the English translation of the verse. Occasionally, Schulenburg cites
chapter and verse but neglects to supply the example itself. These
missing examples have been provided and occur within double
brackets. In such cases, the German verse is taken from the Luther
New Testament translation. However, the information from "The
Glossary" which has been included in Schulenburg's Tsimshian
Grammar contains only citations of chapter and verse following
Schulenburg's own practice in "The Glossary. "
The Tsimshian myths supplied by Boas and the excerpts from
the Common Prayer form Schulenburg's appendix to "The Grammar. "
These language samples fall naturally into three groups. Samples I
and II are interlinear English translations of two Tsimshian myths;
samples III and IV, interlinear German translations of two Tsimshian
myths; and sample V consists of Tsimshian Common Prayer exerpts,
each of which is followed by a German translation. Samples I and II
have been left untouched; interlinear English translations have been
added to samples III and IV; and English translations follow the German translations of Common Prayer exerpts in sample V.
Schulenburg's German translations in sample V are interspersed
with references in parentheses to sections in "The Grammar" and to
6
Tsimshian words. The English translation retains these references
and footnotes all those which do not contain a section number of "The
Grammar." Most of these footnotes are glosses in translation of
Tsimshian words from "The Glossary. 'I The footnoting has purposely been done in a way such that the complexity of "The Glossary"
Tsimshian-German listing can be perceived whenever the word is not
glossed under its own alphabetical listing.
The translator's footnotes to the language samples in the
appendix are alphabetically ordered as elsewhere in "The Grammar"
proper, and in the appendix they are placed at the end of each of the
three groups of samples to avoid interference with Schulenburg's
footnotes at the bottom of the pages. Schulenburg either orders his
footnotes numerically throughout or indicates them with asterisks.
The final parenthetical symbol ) accompanying his footnote notation has
everywhere been removed.
For practical purposes, most of the additions made by the
translator to Schulenburg's work are enclosed within double brackets
and these enclosures are kept within the text. The double bracketed
enclosures include: the expanded references to the Boas Report, corrections of words Schulenburg has borrowed incorrectly from the
Boas Report, the acknowledgement of any borrowed Boas forms
unacknowledged in "The Grammar" by Schulenburg, references to
other parts of "The Grammar, " glosses from "The Glossary, " and
extra words missing in the original German but added in the English
translation to make sense. In the interlinear language samples III
and IV, for clarification purposes double brackets often enclose the
case notation of certain words whenever the case is obvious in
German, but not so in English. In the footnotes for language sample
V explanatory comments occurring within the actual glosses taken
from "The Glossary'? are placed in double brackets.
7
In summary, the translator's intrusions into Schulenburg's work
are indicated by means of double brackets and alphabetically ordered
footnotes. Yet unmarked intrusions have been made in the instances
where Schulenburg's punctuation of publications has been changed.
The words Common Prayer used by Schulenburg to mean the Book of
Common Prayer have been underlined in the forward and in the fifth
language sample. In the forward, the quotation marks at the beginning
of American Philosphical Society and surrounding British Association
for the Advancement of Science have been removed and replaced by
underlining. In the ethnological introduction, Zeitschrift fur Ethnologie
has been underlined in the first footnote; Die Tlinkit-Indianer, in the
seventh footnote; and British Association for the Advancement of
Science in the ninth footnote.
The charts of verb forms in # 76, # 79, # 80, and # 81 in the
fourth chapter and the ordinal number chart for "the third" in # 225
in the sixth chapter have been borrowed by Schulenburg from the
Boas Report and appear in Die Sprache der Zimshian Indianer in box
form just as they do in the Report. The lines surrounding the boxes
and some of the interior lines have been removed to simplify the
typing.
Schulenburg's treatment of words and letters spoken of as such
or used as illustrations is inconsistent. He sometimes does use
quotation marks to set off both German and Tsimshian words. His
treatment in this regard is left undisturbed. He never uses italics for
this purpose, but he often uses double-spacing of letters in Tsimshian
words or forms. Headings in general are sometimes expanded in this
way, but when the heading is a Tsimshian word, the expansion does
not always carry over into the use of the word or form in the text
under the heading. Although expansion is one of the ways in which
emphasis can be shown in printed German, Schulenburg's use of
7a
expansion has not been reproduced in the typewritten manuscript of
Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar.
Since underlining is one form of diacritic present, any mention
of words or letters as such in double brackets is not underlined to
indicate italics. The diacritics in Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar
have all been entered by hand with two exceptions: the printed
apostrophe ) becomes the typed apostrophe and the lower case .E
becomes the typed upper case E.
The translation was made from photocopies of Die Sprache der
Zimshian-Indianer in Nord-west America, the four Gospels in
Tsimshiany and the Boas Report to the British Association for the
Advancement of Science. Many inconsistencies were discovered.
Some were undoubtedly due to typographical errors which is understandable in a work of this nature.
8
PREFACE PAGES
The Language
of the
Tsimshian Indians
in
Northwest-America
by
Dr. A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg
Braunschweig
Publishing House of Richard Sattler
1894
9
DEDICATED
To The Memory
of his deceased unforgettable uncle
Dr. Georg von der Gabelentz
10
FORWARD
The powerful blow dealt to our philological world by the
premature death of the greatest of philologists, Professor Dr. Georg
von der Gabelentz, has shaken us deeply, and the aftereffects thereof
will be felt for a long time to come. He studied the languages of all
parts of the earth with a broad perspective and, for the first time, he
compared them in a way deserving of admiration. In like manner, he
seldom gave indication of his remarkable perception of the essence
and aims of the science which he served with great enthusiasm. It
was a matter of devotion for him to be always a leader and guiding
star to the enthusiastic disciples of his discipline, to be stimulating,
thorough, and instructive, in every respect.
Also my late uncle gave the principal stimulus to the present
work; and through various suggestions he expanded, clarified, and
deepened my understanding of the structure of this language. He
made the difficulties considerably easier for me.
It is, accordingly, a solemn obligation for me to pay tribute to
my dead uncle and to erect a memorial of my lasting gratitude to him.
The material for the construction of my grammar lay chiefly in
the text of the four Gospel translations (Am da malshk ga na damsh
Luke, John, Matthew
Society for Promoting
St. Mark...
Christian Knowledge, London). Only later through the great kindness
of Dr, F. Boas, to whom, at this point, I also express my most
cordial thanks, did I receive his grammatical notes, as well as a
small vocabulary and some valuable samples of the language. The
grammatical notes are in print and to be found in the British Association for the Advancement of Science, "Report on the Northwestern
Tribes of Canada, " 1889, pp. 81-93. The vocabulary, likewise in
print, is found in the American Philosophical Society, October 1891,
11
pp. 193-204. The language samples consist of handwritten records.
Finally, when my work was nearly completed, several portions of the
Common Prayer arrived in my hands. I have taken great pains in
making use of all these sources, and I cherish the hope of presenting
a complete picture of this language and of casting into bold relief its
characteristics which are of the greatest interest to comparative
philology.
I do not want to fail to mention, emphasizing with thanks, that,
from the beginning to the completion of the printing, my esteemed
publisher Mr. Richard Sattler undertook my work with great diligence
and warm interest.
Nordsteimke, Braunschweig. January 1894.
12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13
Page
ETHNOGRAPHIC INTRODUCTION
26
BOOK I
GRAMMAR
I
II.
III.
PHONOLOGY AND STRESS 1-9
37
THE STRUCTURE OF THE LANGUAGE
41
Introductory Remarks 10-11
A. Verbal Character of the Language 12
B. Nominal Formation
1. Formation of Substantives 13-20
2. Formation of Adjectives 21-24
C. Plural Formation 25-40
D. General Rules of Arrangement 41-44
41
45
THE PRONOUNS
62
A. The Personal Pronoun 45-47
B. The Possessive Pronoun 48
C. Article 49-52
D. Pronoun lip 53
E. Demonstrative and Determinative
Pronouns 54-62
F. Relative Pronouns 63-66
G. Interrogative Pronouns 67-69
H. Indefinite Pronouns 70-73
IV o
42
45
49
50
58
62
71
72
74
74
77
79
79
THE VERB
81
Introductory Remarks 74
Intransitive Verb 75-78
Transitive Verb 79-81
Imperative 82
Participle 83
81
81
82
84
86
Passive 84
86
Inchoative 85
87
14
Page
Imitative 86
Examples for the Use of the Transitive
87
and Intransitive Verb 87
V.
87
FORMATIVES
96
Introductory Remarks 88
A. Dependent Formatives
1. Prefixes
96
97
97
Page
ga 89
97
htik 90
gwilth 91
97
98
shil 92
98
klthna 93
98
kith-dun, klthum 94
98
bak 95
man 96
kba 97
tiki 98
99
99
100
100
99
Itl-um
100
101
101
to 101
101
di 102
102
da 103
102
sha 104
102
slid 105
103
ksha 106
103
la 107
103
108
103
117
,gu1
109
104
15
Page
tkul 110
gwun 111
104
ha 112
kam (gum) 113
105
q (k) 114
106
hT 115
106
ksh 116
106
tka 117
107
wilth, wulth 118
tgwa, tgwi 119
oksh 120
shin 121
107
Page
105
105
108
108
109
2. Suffixes
110
Page
sh 122
110
lth 123
110
in and un 124
7 125
112
112
ka, 126
113
urn 127
113
k (Addendurm sa and de") 128-129
114
3. Enclosing Formative
115
q-ka 130
B. Independent Formatives
L Auxiliaries of Time and Modality
Introductory Remarks 131
Page
za 132
zup 133
116
116
115
115
115
115
16
Page
shin 134
117
gin 135
117
lugwil 136
118
2. Adverbs
Introductory Remarks
Adverbs of Place
Page
118
118
137
119
Page
gwa, gwai 138
119
ninT 139
119
zilum 141
yagwa 140
logum 142
yaga 143
haldum 144
119
gik 145
120
hazukshum 146
kbishum, kbashim 147
guluksha 148
120
agwT 149
121
zinsh 150
wazait dau 151
122
119
120
120
120
121
121
122
Adverbs of Time
123
Page
123
"'today" 152
'tomorrow" etc.
lthawil 154
153
123
124
giaTri 155
124
61 156
124
whaliTyg 157
125
hazish, hazush 158
125
17
Page
a1tha 159
125
gha, ghalam 160
gakpa 161
amgait 162
hashba 163
lugwil 164
125
hawgani. 165
kshgauk 166
127
shiigiaT5n 167
127
Page
126
126
126
127
127
Adverbs of Manner
127
Page
shimhou 168
shim 169
shirngul 170
VI 171
128
wT.am 172
128
shimgit 173
128
gidi 174
129
shidi 175
zumz in 176
129
am 177
130
ligi 178
130
gik 179
131
hazukshum 180
amuksha 181
gup 182
131
shak 183
132
naga 184
132
niinT 185
132
shga 186
132
127
128
128
129
131
131
18
Page
3. Prepositions
Introductory Remarks 187
133
133
Page
zum 188
133
lak 189
133
lakau, lak3 190
133
whati 191
134
shpag.a 192
134
nadau 193
134
qud-On 194
134
zog.ash 195
134
hazaklthk 196
gauk 197
hagau 198
tkulan 199
watk 200
amyl, 201
aw-i 202
wagait 203
adup(k) 204
Paraphrasing 205-206
135
206a
139
a and "AT
135
136
136
136
137
137
137
137
138
4. Conjunctions 207
5. Interjections 208
VI.
140
142
NUMERALS
143
A. The Cardinal Numbers
Introductory Remarks; the various classes of
numerals 209
143
143
19
Page
Chart of Cardinal Numbers 210
The Individual Numbers Beginning with "One" 211-223
Final Observation 224
B. The Ordinal Numbers 225-226
C. The Numeral Adverbs 227
D. The Distributive Numerals 228
E. Indefinite and Other Numeral Terms
144-45
143
159
160
162
162
163
Page
"another" 229. Note:
lukshgiat
nagaza-ou 230
abb.'
VII.
231
163
164
164
zashk 232
he'l 233
164
zri 234
165
tka-ni 235
165
gou uzgun 236
165
mila 237
tka 238
166
166
shTlgiat 239
166
kbie" 240
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE
164
167
168
Introductory Remarks 241
1. Predication of "to be"
2. Words for "to be"
168
168
168
Page
hokshk 243
dlig, wan 244
168
w 1 245
169
168
20
Page
wg'tk 246
amyg. 247
Page
169
169
3. to become, to have
170
Page
sha 248
di 249
170
shgri 250
dadau 251
didau 252
170
170
171
171
4. yes and no
171
Page
a'a 253
niadit 254
171
yagai nTadit 255
172
ain 256
173
172
5. Negation
173
Page
althga 257
wha 258-259
ain 260
173
wagait ain 261
177
.g.up althga 262
177
althga gau 263
177
althgat n-g, 264
177
whati 265
hawalthk 266
hawFnilth, hawe-rilth 267
wagait hawalthk 268
op za 269
177
173
176
178
178
178
179
21
Page
gilau 270
lthguksh 271
Page
179
179
6, must, shall, can
180
Page
gup 272
dum 273
am dum 274
180
"aiklthk, da'a.klthk 275
181
180
180
181
lthguksh 276
7e to have in mind, to want, to wish
Page
181
dum 277
181
hashak 278
182
anauk 279
182
shagaud 280
183
shigilth 281
8, Perfect Tense
181
183
Page
ltha, wil 282
183
ltha zoucli 283
shgab5 284 (lugwil)
na 285
183
184
185
9. also, still
185
Page
di 286
gik 287
hazukshum 288
gik hazukshum 289
185
tkulTya 290
mandiy-i. 2919 Addendum nishta
186
185
185
186
186
22
Page
10. only
187
Page
amuksha 292
althga amuksha 293
187
g_up 294
188
188
11. as
189
Page
nTwal 295
189
hoigiak 296
189
adTgriel 297
wudT 298
189
190
12. Comparative
190
Page
ga 299
190
13. Superlative
Paraphrase 300
191
191
14. Command
191
Page
Suffix lth 301. Note
191
Suffix T
&dau 302
192
gut 303
192
n'zil 304
192
shirunza 305
193
15. Interrogative Sentences
A. Simple Interrogative Sentences
Page
Suffix T 308
193
Suffix lth 309
194
193
193
23
Page
B. Alternative Expressions
194
Page
ligi 310
194
C. Interrogative Adverbs
195
Page
n'da gun 311
gau gun 312
195
n'da, n'da da 313
195
n'dalth sh.ganaklth 314
dumaisha 315
197
shgabEi 316
195
197
197
VIII. THE COMPLEX SENTENCES AND THE MEANS FOR
JOINING CLAUSES TOGETHER
Introductory Remarks 317
198
198
A. Adnominal Clauses 318
B. Adverbial Clauses, Conjunctives
I. Indefinite Joining Through ada 319
II. Temporal Joining
Page
dha 320
ash, ashT 321
200
ltha, wil, dum 322
zida 323
hi 324
202
Wigauk 325
206
gilwil 326
206
ltha goudT 327
sh.gab6" 328 (lugwil)
n'tkurint, n'tkulg:n gwa 329
207
201
205
206
207
207
198
199
199
200
24
Page
wil wak 330
208
"from now on" 331
am shzanak 332
wag.ait dum 333
ltha nak 334
hawalthk 335
haw7nilth, hawgnith 336
208
Page
208
209
209
210
210
III. Reason, Purpose
211
Page
gun 337
nini gun, ninT gwai gun 338
211
"gwil 339
213
dum, dum wha 340
op za 341
IV. Condition
213
212
214
215
Page
amT 342
amT za 343
215
gin 344
216
216
V. Concessive Relationship
218
Page
z6, zhtlr 346
218
25
Appendix
SAMPLES OF THE LANGUAGE
219
220-256
BOOK Ha
GLOSSARY
Tsimshian-German
German-Tsimshian
Corrections and Addendab
a
Although not included in the English translation, Book II
remains here, as it stands in Schulenburg's Table of Contents, for
the sake of completeness.
b
The entire list, in translation, has been moved to a location
immediately following the Appendix in the English translation of Book
I, Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar. The list has been included for
the sake of completeness. The corrections and addenda on the list
which apply to Book I have been incorporated into the translation.
These corrections and addenda may be identified by consulting the list
itself.
INTRODUCTION
'7
The dwelling places of the Tsimshian Indians extend, accord g
to Mr. F. Boas, 1 over the northern part of the coast of British
Columbia, especially over the region of the Nass and Skeena Rivers,
Their territory along the Skeena extends far into the interior, as far
as the Babine Lake area. South of the Skeena, the Tsimshian occupy
the offshore islands with their southern boundary n the vicinity of
2
The name Tsimshian [[in German Zimshran accordMilbank Sound.
ing to Schulenburg]] (Boas: Tsimschian3 ) denotes actually only the
tribe on the lower Skeena which first, and most intimately, came into
contact with Europeans and whose name, therefore, has come to
designate the whole language family. The Tsimshian-speaking tribes
have no common name in their own language. Among the Tlingit,
their northern neighbors, they are called Ts'asheil: 4 among the
1-1-e'iltsuk, their southern neighbors, they are called Kwevtela' while
the Haida designate the individual tribes with the trites' individual
names. Tsimshian is spoken in two dialects of which the Nas%a'
[[Boas: Nisqa'4. ]] is perceived as the olderprobably with good reason since the Naszai words frequently occur in old songs.
The following tribal groups can be differentiated from the
Tsimshian. Of these groups, the first two speak Nasza/, the rest,
Tsimshian.
1F.
Boas, "The Tsimshian, " Zeitschrift ffr Etlnc212is_
(Berlin 1883), pp. 231-47. (Note: I have quoted from his reports
almost verbatim).
2
Approximately from 53°301 to 55030' north latitude.
3
Other transcriptions are: Chim-sy-an (Schoolcraft),
Chimpsain (Scott), Tsimsean (Swan), Simpsean (Macdonald),
Tsimshean (Mayne), Chimsain, Tsimpsean, Chimsean (Anderson),
Chimmesyan and Chemmesian (Scouler).
4
The Lepsius Standard Alphabet has been used for these Indian
names which occur in Boas. [[Karl Richard Lepsius, German
philologist, 1810-84]].
78
1. NasZaii, on the Nass River.
2. Gyitkla/n, on the upper Skeena (Ksan)
people of the KPan
3. Ts'emgia/n, at the mouth of the Skeena
on the Skeena.
4. GyitsIumrilllon, below the canyon on the Skeena = highland
people.
5. Gyits'ala/er, at the canyon of the Skeena = canyon people.
6. GyitcraYtla, on the island before the mouth of the Skeena
coastal people.
7.
Gyitg""../ata, at Grenville Channel = the walking-stick
people (?), allegedly so-called because they constructed
salmon weirs in the manner of the FIF/iltsuk: from sticks
driven into the river parallel to one another.
8.
GyidegdzV, northwest of Milbank Sound.
Several of these groups are divided again into subdivisions,
each of which live in a village. The villages of the first two tribes
are unknown to Dr. Boas. The Tsimshian comprise ten villages 5 and
tribes:
1. Gyitlg'n = people who travel with the sterns of the canoes
forward.
2. Gyilas'Vr = people of the tributary.
5
The largest and most significant place appears to be Met la
Kat la (founded by Duncan; on the map of the British Admiralty'
Metlah-Catlah; written by Scott "Met-la-kaht-la"). in 1878 this place
possessed its own schooner which made regular trading trips to
Victoria; a general store; a trading post for the Indians from other
tribes; a soap factory; a smithy; a sawmill; a schoolhouse which cost
approximately four thousand dollars; a large building for public
gatherings for judicial hearings, and for the reception of foreigners:
a mission house; a church; a woolen mill; a rope and thread factory:
a tannery; a footwear factory; and many other things (compare Morris
72).
29
3. Gyi8pez1Vots = people of the place with honeysuckle.
4. Gyitienda/ = people of the village with the stockade.
5. GyidnadVeks = people of the rapids.
6. Gyina1 angy7ek = people of the mosquito place.
7. Gyitwulgyalts = people of the resting place.
8. GyidzT's = people of the salmon weir.
9. GyidzalitlVt1 = people of the "salmon berries. "
10. Gyitwulkgeba/.
The remaining tribes have only one village apiece with the
exception of the Gyitsralane,r, whose village on the north side of the
river is inhabited by the GyilaztsVoks (= people of the canoe planks6),
while on the south side that of the GyititsVp1 (= people of the seaside)
is located.
The Gyitslumr.a4.11on are the descendents of the immigrant
Tongas, who, in the course of incessant warfare, fled from their
homeland approximately two hundred and twenty years before and
settled on the upper Skeena. They interbred with the Tsimshians and,
in the course of time, adopted their speech. The descendents of these
Tongas today are still called Gun II-5/ot (= fugitives).
Dr. Aurel Krause? has furnished other information on the
Tsimshian Indians. He states that in the year 1845 Lieutenants Warre
60stensibly so-named because they stole the planks out of the
canoes of tribes traveling by.
7
Die Tlinkit-Indianer. Results, described by Dr. Aurel Krause,
of a journey by Doctors Arthur and Aurel Krause in the years 1880-81
to the northwest coast of American and the Bering Straits, carried out
on behalf of the Bremen Geographical Society. Jena. Hermann
Costenoble, 1885.
30
and Vovasour tabulated on behalf of the Hudson Bay Company
4 tribes of Nass -Indians with 1615 souls.
10 tribes of Chymsyans with 2495 souls,
2 tribes of Skeena-Indians with 322 souls.
Veniaminov estimates their number at approximately six
thousand. According to statements made to them by a Tsimshian
Indian woman, these same Indians are divided into the following
fifteen tribes. 8
1. krsch-each-l'A -As
7. kitt-ando
2. kits-"Sch-lg.--alich
8. kri-nach-hangik
3. kit-wulg-jats
9. kinnat7-iks
4. kits-Tisch
10. kit-winks e -be
5. killiTts-a7r
11.
kittralchll
6. kittle'En
on the Tsimshian Peninsula near Fort Simpson.
r
12. kitselassir 13. kitkaet 14, kitra"("1-al-iks
on the Skeena River and southward.
15. niiss-ka. on the INI:ss River.
8
Dr. Scouler defines the tribes of the Tsimshian Indians in his
Table V, 487, in the following manner on Chatham Sound [easterly
Dixon's or Perez Entrance (Dixon's entrance, Percy 1774) [[This
parenthetical note of Schulenburg's occurs in the English with the
word "entrance" uncapitalized ]] which is in the northern part of
Queen Charlotte Island: above 540-541°, northerly above the large
Pitt Island; its north end reaches up to the latitude of Fort Simpson
which is to the east of it] from Portland Channel [in the West next to
Observatory Inlet, page 398" and following] to Port Essington (into
which the Skeena River empties) [Port Essington lies on the British
coast at an ONO from S of the inlet off Chatham Sound, somewhere
above 540], living as well on the mainland as on the adjacent islands;
they trade at Fort Simpson and generally don't live far from the fort.
They are called: Kispachalaidy, 116 people; Kitlan, 129; Keeches,
71; Keen-ath-toix, 63; Kitwillcoits, 64; Kitch-aclalth, 31; Kel-utsah,
104; Kenchen Kieg, 87; Ket-andon, 54; Ketwilk-cipa, 18. (Compare
Buschmann, "The People and Speech of New Mexico and the Western
Side of British North America, " pp. 400-01).
31
The Krause brothers heard the following tale about the origin of
the Tsimshian Indians The Tsimshian came from the interior down
the Skeena River. They found it completely blocked by two glaciers
which had moved forward, from both banks, into the river. Only in a
dark cave did the river pass through the glaciers. Already the
Tsimshians wanted to give up the continuation of the journey, when
their leader, an elderly Indian, volunteered to try this way. After he
had begun to sing the death song, he went into the dark cave in his
canoe. From the glacier's summit, which a few had scaled, he was
seen coming out below. Then everyone tried the same course, and
they also successfully arrived at the mouth, where they settled.
I quote only the following from the most detailed reports of Dr.
Boas 9 on the classification, customs, and practices of the Tsimshian.
The nation is divided into three classes the common people, the
middle class, and the chiefs or leaders. The latter constitute the
highest of the nobility; the children of the middle class, until they join
a secret society or acquire a name by means of a great celebration,
are initially regarded as members of the lowest class, Abundant
gifts serve also to secure a higher rank. The leader (chief) assumes
the highest rank; he enjoys many advantages. He has to carry out the
determinations of the council, to declare peace and war, his opinion
must be ascertained by the tribe in all important matters. He decides
when the winter village shall be vacated, when the fishing begins, etc.
The first fish, the first berries are given to him. He must begin the
dances, be invited to all festivals, and whenever the first whistle
resounds in the winter, which declares the onset of the dancing season,
he receives a fixed tribute. The common people must go along the
9British Association for the Advancement of Science,
the Northwestern Tribes of Canada, " 1889 and 1890.
Report on
32
walls of the house; they cannot come close to the chief whose place is
in the rear of the house.
The highest in rank among all the Tsimshian chiefs is the chief
of the Gyispaq1Vots tribe. Invariably, this chief's name is LegT'eq.
He is the most noble because a number of secret societies allow only
his family and his tribe as members. Whenever a chief dies, the
leadership passes to his younger brother, then to his nephew, and if
there is none, on to his niece. The principal perso:l on his staff can
become chief only if the chief's family dies out
This is the sole instance in which a man of the middle class can
rise to the rank of chief. The property of the chief, as well as that of
the others, is first inherited by the nephews, and if there are none,
by the nephews of the deceased mother or aunt, The property of a
woman passes to the children.
As already indicated the common people can move up to the
middle class rank, but members of the middle class may never move
to the upper class rank.
Like the Tlingit and Haida, the Tsimshian too have their own
fishing tracts in every village, as well as definite districts in the
mountains and in the valleys where they alone have the right to hunt
and to pick berries. The houses of a tribe, therefore, always lie
close together.
Dr. Boas reports the following about the coming of age of girls
at thirteen or fourteen. They must begin with fasting, only eat in the
afternoons, and remain in their room or hall for a period of ten days.
During this time, for four days, they may not once drink water, If
they wish to have two or three boys, correspondingly, men must chew
the food for them; in the opposite case, women. At the end of this
fast they are covered with matting and held over a fire They believe
that in this way their children are made healthy. For one whole year
33
they must not see nor eat fresh salmon or smelt: they must move
about with their heads always covered; they may not lie down, but
always sit supported between boxes and and matting. For the celebration of their coming of age the kin of the mother give a big festival
and give gifts to the clan of the father. At this point their ears are
pierced, and they are given earrings. When the daughter of a chief
comes of age, she is given a stone which she must bite until her teeth
are completely worn down in the center. During the celebration,
slaves are often set free. When women drink for the first time after
their marriage, they turn the vessel around four times in the direction in which the sun moves and then drink very little. The piercing of
the ears is repeated on later occasions., and each time a new hole is
made, a new festival is held.
Whenever a death occurs, the relatives cut their hair short and
blacken their faces; they cover their heads with ragged and filthy
matting, and go four times around the dead body singing mourning
songs. They must fast until the body is buried, only eating a little
food at night. The women of the families to which the deceased did
not belong act as mourners and are paid for their work; the entire
family of the deceased contributes to the payment, While mourning,
the women must shut their eyes. The family to which the father of the
deceased person belongs has to bury the body. Immediately upon
death, the body is washed. Then the dead person lies in state a few
days, seated upright and adorned with the headdress of his tribe; the
trappings and dance attire are placed at the side of the body. Next the
body is put into a box which is fastened with strips of elk hides. These
are kept as payment from the other families by the family of the
deceased. The bodies, except for those of the shamans, are cremated
in the following way. The box is placed on a pyre, and the elk hide
straps are pulled away (later kept by the father's family); a hole is cut
34
in the bottom of the box and the pyre, lit. Before it burns, the heart
is taken out of the body and buried. The belief is that if the heart
burns up, all the relatives of the deceased would die. In addition to
the strips of elk hide, the father's family is paid with marmot skins
and rugs. The closest relatives mourn an entire year. Sometime
after the burial a commemorative pole is erected and a commemoration
feast is celebrated. When many members of a family die quickly,
one after another, the survivors lay their four fingers on the edge of
the box in which the body is laid out and cut off the first joint in
1, 0
order to sever the link with the dead.
The religion of the Tsimshian Indians follows' Leql (Laka),
the heaven or sky, is to them the concept of the highest and the
mightiest. Everything that seems mysterious and precious to them
they regard as a direct expression of this, their deity, and they
venerate it in these things which they call Neqnciq. Neqnc:iq is for
them, above all, the sun and the moon, but also can be animated
spirits wherever they are encountered. Also, those objects, such as
eagle feathers, red dye, etc. , whose possession seems valuable to
them are designated as Neqnciq. In order to please the deity, they
must regulate their lives according to the wishes of the deity; thus,
they are studiously clean, even take emetics, fast, and refrain from
touching their women. ---A special belief is connected with twins
who are supposed to gain mastery over the weather, wind, and rain;
they pray, "Calm down, Breath of Twins. " Fish, especially the
salmon and the smelt (Thaleichthys pacificus Gir. ), are also
worshipped (the latter called halendatk). See Boas with regard to the
10
According to Krause, however, as a result of the missionary
activities carried on among the Tsimshian by Duncan and Crosby, in
many cases the old Tsimshian customs are supposed to have gone out
of use and, for the most part, have fallen into oblivion.
35
ceremonial customs practiced during the first catch of fish.
According to Dawson there are four religions among the
Tsimshian. They are called Sim-ha-Tait (Semhalait by Boas), Mi-hla
(MVitla by Boas), Noo-hlem (N-51otlam by Boas), and Hop-pop (Ola la
by Boas).a These religions are independent of tribal classification and
-. -The first of these religions is the simplest, and there are no
sex
noteworthy ceremonies connected with it. The followers of the second
are supposed to worship a small black figure with long hair known as
"the one above" (Shimoigiat ga Lakaga). The "Noo-hlem" are the
dog-eaters, and the "Hop-pop, " the cannibals. The "Hop-pop"
receive their name from the fact that this cry is heard whenever, in
genuine or feigned rage, they are driven to eating human flesh. At
that point, all who belong to the other religions seek to get out of the
way of those who are raging. The followers of the "Hop-pop, " though,
unflinchingly hold out their arms and allow a piece of flesh to be torn
out A man is able to belong to more than one religion and can sometimes be compelled to become a member of a second religion.
-
a
In the First General Report on the Indians of British Columbia
to the British Association for the Advancement of Science, Boas says
that the Tsimshian have four secret societies. They are the Ola la or
Wihalait, 1\15/ntlem, Melitla, and SEmhalait. He alternately uses
M-evitla and M'eitla but always uses Ola la, SErnhala;.t, and NEVntlem.
See Schulenburg's second footnote in Language Sample IV.
36
SCHULENBURG'S BOOK
Book I
Grammar
THE GRAMMAR
37
I.
PHONOLOGY AND STRESS
# 1. To begin with, I give Boas's synopsis of the phonetic
inventorya [[see also footnote a, Language Sample
"Vowels: a, a, e, E, i, o, u.
Consonants: b, p; w; m; gy, ky; g, k; g, k; r, q;
h; d, t; n; ds, ts; s; 1, tl; y.
"A" is never pure, but pronounced between a and a, Long vowels are
by many individuals still further lengthened by repeated intonation;
for instance, ii75't and iC7ot, = man; teen and ts°7'en, = to enter. I
have preferred to retain the repeated vowels, except where I was sure
that the repetition is only an individual peculiarity. The distinction of
surds and sonants is clear, but terminal surds are throughout transformed into sonants whenever a vowel follows. Ds and ts, however,
when followed by an hiatus, are very much alike. "S" is not the
English s, but has a slight touch of sh, the point of the tongue not
quite touching the teeth. "L" is pronounced, the tip of the tongue
touching the upper teeth, the back being pressed against the palate.
uN" is similar to dn, the nose being almost closed.
All sounds occur as initial sounds. I found the following combinations of consenants beginning words:
pt
kw
pts
ptl
kt
kts
ks; ksp, ksk, kstq
a
qp
qk
qt; qtk
qts; qtsky
nd
nts
nl
tgy
tk; tkw
tk°
tq
sp
sky
sk
sg
sk
tlp
tig
tlk
sq
qs; qsk, qst
srl
qtl
st
stz
Franz Boas, III Tsimshian, linguistics section of the "First
General Report on the Indians of British Columbia" in appendix of the
"Fifth Report of the Committee on the Northwestern Tribes of the
Dominion of Canada, " British Association for the Advancement of
Sciences, Vol. 59 (London: John Murray, 1890), pp. 877-78.
Hereafter cited as "1889 Boas Report" in double brackets within
the text of the grammar proper.
38
The following consonants occur as terminal sounds:
p, m, ky, k,
r,
q,
t, n
tl
Terminal combinations of consonants are
tk.; ntk pq
1p lky pk
qk
tk; ntk, ltk
tsk
mk
sk; ksk,
pt
ps
tq; ltq qt
ks
mq
nq
nsk, tsk
lot; lkt ms
st; lkst, ks
qtl; mqtl
ntl
lks, tiks tstl
mst
sq
lq
lk
tlk; mtlk
qs; pqs
nt
It
ns
is
tlt
# 2. Another transcription [[other than that of Boas]] was
selected in the translation of the Gospels. Following is the "Key to
the sounds of the letters" found on page two [[of the translation of the
Gospels]]:
"a as in pan.
ti II
par.
e " " net.
-a-,
-6.
" " they.
ii
i
II
T
" "
o
" "
5 as in note.
u
cur.
ri " " rule.
aisle.
ai
!v
ig
IF
pin.
au
II
i
machine.
not.
of
I?
??
ou
H
II
taught
boil.
bough.
is always hard.
is a deep guttural.
.g.
k
is like the ch in buch (German).
tk is a sound that can only be learnt from a native.
lth is very like 11 in Welsh.
z, when initial, is equal to ds; when final, to ts. "
The following comparisons with the Boas phonetic inventory are
"g
to be noted:
au =
= k, g; k = q; lth = tl.
39
# 3. There are no diphthongs according to Boas; he always
heard the individual vowels pronounced separately.
# 4. Before vowels p, qu, k, t become b, gw, g, d (compare # 1).
# 5.
walp
>
walbun
dukriqu
haik
nagwat
>
dukTagwa
>
haigum
nagwadi.
>
Medially, k usually disappears before w; thus
hilk-wa.-1uksh
>
hilwaluksh
ha va-. 1 .
hi-1k -
When a word ends in a vowel and a vowel-initial suffix is
joined to the vowel, a y is inserted to avoid hiatus.
wilaiyu
Thus one says
instead of
# 6.
houyri
gilauyii.
nakraiyum
viayurn
IP
nakno-um,
It
wa.-urn,
maiya
mai-a.
# 7. In the case of the word "da, " I find a phenomenon which I
would like to call alliteration.
Therefore, when the following word begins with g, Hda" very
frequently is changed to "ga. "
Thus:
da goi
>
da gum >
ga goi,
ga gum.
In addition, it is to be noted here that n-51 ya gu is found instead
of na da
# 8. Occasionally a final -k appears in front of an initial
gutteral.
40
For example:
Christk gish
(Christ).
goibak gish
Shimoigiatk gun
(goiba).
(Shimoigiat).
This language also has great preference for final t; no explanation other than preference can be given.
Numerals, in particular, may be indicated in this connection.
(Boas:) naanhi5,-/ t'Epq-iidEt = the third.
For example:
[[ "1889 Boas Report, " Ordinal Numbers,
p. 881. J]
# 9. Nothing about stress could be determined from the
[[biblical]] text material; according to verbal statements of Mr. Boas,
he, too, could establish nothing definite [[in this regard]].
41
II.
THE STRUCTURE OF THE LANGUAGE
# 10. Introductory Remarks. People have talked about a
language structure that is specifically American. They have called
this language structure "incorporating" or "polysynthetic" and have
spoken as though the languages of the Western Hemisphere were constructed according to a common pattern and as though this pattern
were characteristic of only these languages. Today we know that
neither assumption is correct. Incorporation and polysynthesism are
to be found in various parts of the Old World. Of the Indian languages
there are many, including the one in which we are interested, that
have a completely different and much simpler external form. If we
choose to speak of a certain general family similarity among these
languages, common elements should be sought not so much in the
external features of the languages themselves as in the mental processes in which the spiritual and emotional life of these peoples is
manife sted.
We should seek to see then how similar needs, similar habits of
thought and perception, have made use of the most diverse types of
construction. With regard to these habits, it must be determined to
what extent, and how, the conceptual world is classified according to
parts of speech; which logical, psychological and aesthetic categories
have been preferred and developed, and which have not; and in what
order the parts of speech are assembled when formed into actual
speech.
# 11. Following the predominant tendency of American
languages to incorporate as much as possible into the verbal expression, the verb in the Tsimshian Indian language stands out more
prominently than all the other parts of speech.
42
A. Verbal Character of the Language
There is a special predilection to employ the verbal mode
of expression To begin with
a) for our [[verb]] to be"
Luke 22070 malth da shim ni walla = ihr saget es, ich bin es
(vial = to do, to act) = Ye say that I am.
# 12.
Matt, 13249 ninT dum w7.1 da da zida ltha sh-abl harizoga = also
wird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt gekommen ist) = So shall it be
at the end of the world [[has
= gelobt sei, welcher...
Matt 23239 g.umgaulth Walsh ga
Blessed is he that...
b) for prepositions
watk = come [[past participle]] and amyg, (am = good, la = to go)
[[plural of watk; see # 34]] are used in the meaning from something
here" [[to this place]]
Luke 24 ada wil di doulthsh Joseph ga watk gut gish ga Galilee
watk gut gish ga agulzabum Nazaret ga = da machte sich auch auf
Joseph (gekommen) a.us Galilaa, (gekommen) aus der Stadt Nazareth =
And Joseph also went up [[come]] from Galilee, [[come]] out of the
city of Nazareth.
ga
Luke 22271
awil ltha dup lip naknO- watk ga did-a: lip zumak dit =
denn wir haben selbst es gehOrt (gekommen) aus seinem eigenen
Mande = for we ourselves have heard [[come]] of his own mouth.
John 62,31 na ginamt ga anai ga watk gut gish ga laka gish
dupnTht = er gab Brod (gekommen) vom Himmel ihnen = He gave them
bread [[come]] from heaven to eat.
adat hapt ga amygt gish ga tk-a-.nTsh ga.gulzipzap ga
= and sie liefen weg von alien Orten zu ihm = And the people saw them
Mark 6233
departing, and many knew him, and ran afoot thither out of all cities.
43
ada shagait zutgoiduksh ga Pharisees gish niat,
amyat gish ga Jerusalem ga = und es kamen zu ihm die Pharis'i.er,.,
von Jerusalem her; = Then came together unto him the Pharisees,...
came from Jerusalem.
To say "of", to testify or be evidence "of", to write "of", to
tell "of", to hear "of"
everywhere "of" is verbally expressed:
John 10:41 ada am tkani gau nahoush John da wila wal yaa gwa
shimhou dit = aber aides, was Johannes gesagt hat von (dem Thun
dieses) diesem Menschen, das ist wahr = but all things that John
spake of [[the activities of this]] this man were true.
John 1047 ada houit gish ga wila watt ga = und er spricht von
ihm (von seinem Thun) = Jesus saw Nathanael coming to him, and
saith to him [[of his activities]].
John 8:18 ada Nagwat ga gix nat in haizi ga magaunshk ga did
wila warut = und mein Vater, der mich gesandt, zeugt von mir (eig.
von dem, was ich thue) = and the Father that sent me beareth witness
of me [[really, of that which I doll.
John 5A6 awil na damish dida wila walut = denn er hat
geschrieben von mir (von dem, was ich thue) = for he wrote of me [[of
that which I doll.
Mark 7:1
.
John 7013
ada am a lthgat na za girl a lgiaz_a dalth wila wait,
gish ga Jews ga = Niemand aber redete frei von ihm,
denn sie filrchteten sich von den Juden = Howbeit no man spake openly
of him for fear of the Jews.
Mark 1:30 ada di:it gut prigiit gish ga wila wilt ga = und bald
erzghlten sie ihm von ihr = and anon they tell him of her.
Luke 13:1 pliant gish ga wila welsh ga Galilee = sie verkiindigten ihm von den Galilgern = There were present at that season some
that told him of the Galilaeans.
44
Matt. 14:1 whatit tkashnTat ga ada nakriliit gut Herod ga tetrarch
ga wila walsh Jesus ga = zu derselben Zeit hOrte der Vierfarst
Herodes von Jesu = At that time Herod the tei-trarch heard of the
fame of Jesus.
"after" in expressions of time:
[[occurs before the time element]]
Accordingly, for "after six days" one says "after six days had
passed, " etc.
Only a few examples follow here:
Mark 14:1 ltha gouclTsh ga g3'belt ga sha ga..
Tagen... = After two days...
= nach zwei
.
ada ltha goudTsh ga gauldit ga sha ga... = und nach
sechs Tagen... = And after six days.
gunwal (gun = because of, for; wal = to do) = for the sake
Mark 9:2
of:
Mark 6:17
... ash gut Herodias ga gunwalt ga = ...urn der
Herodias willen = For Herod himself had sent forth and laid hold upon
John, and bound him in prison for He-ro.'-diAs' sake.
Mark 8:35 ada alt ligit na dumt in gwa'an na didrilsh dit ash
nriya dum Lunwal dit di-1th Am da Malshk gut = und wer aber wird
verlieren sein Leben urn meinet und des Evangelium willen... = but
whosoever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel's.
John 15:3
ltha al hashba shikshakshk ga shimt -a- nTnT algiaga na
houyti da gwashim.gunwal dit = ihr seid bereits rein urn des Worts
willen, das ich zu euch geredet habe = Now ye are clean through the
word which I have spoken unto you.
c) for substantives
Many verbs can also function as substantives, for example:
"to speak" and "word"
algiak
"to sin" and "sin"
hadak
45
"to dream" and "dream"
"to wrong someone" and "offense"
or "transgression.
Verbal paraphrase is used to express the ideas "time" and
"future. " The language has no specific expressions for these two
kshawauk
gish
concepts:
Matt. 24:39 nTnT dum di walsh ga dum wil goiduksh ga
Lthgolthk gish ga giat ga = also wird auch sein die Zukunft des
Menschensohnes (wenn er kommen wird) = so shall also the coming of
the Son of man be [[whenever he shall come]].
Matt. 24:37 ada nTwalt ga na walsh ga n'da didOlsh Noah ga...
= and wie es war zu der Zeit, wo Noa lebte... = But as the days of
N5'-7 were.
Mark 13:24 ada zida ltha wilt, n'tkulangunludukdauklthgum
gagaudit, dum... = aber zu der Zeit, nach dieser Trabsal, werden...
(zida = wenn, ltha = Perfectum, wal = thun, -t = er, sie, es) = But in
those days, after that tribulation, the sun shall be darkened, and the
moon shall not give her light, [[zida = whenever, ltha = the perfect
tense, wg.1 = to do, -t = he, she, it
Mark 1:15
ltha liihoigiaga dum wil
= es ist erfallt
die Zeit... = The time is fulfilled.
B. Nominal Formation
I.
Formation of Substantives
# 13. Substantives derived from verbs are
yloulthemak
to command, to order
Vaoulthemgushk
command, order
algiak
algiagushk
to speak
chief (spokesman)
[[verb]]
[[noun]]
[[verb]]
[[noun]]
46
shinlait
to point out, to, at
[[verb]]
shinlaiduksh
[[indicate, signify]]
sign, symbol
to praise (to speak well of)
praise
[[verb]]
[[verb]]
(lii)shriwilTnshk
to pursue
pursuit
yi.mu k
to lead astray, to tempt
[[verb]]
ygmzu shk
temptation
[[noun]]
magaund
to bear witness, to testify
testimony, evidence
[[verb]]
to honor, to esteem
[[verb]]
honor
[[noun]]
ama alak
ama dalgushk
(117)shriwirin
magaunshk
lthaut
lthaumshk
[[noun]]
[[noun]]
[[noun]]
[[noun]]
to be surprised, to be
[[verb]]
astonished; to marvel
astonishment; miracle
[[noun]]
llishanalthashk
# 14. (Boas:) k-, place of, only occurring in geographical
lrishanIlth
names:
Laq (1) -k (2) -tlgau (3) -ralrms (4) = on (1) where (2) little (3)
haws (4); an island near Fort Simpson,
KEnE (1) -k (2) -qVI.g (3) = place (1) where (2) scalps (3).
MEqtla (1) -k (2) -cfa/tla (3) = narrow channel (1) where (2) sea (3).
Laq (1) -k (2) -15n (3) = on (1) where (2) (Gyit)lan (3)0 village of the
Gyitlan.
[[1889 Boas Report, pp. 887-88 ]]
# 15. (Boas:) KEnE-, place of:
KEnE (1) -k (2) -q2/15. (3) = place (1) where (2) scalps (3).
KEnE (1) -kara/5 (2) = place of (1) trade (2).
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. 1]
47
(Boas:) kspE-, place where something is frequently done
KspE (1) -leamFlelEq (2) = where always (1) good for nothing say (2)
# 16.
= playground.
KspE (1) -eg. (2) = where one always (1) sits (2).
KspE (1) -si5nt (2) = where always (1) in summer (2).
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. 1]
# 17. (Boas:) ha-, instrument:
haaks, cup, spoon = drinking instrument.
haallagyaq, windpipe = speaking instrument.
hayg/wiqk, fork = eating instrument.
hadVosk, broom = sweeping instrument.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]]
# 18. ha followed by 11" (= at, on):
halidamTsh = writing tablet or slate (a tool or device on which one
writes).
halidap = court of justice (dap = to set right).
halTshgriut = coffin (shgu = to lie).
halitkauk = dining tables (plural).
# 19.
(Boas:) "kan"-, (gun) "instrument":
[[Schulenburggs term]]
"k'anwa'i, rowlock = rowing instrument.
lant1.75/opes, thimble = sewing instrument.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888.]]
gunyikshza-ltk, sponge = a device with which the face is washed.
gungekunshk, mill = a device for grinding or milling.
# 20. Other derivatives and compounds are:
1) (Boas:) ts'Em-, (zum), in:
[[Schulenburg's term]]
ts'Emaks, = in water, a sea monster.
ts°Emtslaq, = in nose, nostril.
ts'EmEn'oin, = in hand, palm of hand.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]]
48
2) ndE- (ri'da), place where something is kept
[[Schulenburg's term]]
ndEsuiga sugar -bowl.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]j
,
wo- (wha), withoutg
[[Schulenburg's term]]
w3nralotk, without nest (a name) .
woksenVtlk, without breath (a name),
wr5ka1uts, without labret = girl.
[[1889 Boas Report, p, 887; correction
woo ]]
4) wilThis one indicates place, situation or condition, facto
wiluwan = dwellings (plural) (wan = to sit, to be)
wrlgiat = birth (becoming man, giat = human being)
wilhaik = smell [[possibly "reputation" [fig. ]]] (haik = spirit;
essence Hfigo ji)
wilnaksh = marriage (naksh = husband, to marry)
wilshgGith dumwilw-a-lgiat = the place of a skull
[[see, for example St, Mark 1522 Golgotha,
St. Luke 23g33 Calvary,
St. John 19g17 the place of a skull, which is
called in the Hebrew Golgotha, ]]
lthameans that which is completed and lasts or continues
lthagigiat (plural) old men (giat = human being)
5)
6)
sh-
sh goes before g.un (= tree), wherever the specific tree type is given
shgun fig = fig tree
shgun grape = grape tree
(see for comparison the suffix -sh in the section on formatives)
[[#
1 2 2 ]1
49
Formation of Adjectives
# 21. A few adjectives are placed completely unaltered in front
of substantives:
wi wilhelgiat = many people
tkani sha = every day
wuda hawalp = large houses
slid testament = New Testament
# 22. The ending -urn is attached to most adjectives preceding
substantive s
For example:
Mark 16:5 maukshgum wash = weisses Kleid = white garment.
Mark 9:25 zEagum haik = tauber Geist = deaf spirit.
John 4:10 didOlshum aksha = lebendiges Wasser = living water.
Luke 22:50 nakshimyaonum zum75 = rechtes Ohr = right ear.
Luke 24:4 gwilgwalukshum wishwasch = glanzendweisse
Kleider = shining garments. [[note: wishwaschi]
Matt. .15:19 brgum magaunshk = falsches Zeugniss = false
witnes s
hada.gum mai = schlechte Frucht = evil fruit, logum
gun = fauler Baum = corrupt tree.
Matt. 23:26 shaunshum Pharisee = blinder Pharisger = blind
Pharisee.
Matt. 15:24 gvigtgum matT = verlorene Schafe = lost sheep.
Matt. 5:35 wTlEkshum king = grosser KOnig = great king.
Matt. 25:31 n'lth.5dukshum angels = heilige Engel = holy angels.
# 23. On rare occasions, -a takes the place of -urn. (perhaps
Matt. 7 :18
a phonetic reduction)
good tidings
ama malshk
(hadaq a cci/ot = bad person,but is no longer used according to
50
Boas) [[1889 Boas Report, p. 880. ]]
# 24. (Boasz) A number of adjectives are abbreviated in forming compounds
very, sEmral, abbreviated, sEm: sEmhalVit, the
important dance. good for nothing, IamstE, abbreviated, k'arng
kiamw-alp, a miserable house.
The abbreviations cannot be used at pleasure. KamtsEwalp and
k.amwalp, miserable house, are equally correct; but, while we have
atigE sEmafm, not very nice, sEmIlm would not be correct; it must
be sEmral 1m, very nice.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 880. ]]
Plural Formation
#25. Nominals and verbs form the plural in the same ways.
The forms of the plural are quite varied; a classification is absolutely
necessary.
C.
I. Class
The plural is formed by means of doubling [[duplication]].
dog
hash
hashlia.sh,
# 26.
good
am
am-gm.
foot
shT
stirs hi:.
to do injustice
grsh
day
sha
gishgrsh.
shasha.
[[# 37, XII Class; 1889 Boas Report, p. 878: Plural, # 1.
day, ca.]]
hill
dhT
dhidhr.
tree
gun
gungun
II. Class
The plural is formed by means of doubling [[duplication]]
with vowel change (preference for short i in the first syllable).
# 27.
dress
wash
stone
laup
wishwash.
liplaup.
to build
zap
zipzap.
to tremble
to tell
yg..k
yikyak.
malth
milthmalth.
51
dash
to push
of
to throw
lak -yap
land; ground; soil,
arable land
[["The Glossary" (German-Tsimshian)
dishdash
aioi.
lak -yipyap.
a. Land see under lak
b. Land, Feld see yap.
"The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German)
lak-yap under lak = land (singular)
Mark 6:1, 5:14, 13:34;
John 3:22
yap = field, land (singular)
Mark 12:1, 4:20, 4:31;
Matt. 3:3. ]]
III. Class
# 28. The plural is formed by reduplication (partial doubling):
algiak
shipshiebun.
luklukshauk.
dadglak,
alalgiak.
to flee from
gTEci
gigT.Eq.
to give food,
nourishment
to give
to buy
sick
testimony; evidence
to scold
gTen
gigTen.
to love
door
to talk to
to speak
to stab, pierce
to know [[as a fact]]
shiebun
lukshauk
dalak
ginam
gra k
gigTak.
shTepk
shipshrepk.
makmagaunshk.
hakhaksh.
magaunshk
haksh
gyetlk
wilai
gyetlgyetlk.
wilwilai.
52
IV. Class
# 29. The plural is formed by reduplication with vowel change
full
holtk
to be (location)
hokshk
low
white
mauk
mauksh
people
wit -zok
halholtk,
hakhokshk.
makmauk.
mukshmauksh.
wil-zakzok.
to fall
to trust in
to wash
to wait
grave
oksh
a.koksh.
waiyauksh
yauksh
waiyikyauksh.
language
wil-dau
yoiyiksh
babOish.
wil-dadau.
diaala
didTiala.
bOrsh
gpz
to cut off, down
haiz
to send
shaipk
hard
shaksh
clean; pure
ye ltk
to return
1Fksh
large
[[## 34, IX Class; 1889 Boas Report, p. 879 # 9
wu/d'a.]]
bashuk
to separate (from)
/
1.3'laq
ghost; spirit
magaunshk
testimony; evidence
[[# 28, III. Class. ]]
shaip
bone
wale"
load; burden
shinuwok
to threaten
balgiaksh
heavy
daklth
to bind; tie
ga shgoz .
hashhaiz.
shipshaipk.
shikshaksh.
yilyeltk.
liklFksh.
large, wi- -bishbashuk.
/
bilbglaq.
mukmagaunshk.
shishaip.
wilware.
shinuwauwok.
bilbalgiaksh.
didaklth.
53
with difficulty
to come
to ask
daukIth
g.oiduksh
dakdauklth.
gutzoiduksh.
giTadak
gutgiTadak.
V. Class
# 30. The plural is formed by reduplication with euphonic k
or k:
weak
alashk
to command
to be angry
y-ioulthemak
sign, symbol
shinlaiduksh
shindointk
shtal
garden
to accompany
to answer
lthriundi
akalashk.
yaky-ioulthemak.
lthiklthilundi.
shikshinlaiduksh.
shikshindointk.
shiksht61.
dTlamak
dakdTlamak.
just; correct
hoigiak
cripple; invalid
lthTgiatk
hakhoigiak.
IthiklthTgiatk.
to command
haizumak
to spit
lthT1
Ithiklthil.
to lead astray, tempt
to whip, scourge
yamuk
yakya.-muk.
wunazak
wakwunazak.
to kiss
homzak
feast, festival
rialgiat
luklrialgiat.
spice
mThoksh
mukmThoksh.
to meet someone
to work
to pay
mountain
to see
debt, liability;
liid a ltk
radakdg.ltk.
halthalsh
libal-
hakhalthalsh.
shgunTsh
shikshgunish.
nTiz
nuknTiz.
Fshk
akUshk.
trespasses
luklib-a7.1-.
54
VI. Clas s
The plural is formed by the prefixes lu, li. (Is), la.
(which, of course, are all related to each other)
laqudadak.
qudak
to leave
laqudi-dT.
qudr
to hunger, be hungry
libish.
Wish
to be afraid
# 31.
to follow
to laugh
to fall down
yak
l yak.
shisha'iksh
lisha"iksh.
ka- ina
1-elina (Boas).
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 8. ]]
kshtok
to sleep
aia-vra.
to cry, shout,
lakshtoiyak.
aia -lawa.
shriek, scream
to warm oneself
to drink
wram-hou
giamuksh
aksh
VII. Clas s
lamuksh.
la'aksh.
# 32. The plural is formed by the prefix hrik (k usually disap-
pears before w):
a menial: servant
to do
to call
house
tkulwa'ulimlthk
wal
haitk
wale
tkulhrikwa-ulimlthk.
haw5:1.
hakhaitk.
haw-alp.
name
hawg.
wa'a (wi)
VIII. Class
# 33. The plural is formed by the prefix ga:
.ganagw-it.
nagwit
father
gaud
gagaudo
heart
.g,Atkamau.
tkamau
body
to sell
55
ear
hand
zum6
anon
gazumFo
ga'anon
dumgoush
zumak
gazumako
lip
lame (of humans)
gwulthak
gagwulthak.
zibi,
gazib"-a-..
ship, canoe
kshau
gakshauo
bed
lamp
kda
gakd-a..o
1-5.5qush
fool, crazy person
mawaza
gariZqush.
gamawaza.
master, lord
mTy-in
gamTy-gn .
root
leaf
h-cish
.galio-sh.
yensh
the exterior
the interior
qud-cin
zau
shimhoudiksh
gayensh.
gaqud3n.
gazair.
g.ashimhoudiksh.
doulth
.gadoulth.
nun
gan-d un.
shii'unsh
gasha'unsh.
zFak
gazak.
gw7a
gagwe-a.
klthgau
gaklth.gau.
lthgwishei
.galthgwishei
galiish-inalth.
head
mouth
to believe
to go away
to decorate
blind
deaf
poor
reward, wages
to be pleased, happy
to be horrified, amazed, lasha.nalth
gadumgousho
shocked
IX. Clas s
# 34.
The plural is derived from a stem different from that of
the singular
child
lthqaumlthk
to sit
dh-5:
gubuteilthko
wan.
56
zak
to die
golth.
ba
to run
amya.
wak
from, away
yez.
zaq
to kill
nak
to lie, (to incline
toward)
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 9; In both sections of °°The Glossary?'
Schulenburg acknowledges Boas for this wordA
tkauk.
yawuk
to eat
lamzak.
ziin
to enter
makshk.
haitk
to stand
bauk.
wihou
to cry
large, great
[[# 29, IV Class.]]
laklak
to fall
ga
to take
luksh
separated from
klthnash-gout
to throw oneself down
lthgwa
little
Rima'kca
to keep watch, to
watch [[over]]
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 8. ]]
X. Class
# 35. The plural is formed by diaeresis:
kshil (B.: ksEr)
to go out
yaq
to hang
dok.
hagul.
klthna -dauk.
guba.
15hayekca (Boas).
kshauk (B.: ksL.'.q).
yaiaq (Boas).
[[correction: Boas: yViaq.]]
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 4. Note: ksEr----ks'k = to leave the
house; see #6 and note: clg.Iwutlt ---kadgf= to leave. ]]
57
XI. Clas s
# 36. The plural is formed by reduplication of the last syllable,
sometimes with a vowel change.
to wish
woman, wife
sin
before [[in place
and time]];
hashak
hanak
hadak
hazaklthk
hashashak.
anTsh
aria/fish.
hana:nak.
hadadak.
hazazaklthk.
in front of [[palace]]
branch
XII. Class
# 37. The singular and the plural have the same form:
(Boas:) "bear,
ol.
cat,
deer,
seal,
cedar,
arrow,
day,
ti5/us (Chinook).
wan.
hauwall.
ca
(compare # 26: sha-shasha, in the Gospel translations in
a few places. )
year,
fathom,
g'alit.
blanket,
guc.
to hear,
nEciEni5/.
to see,
It seems that all quadrupeds, the dog excepted (compare # 26)
belong to this class; also divisions of time and measures."
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 878: Plural, # I.]]
# 38. To be regarded as a special form:
broad, wide
tkau
daktkau
to rise, stand up,
ginTat
nanTat: (may
get up; to rise from
belong here [[under
the dead
# 38. ]] )
58
Doubled pluralization is found occasionally
d5". (# 34)
for the more common
dalri
wan (# 32, # 34)
htiwan
II
wan (# 33, # 34)
gawan
II
gutgoiduksh (# 33, # 29)
gagutgoiduksh
In the same way.gazilzal is also regarded as a doubled plural
form of zal = "face; countenance" (compare # 27).
# 40. In compound words only one part carries the plural
indication, usually the last part:
lakyCip
land; ground, soil;
arable land
[[# 27 and accompanying note for lak-y3p and its plural. Note the
# 39.
VI
I
II
I I
hyphenation. ]]
to be in
town, city
ship
[[# 33, VIII Class. ]]
rich
image; comparison;
parable
liihokshk
liThakhokshk.
gulzap
gulzipzap.
agwigakshau.
agwYkshau
amawal
wiltkulnEunshk
a m aga va'.
.
wiltkulnukngunshk.
lthirrig.ush.gosh.
lthirnzosh
hagulEgyat (Boas).
lEksgyat
stranger
(= a foreign people)
(foreigner
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 9 under compound words. ]]
to be annoyed
D. General Rules of Agreement
# 41. The subject and the predicate are requisite components
of (grammatical) sentences; an expression for the copula does not
exist.
The predicate stands before the subject:
59
Mark 12:29
ada housh Jesus = und Jesus sprach = and Jesus
spoke. [[King James: answered]]
Mark 8:11 ada gutgoiduksh ga Pharisees ga = und die
Phariser kamen = and the Pharisees came.
John 5:17 ada drlamak gish Jesus ga = und Jesus antwortete =
and Jesus answered.
# 42. The object of a verb stands after the subject:
Mark 15311 ada naknaunagumaksh ga manpriests gish ga
ga = und es reizten die Hohenpriester das Volk = and the
chief priests moved the people.
John 5:20 shrebunt ga Nagwat ga Lthg5lthk gaga = der Vater
liebt den Sohn = the father loveth the son.
John 6:11 ada wilt dokt gut Jesus ga anai ga = und Jesus nahm
das Brod = And Jesus took the loaves.
# 43. A word by means of which another word becomes more
specifically stated stands
1) in front of
a) adjectives
Luke 2:10 ama malshk = gute Botschaft = good tidings.
Mark 5:41 lthgwa hanak = (kleines Weib) MOdchen = [[little
woman]] damsel.
Mark 6:6 guba gulzipzap = (kleine Oerter) DOrfer = [[little
places]] villages.
Luke 18:8
ama Shawilaigiamgushk = guter Meister = Good
Master.
Mark 5:24 \NY wilhelgiat = viel Volk = much people.
John 16:13 dumt dEuntk ga shim da shpagait tkani shimhout
er wird faren euch in alle Wahrheit = he will guide you into all truth.
Mark 14:24 shri. testament = neues Testament = new testament.
60
John 13:34
sha. yaoulthemgushk = neues Gebot = new command-
ment.
nayri shimhou shgun grapeit = ich bin ein rechter
Weinstock = I am the true vein.
b) numerals
Mark 5:25 gaul ga hanak ga = ein Weib = a certain woman.
Mark 12:28 gaul ga hilkdamishit ga = ein Schriftgelehrter = one
of the scribes.
Mark 11:1 dupkadEilt ga disciples gut ga = seine zwei Janger =
two of his disciples.
Mark 12:13 nagazIoush ga Pharisees dilth Herodians = einige
Pharisger und Leute des Herodes = a few Pharisees and He -r6' dr-lains.
c) adverbs
Mark 10:23 shimaul dauklthk ga... = sehr schwierig = How
hardly shall they.
Mark 5:12 adat shagait gwuniit ga... = und zusammen baten
ihn... = And all the devils besought him.
Mark 5:43 shimt yakyaoulthemakt = er verbot hart = And he
charged them straitly.
Mark 5:37 althgat anauklth = nicht erlaubte er = he suffered
John 15:1
no man.
Luke 20:11
gik haiz = abermals schicken = again... sent.
2) after
genitive:
Luke 22:16 kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga Lakgga = das Reich
Gottes = the kingdom of God.
Luke 23:52 tkamaush Jesus ga = der Leib von Jesus = the body
of Jesus.
w-a-lpsh ga Pharisee ga = das Haus des Pharisgers =
the Pharisee's house.
Luke 7:36
61
Matt. 4:4
zumg.ksh ga Shimoigiat ga Laka:ga = der Mund Gottes
= the mouth of God.
John 5:25 amhoush ga lthg5lthk = die Stimme des Sohnes = the
voice of the Son.
# 44. Apposition takes place by simple juxtaposition:
Mark 12:30 MYygn ga Shimoigiat gun ga = der Herr, dein Gott
= the Lord thy God.
Luke 2:34 ada houit gish Mary ga, naut ga = and er sprach zu
Maria, seiner Mutter = And Simon blessed them and said unto Mary his
mother.
Luke 3:4
dida sha5nshk ga na algiaksh Isaiah ga, prophet ga
in d em Buch der Rede Jesaias des Propheten = in the book of the words
E-saiA l-as the prophet.
Luke 3:2 John lthg5lthk gish Zacharias = Johannes, Sohn des
Zacharias = John the son of Zgch-g.--rTI-as.
Mark 15:47 Mary ga naush Joses ga... = Maria, die Mutter
des Joses = Mary the mother of Joses.
Luke 1:73 Abraham nagwa.dum = Abraham, unser Vater = our
father Abraham.
Matt. 1:6 David ga king ga = der KOnig David = David the king.
62
III.
THE PRONOUNS
A. The Personal Pronoun
# 45. We have to differentiate between dependent and independ-
ent pronoun forms
[[as shown on page 63]].
1
# 46. Examples of the independent pronoun forms:
a) of niTya- (B. 2 nErii5)
[[correction: nE/riol]:
/lily-II lukshauksha matit = ich bin die Thiir zu den
Schafen = I am the door of the sheep.
Luke 24:39 /IT lip nTsh nuyu = sehet, ich bin es selber = Be
John 10:7
hold... it is I myself.
b) of goi (ggi) [[from Boas. correction: aii]]:
John 6:37 tkanT.sh ga ginamsh ga NagwIdT ga goi dum
gutgoiduksha dida. goi = alles, was mir mein Vater giebt, wird kommen
zu mir = All that the Father giveth me shall come to me.
Luke 20:3 ada ma shim malthil da: goi = und saget ihr es mir =
and answer me.
c) of nun (B.: nErEn) [[correction: nE'rEn]]:
Matt. 1:20 Joseph, nagun lthg3lthk gish David = Joseph, du
Sohn Davids = Joseph, thou son of David.
Matt. 16:16 ada houit ga, Christit nugun, Lthgolthk gish ga
did31shum Shimoigiat ga = und er sprach: du bist Christus, der Sohn
des lebendigen Gottes = and said, Thou art the Christ, the Son of the
living God.
d) of gwan:
Matt. 8:13 ada nrwa".1 da na wila shimhoudikshint, nTnTdum WE1
cri d-a gwan = und wie du geglaubt hast, so geschehe auch dir = and as
thou hast believed, so be it done unto thee.
Independent
Dependent
nTiya
me goi
you
nugun
you gwan
he, she (present)
riTat, (nTadit)
him, her (present)
(absent)
nTatga
we
nrig.um
you
nushim
they (present)
dupnrat
(absent)
- u (absent)
(ma) - un
you
- it, t
he, she (present)
I (present)
I
(absent)
us gum
you gwashim
them (present)
(absent)
(n)
- itga, tga (Ega)
we
- urn
you
- shim (Ens Em)
they (present)
- it
dupniadit
dupnTatga
(absent)
(absent)
itga, tga (Ega)
[[Schulenburg uses the second person familiar form in German. The familiar/formal distinction in the pronouns is completely irrelevant to Tsimshian, according to John A. Dunn.
(Ega), (EnsFm), and (Ega) are from the 1889 Boas Report, p. 8820 Personal Pronoun
paradigm. This citation serves for subsequent references to Boas throughout the personal pronoun
section, # 46 and # 47. ]]
64
Matt. 14:4 althga hoigiak da gwan ma dum ga dit = nicht ist es
far dich recht, dass du sie nimmst = It is not lawful for thee to have
her.
e) of niat:
John 8:12 /fiat ga gat in yaku althga dum... = er, der mir
nachfolgt, wird nicht... = he that followeth me shall not....
John 8:26
gau ga na naknoT gish nTat = was ich von ihm gehOrt
habe = which I have heard of him.
f) of nil-gum (B.: nErEm) [[correction: nE/rEm]]:
Matt. 20:12 ada adTgriel ma wila wilagwa dit dish nr.i.gum = und
du hast sie uns gleich gemacht = and thou hast made them equal unto
us.
Luke 12:41
nrigumlth wil algiagunT gu wiltkuldainshk ga
gwa... ? = sagst du zu uns dieses Gleichnis... ? = speakest thou this
parable unto us... ?
g) gum (B.: glEm):
Mark 12:19 Miyrn, na damsh Moses d-S. guin = Herr, Moses hat
uns geschrieben = Master, Moses wrote unto us.
gum -a.
Mark 6:3 ada ligi wha hakhokshk gulth lthimuktitk ga
gwaT? = und sind nicht auch seine Schwestern bei uns hier ? = and are
not his sisters here with us?
h) of nrishim (B.: nErEsEm) [[correction: nE/rEsEm]]:
John 10:34
nTishim shimgigiadum Lakat = ihr seid GOtter = Ye
are gods?
John 15:5
ritiyii shgun grapeit, nrishim ananTshit = ich bin der
Weinstock, ihr seid die Reben = I am the vine, ye are the branches.
1) of gwashim (B.: guasEm) [[correction: gua'sEm]]:
John 14:17 awil hokshk ga dida gwashim, ada dum gup lahokshk
ga dida gwashim = denn er bleibet bei euch und er wird bei euch
bleiben = for he dwelleth with you, and shall be in you.
65
John 15:11
houya- da- gwashim = ich sage euch = have I spoken
unto you.
k) [[j]] of dupnTat:
ada dTlamak gish Jesus gish dupnTat = und Jesus
antwortete ihnen = Jesus answered them.
John 10:28 ada na ginam whati shab-im g. undid 51 s h a dash
dupniat = und ich gebe ihnen das ewige Leben = And I given unto them
John 10:25
eternal life.
2.
# 47. Examples of the dependent pronoun forms (suffixes):
a)
of the pronominal suffix of the first person singular
(present):
Different forms appear here according to the preceding vowels
and consonants:
1) after vowels
yu:
gwildum Loudryii = ich bin bereit = I am ready.
Luke 8:28 gwuniiyii = ich bitte = I beseech.
John 1:50 houyri = ich sage = I say [[King James: said]].
John 4:25 wilaiyu = ich weiss = I know.
John 9:5 dhayti = ich bin (bleibe) = I am (remain).
John 17:11 gilauyir = ich bin nicht = I am not [[King James:
I am no]].
2) after sh, z, 1, lth (occasionally), m, n, k* (occasionally)
Luke 22:33
Luke 2:10
Luke 5:13
dagpidukshir = ich bringe = I bring.
dum want = ich will es thun = I will do it [[King
James: I will]].
Definite rules are not established in this case.
66
shanakshina = ich habe ein Weib genommen = I
have married a wife.
Luke 18:41 Walt; = ich thue = I... do.
Luke 19:21 awil na bash da gwan = denn ich fUrchtete mich
Luke 14:20
vor dir = for I feared thee.
John 1:32 nraza = ich sah = I saw.
doulthri = ich gehe weg = I go... way.
John 10:32 gwunTazuna = ich lasse sehen, zeige = I shewed.
John 4:14 ginamiT = ich gebe = I... give.
John 8:21
3) after lth, k (occasionally), sh,
1
du:
John 18:8
ltha malth-du da" gwashim nTrash nayat = ich habe
euch gesagt, dass ich es sei = I have told you that I am he.
gungiaksha tkulqudaksh-dir da gwashim = den
Frieden lasse ich euch = Peace I leave with you.
John 12:32 dum lip shEk-dti tkanigiada da- goi = ich will selbst
alle Menschen herziehen zu mir = And I, if I be lifted up from the
John 14:27
earth, will draw all men unto me.
John 7:21 gel gau na ltha halthal dat = ein einiges Werk habe
ich gethan = I have done one work.
Matt. 18:32 na shalthilda. na Fshk gunt = ich babe erlassen dir
deine Schuld = I forgave thee all that debt.
4) after a (compare the examples stated under 1)
nu:
John 14:2
John 14:3
doultha-na = ich gehe bin = I go.
dum gikzoiduksha-na = ich will wiederkommen = I
will come again.
dum goiduksha-nu da gwashim = ich will zu euch
kommen = I will come to you.
John 14:18
67
John 17:26 liihokshk ga nil dash dupniat = ich bin drinnen in
ihnen = I in them. [[Schulenburg cites John 17:28 here]]
and nT
John 16:28
kshawatk ga nT = ich bin ausgegangen = I leave the
world.
5) after k
g17.:
n'da hokshk gu da gwashim a tkg.nT sha... = ich bin
bei euch gewesen alle Tage... = When I was daily with you.
Luke 22:53
and gT:
John 6:38 "iwil tikigpidukshri da watk gT gish ga lalaga = denn
herabgekommen bin ich vom Himmel = For I came down from heaven.
John 4:15 ...dum akshk gT = ...damit ich Wasser schOpfe =
... give me this water, that I thirst not.
Note in the examples:
John 7:28 althga lip dazoiduksh gT... = nicht bin ich selbst
hergebracht... = and I am not come of myself.
Mark 14:28 ada zida ltha al gik ginTat gT... = and sobald ich
wieder aufgestanden sein werde = But after that I am risen.
dazpiduksh is to be read dagoidukshk and ginTat is to be read giniatk
(passive formation). [[# 84 and 1889 Boas Report, p. 885, Passive. ]]
b) of the pronominal suffix of the first person singular (absent)
(B.
sondern ich ehre
... yagai lthaudr ga Nagwadr ga =
meinen Vater = but I honor my Father.
c) of the pronominal suffix of the second person singular:
Different forms also appear in this category according to the
preceding vowels or consonants. We list these different forms here
with reference to the variety of first person pronominal suffixes:
John 8:49
68
gaulth hou'un da wila wa-1 dida- gut wil gAga zant? =
was sagst du von ihm, dass er hat deine Augen aufgethan ? = What
John 9:17
sayest thou of him, that he hath opened thine eyes ?
John 11:43 Lazarus kshilun = Lazarus komm heraus! = Lazarus,
come forth.
John 17:8 gwil ltha na gilginam algiaga dash dupniat gu nha
gilginamun da goi = denn ich habe gegeben die Worte ihnen, die
(Worte) du mir gegeben hast = For I have given unto them the words
that thou gayest me.
Mark 12:14 wilaiyum shimouunt = wir wissen, dass du
wahrhaftig bist = we know that thou art true.
Mark 6:23 ligi gau dum gwun3yun da goi = was du wirst bitten
von mir = Whatsoever thou shalt ask of me.
Mark 14:36 yagai gau hashagunt (hashak) = sondern was du willst
but what thou wilt.
Mark 8:26 gilau za am zTinin a gulzabut = gehe nicht hinein in
die Stadt = Neither go into the town.
Matt. 4:10 dum gup lthaudun ga MTyln ga Shimoigiatk gun ga,
adat amukshat nTat ga dum yakun ga = du sollst anbeten den Herrn,
deinen Gott, and nur ihm nachfolgen! = Though shalt worship the Lord
thy God and him only shalt thou serve.
Luke 7:13 gilau wThouit gunt = nicht weine du = Weep not.
Luke 10:28 hoigiaga dTlamak gunt = du hast recht geantwortet
Thou hast answered right.
John 4:31
y-a-.wuk gun = iss = eat.
gilau bTgum magaunshk gunt = du sollst nicht
falsches Zeugnis reden = Do not bear false witness.
John 6:30 gau halthal dunt = was wirkest du? = What dost thou
work?
Mark 10:19
69
Matt. 27:40 lip geluksh dimautkshin = hilf dir selber = save
thyself.
Matt. 4:10 b5yin Satan = hebe dich weg, Satan = Get thee
hence, Satan.
Matt. 16:19 ada ligi gau dum daklthin da lak halTzogut dum
daklthk ga gish ga zum lakaga; ada ligi gau dum lthuyin da lak
halizogut dum lthrik ga gish ga zum lakgga = und was du binden wirst
auf Erden, das wird gebunden sein im Himmel, und was du losen
wirst auf Erden, das wird lose sein im Himmel = and whatever thou
shalt bind on earth shall be bound in heaven: and whatsoever thou
shalt loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven.
John 14:5 althga dup wilailth n'dalth dum aauyin = wir wiss en
nicht, wo du hingehst = we know not whether thou goest.
John 1 1 : 2 6 shimhoudikshin a gwai? = glaubst du das ?
Believest thou this ?
John 16:5 n'da dum £auyint? = wohin gehst du? (ebenso:
John 13','36) = Whither goest thou? (just as John 13:36).
John 5:14 ltha dimautkshint = du bist gesund geworden = thou
art made whole.
Mark 5:36 gilau bashin, am shimhoudikshin = fiirchte dich
nicht, sondern glaube = Be not afraid, only believe.
Mark 1:44 Fmgaukshin... = opfere... = offer,
Mark 7:29 doulthin = gehe hin! = go thy way.
Luke 18:20 wilwilaiyin yg.oulthemgushgut.. gilau shggiadint
du kennst die Gebote wohl.. du sollst nicht tOdten = Thou knowest the
commandments..Do not kill.
Mark 2:9 haldum ban.. ada ygn = stehe auf... und gehe hin! =
Arise... and walk.
Matt. 27:40 tikiyan a lak zuzg,,zut = steige herab vom Kreuze'
come down from the cross.
70
d) of the pronominal suffix of the third person (singular and plural)
John 3:2 nrnTsh ga goidukshit gish ga awash Jesus gish ga atk
gaga, ada houit gish nTat = dieser kam zu Jesu in der Nacht und er
sprach zu ihm = The same came to Jesus by night, and said unto him.
John 3:26 ada gutgpiduksht gish John, ada houit gish nrat = und
sie kamen zu Johannes und sie sagten ihm = And they came unto John,
and said unto him.
John 4:42 ada houit gish ga hanak ga = und sie sprachen zum
Weibe = And said unto the woman, now we believe.
John 4:46 ada ltha gik gpiduksht gish ga Cana gish ga Galilee
ga = und er kam abermals nach Cana in Galilaea = So Jesus came
again into Cana of Galilee.
John 9:1 ada ashT yry-it ga = und wghrend er voraberging = And
as Jesus passed by.
John 21:9
ltha rikshgoltht gish ga... = als sie austraten auf...
As soon as they were come to land.
John 6:59 nTnT gwai ga houit gish ga zum synagogue ga = solches
sagte er in der Synagoge = These things said he in the syngogue.
e) of the pronominal suffix of the first person plural
um (B.: Em):
(Here, too, we refer to the analogous forms of the pronominal
suffixes of the first and second person singular. )
John 1:45 ltha wTyum = wir haben gefunden = we have found.
John 4:22 wilaiyum = wir wissen = we know.
John 12:34 na ltha nakniTyum... = wir haben gehort = we have
heard.
wilaiyim = wir wissen = we know.
Mark 5:12 dum wil lamzagum dish dupnTat = ...damit wir in
sie hineinkommen = that we may enter into them.
Mark 10:33 habum = wir gehen hinauf = we go up.
John 8:52
71
na ltha gashimhoudiksha da na milmalshk gumt 9 =
wer glaubt denn, was wir predigen? = who hath believed our report?
John 4:22 ... gigTenak gumt... = wir beten = we worship.
Luke 17:10 wha tkulam-gm'm tkulhilkwgulimlthk ga numt
unniltze Knechte sind wir = We are unprofitable servants.
Mark 9:28 lthguksha num dup dum di kshaieagun dit? = konnten
wir ihn nicht austreiben = Why could we not cast him out
Matt. 11:17 yrihallami num = wir pfeifen = We have piped.
John 9:40 ada houit gish nTat, Drgashri'unsha nimT? = and sie
sprachen zu ihm: sind wir denn auch blind? = and said unto him, Are
we blind also?
John 9:41 ada al hou shimt gracin, NuknTazk ga num... = ihr
aber sprechet jetzt: wir sind sehend... = but now ye say, We see.
1) of the pronominal suffix of the second person plural:
shim (B.: stm):
John 8:21 dum drishim = ihr werdet sterben = ye shall seek me,
John 12:38
and shall die.
John 1:39 gulshim = kommt = Come.
John 4:16 zutgoidukshim "6: gwa = kommt her = come hither.
John 2:5
wal shim = (das) thut ihr = whatsoever he saith unto
you, do it.
ada althga shimhoudiksha shim = and nicht
glaubt ihr = ye believed not, ye believe not.
John 4:22 gigTenak ga shim gau wha wilai shimt = was ihr betet,
wisset ihr nicht = Ye worship ye know not what.
John 4:29 gul shim = kommt = Come.
John 10 :25, 26
B. The Possessive Pronoun
# 48. Here I again give the statements of Mr. Boas on the
subject at hand:
72
The independent form of the possessive pronoun is identical with
the nominative of the personal pronoun: mine, nE/ri.O. (nTlyti), etc.
The dependent possessive pronoun is affixed to the noun to which
it belongs. There are distinct forms for the object being present or
absent, and three tenses, past, present and future. There is no difference between the. possessive form of the noun and the intransitive
verb, and it seems to the writer that according to the logical form of
the Tsimshian language both must be considered identical.... The
temporal prefixes and the forms for presence and absence are also
identical with those of the verb. [[ 1889 Boas Report, p. 882:
Possessive Pronoun; see page 73 for dependent paradigm. ]]
C. Article
# 49. I choose this name for the lack of any thing better. The
relevant terms neither modify nouns nor indicate the gender of the
definiteness or indefiniteness of objects; rather they indicate the
presence or absence of objects, individuals, or events.
# 50. da and dada (dida) are always used when the speech is of
local or temporal presence (usually dish is used instead of da -sh):
John 9:5 da dhayu da lak halizogut, adat nuyu na goibak da
halizogut = dieweil ich bin in der Welt, bin ich das Licht der Welt =
As long as I am in the world, I am the light of the world.
Mark 6:3 guksha nTnish da carpenter da gu gwa... ? = siehe,
ist das nicht dort der Zimmermann... ? = Is not this the carpenter... 9
# 51. ga and gaga are always used when reference is made to
local or temporal absence, either past or future.
(The forms gish and gut are used for ga-sh and ga-t. )
John 21:9 itha iikshgoltht gish ga gilhourf ga = als sie nun
austraten auf das Land = As soon then as they were come to land.
John 20:6 ada z7int gish ga zum n'toigiat ga = and er ging
hinein in das Grab = Then cometh Simon Peter following him, and went
into the sepulchre.
# 52. t'in indicates individuals who, present during events,
were participants [[in the events]].
Present
Past
Pre sent
1st person singular
2 nd
3 rd
3 rd
II
ti
1 st
/1
2 nd
I I
present singular
absent
plural
I
I
nE-15
Absent
nE-Fdae-
Present
-75
n-En
n-EndTE
-En
n -Et
n-Etga
n-da
n-Em
n- sEm
n- ga
-Et
-daa
-Em
-sEm
n-Emda
n- sEmda
Absent
Future
Present
Absent
-rga
dEm-77
dEm-gdag
and-7da
Enga
-Etga
-ga
-Emga
-sEmga
dEm-En
dEm-Et
dEm-daa
dEm-Em
dEm -sEm
dEm-Enga
dEm -Etga
dEm-ga
dEm-Emga
dEm-sEmga
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 882g Possessive Pronoun. ]]
(In the [[biblical]] texts of the Gospel translations nE > na, o > IT, En > un, sEm > shim, dEm > dum,
etc.
74
Matt. 1:2 Abraham t'in dagoiduksh Isaac; adat Isaac t'in
dagoiduksh Jacob; ada Jacob t'in dagoiduksh Juda ga = Abraham zeugte
Isaac; Isaac zeugte Jacob; Jacob zeugte Juda (nicht allein, sondern
mit der Frau zusammen!) = Abraham begat Isaac; and Isaac begat
Jacob; and Jacob begat Judas [[not alone, but together with his wife !]]
n-a7t in gaba na shamFyiit adat in aksha na ilthe'ytit =
wer da is set von meinem Fleische und da trinket von meinem Blute =
John 6:56
He that eateth my flesh, and drinketh my blood.
John 19:11 nrnTgun yagai gawil7ksha hadak ga t'in dagaudif da
gwan = deshalb aber hat der grgssere Sande, der mich dir
tiberantwortet hat = therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the
greater sin.
D. Pronoun lip
lip combines in one form the meaning of the reflexive and
determinative self, and, where it is a question of a number of sub# 53.
jects, of mutuality:
Mark 4:28 -a.wilt lip dagoiduksh da yob a na gian dit = denn von
selbst bringt die Erde ihre Frucht = For the earth bringeth forth
fruit of herself.
ada am lipgeluksh ama nTsh ga shim = und sehet
euch selbst gut vor = But take heed to yourselves.
Mark 15:30 lip-geluksh dimautkshin = hilf dir selber = Save
Mark 13:9
thy self.
Mark 15:20 adat hoiyunsh ga na lip hoiyat ga = und sie zogen
ihm seine eigenen Kleider an = they... put their own clothes on him.
E. Demonstrative and Determinative Pronouns
The demonstrative pronouns gwa and gwai differ in use,
thus, that gwa in apposition goes behind a substantive in most cases,
and gwai, on the other hand, in the substantive function appears
# 54.
75
mostly at the beginning of sentences. Yet there are occasional
exceptions to these rules so that perhaps one can consider gwa only as
a hasty articulation of gwai.
Example a) of gwa:
John 9:3 althga nrdi ligi hadak ga yZita gwa ligi nagiatk gut =
nicht hat weder dieser Mann gestIndigt, noch seine Eltern = Neither
hath this man sinned, nor his parents.
John 7:27 al wilaiyum wil Watk ga yta gwa = doch wir wissen,
woher dieser Mensch gekommen = Howbeit we know this man whence
he is.
b) of gwai:
Luke 9:21 yakyaoulthemakt gish ga what gwun maltha gwai ash
ligit na = er gebot, dass sie nicht dieses Jemandem sagen sollten = he
... commanded them to tell no man that thing.
Luke 15:2
anaug.a yi5ta gwai hadadak ga dit = dieser nimmt die
Stinder an = This man receiveth sinners.
Luke 23:38 gwai king ga Jewsit = das ist der KOnig der Juden =
THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWS.
# 55.
dup gwa (gwai) is the plural of the [[two]] preceding
[[pronouns]].
Mark 12:31 althga gik daulth ghawirekshum yaoulthem.g.0 shk
gish dup gwa = nicht giebt es noch ein grOsseres Gebot, als diese
(sind) = There is none other commandment greater than these [[are]].
Simon Peter, ... , ma ga shTebuniii ash dup gwa? =
Simon Petrus..., hast du mich lieber, als diese (mich lieb haben) ?
= Simon Peter... lovest thou me more than these [[ love me]] ?
# 56. Two other pronouns are evident in addition to gwa and
gwai. They are both formed from the same stem. This simple but
less common demonstrative stem is nT.
John 21:15
76
John 16:23
ada ricsh ga sha ga = und an demsethen Tage = And
in that day.
John 6:33 awil nT na anaitk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-ga = denn
dies ist das Brod Gottes = For this is the bread of God. [[King James:
For the bread of God is he. 1]
# 57. The intensification of nT, specifically nTnT, is far more
frequent.
For example:
Mark 13:11 ada al yazai ligi gau dum gwil tkul ginamtk ga did:
gwashim a nInT hourt, nini dum hou shimt = sondern was euch zu
derselben Stunde gegeben wird, dasselbe redet = but whatsoever shall
be given you in that hour, that speak ye.
Mark 13:37 ada gau houya da gwashim, ninT houya da tkgnrdit
was ich aber euch sage, theses sage ich alien = And what I say unto
you I say unto all, Watch.
# 58. nTni gwai is still more emphatic:
nTnT y5ta gwai gut in g.aush Pilate ga = eben dieser
Mann ging zu Pilatus = This man went unto Pontius Pilate.
Luke 21:22 'awll ni-nT sligsha gwai = denn eben diese Tage = for
just this day. [[King James: for these be the days. 1]
# 59. Another intensification occurs through shim (= very):
Matt. 15:28 ada shim ninTsh ga hour ga dimautkshash ga
lthg5lthgum hanakt ga = und in eben derselben Stunde ward gesund die
Tochter = And her daughter was made whole from that very hour.
Matt. 17:18 ada shimnish ga hour ga wil dimautkshash ga
lthgwa yaa ga = und zu ebenderselben Stunde wurde der Knabe gesund
= And the child was cured from that very hour.
# 60. whati tkashnT occurs in the meaning the same":*
Luke 23:52
The concept of totality or universality is in the [[fragment]]
tka. One is reminded of tka-nT (.= all, entire, whole), yet the
77
Luke 24:13
whati tk.ashnTsh ga sha ga = an demselben Tage = that
same day.
Luke 24:33 whati tkashnTsh ga hour ga = zu derselben Stunde
the same hour.
# 61. In addition to whati tkashnT with a subsequent substantive
of time, whati tkashnTat occurs independently:
Luke 13:1 whati tkashnTat ga ada hakhokshk gish ga nazazgout
ga... = zu derselben Zeit waren Etliche dabei... = There were
present at that season some...
.
Matt. 18:1 whatit tkashnTat ga, ada Lutgpiduksh ga disciples
gish Jesus = zu derselben Stunde kamen die Jiinger zu Jesu = at the
same time came the disciples unto Jesus.
Another place: Matt. 14:1.
# 62. all-gni refers to an antecedent (= the same as before):
Matt. 26:44 houit gish ga lthInTsh ga algiak ga = er sagte
dieselben Worte (wie vorher) = he... saying the same words [[as
before]].
Luke 10:7 ada lthanish ga wglp gulth wil 17.wanshim = and in
demselben Hause bleibet = And in the same house remain.
F. Relative Pronouns
# 63. gri = which, that, who:
John 7:28 ... yagai shimhou gut in haizT ga, gri ga wha wilai
sondern es ist ein Wahrhaftiger, der mich gesandt hat,
welchen ihr nicht kennet = but he that sent me is true, whom ye know
shim ga =
not.
connection or association is difficult to explain. [[tkani in ''The
Glossary" (German-Tsimshian): tlanT is the expression of universality, totality, the sum of all. ]]
78
John 7:25 .guksht-a7 nrnT gwaya grit shrgilth zagwa dit ?
ist das der, welchen sie suchten zu tOdten? = [[look]] Is not this he,
whom they seek to kill?
# 64. gau = that which or whatever (quae):
Luke 20:25 ginam gau na giansh Caesar dash Caesart = gebet,
was Besitz des Kaisers ist, dem Kaiser = Render therefore unto
Caeser the things which be Caesar's.
Luke 23:47 ada lthat nrsht ga centurion ga gau ga wilt ga = als
aber der Hauptmann sah, was sie thaten = Now when the centurion
saw what was done.
# 65. gau also serves to express the concept "thing" [[as
something, nothing, everything]]:
Mark 10:27 ... awil althga gaulth lthgukshk ga dash ga
Shimoigiat ga Lak-gga = ...denn kein Ding ist unmOglich bei Gott =
..for with God all things are possible.
Mark 8:25 ada mautk gut ga, ada "amsh gut wila nrsh ga tkaTnish
ga gau ga = und er wurde geheilt und sah alle Dinge wieder scharf =
and he was restored, and saw every man clearly.
# 66. na is a general relative pronoun (quicumque) [[he who,
whoever]]:
John 6:56
nit in gaba na shame-yut = wer von meinem Fleische
isset = whoever eateth of my flesh [[King James: He that eateth my
flesh]].
John 1:10 ada nrada na t'in zaba halizogut = und es (das Licht)
war es, was die Welt machte = and it [[the light]] was it, he who
made the world [[King James: That was the true Light, which lighteth
every man that cometh into the world]].
Here the light is personified [[This verse is actually John 1:9
and not John 1:10]].
79
G. Interrogative Pronouns
# 67. The usual expression for the substantive interrogative
pronoun is ria da gu (quis est qui) [[who]].
= wer bist du? (ebenso: 21, 12) =
John 8:25 na da
Who art thou[[just as 21:12]].
John 21:20 Mry-En, na da gu dumt in wa' adint? = Herr, wer
wird dich verrathen? = Lord which is he that betrayet thee?
# 68. tig which otherwise has the meaning quicumque [[# 66]]
also appears occasionally in a similar sense [[to na da gu (quis est
qui) # 67]]:
John 8:46 na a gwashimlth dumt in gwuniazinith hadak gT? = wer
unter euch kannmich einer Luge ziehen? = which [[who]] of you convinceth me of sin [[lying]].
John 9:36 ada houit ga, Na ga, Mrya-n, dum... ? = and er
sprach: Herr, welcher (ist es), auf dass.... ? = He answered and
said, Who is he, Lord, that I might believe on him?
# 69. gau ya (da) gu = what?
Mark 1:27 gau ya gu gwa? = was ist das ? = What thing is this ?
H. Indefinite Pronouns
# 70. limit rig. = somebody, someone, anybody, anyone, any
man;'
da lthgukshk ga dum
dumzoiduksha
halthalshash ligit nat = es wird die Nacht kommen, wo es unmOglich
1st, dass Jemand wirkt = the night cometh, when no man can work.
John 9:31 ada al amit gigrenak ga dit ligit na ga Shimoigiat ga
Laic-4a = aber wenn. Jemand betet zu Gott = but if any man be a
worshipper of God.
# 71. althgat rig: = nobody, no one, no man.
John 9:4
80
ada althgat na in eat = and Niemand griff ihn = and
no man laid hands on him.
John 7:30 ada am althgat riat in gwgntk gut = aber Niemand
r`ithrte ihn an = but no man laid hands on him.
# 72. ain(lth) na = (emphatically) nobody, no one, no man:
John 8:10, 11 ainith na di gut in dabun? Ada houit ga. Althgat
na, Miyan = hat dich Niemand verdammet? Sie aber sprach: Niemand,
Herr = hath no man condemned thee ? = She said, No man, Lord.
# 73. ligi gau = something, anything; althga ligi gau = nothing.
John 9:33 lthguksh ga dum wal did'a ligi gaut = es ist unmOglich,
dass er etwas thut = If this man were not of God, he could do nothing.
John 14:14 ami ma dum shim gwur5 ligi gau dg goi T na vigyut
= wenn ihr bitten werdet um etwas mich in meinem Namen = If ye
John 8:20
shall ask any thing in my name, I will do it.
81
IV.
THE VERB
# 74. Before dealing in detail with the chapter on formatives, I
think it appropriate and useful in the interest of greater clarity, to
insert here the tabular synopsis of verbs and related comments which
Mr. Boas has placed at my disposal. Because his synopsis and comments give a clear picture of Tsimshian verbs and are fundamentally
suited to the introductory process, they serve [[both]] to form the
basis for my further exposition and to facilitate the understanding of
that which follows.
Note: my contingent remarks are placed in [[single]] square
brackets.
[[This tabular synopsis of verbs and comments comes from the
1889 Boas Report, pp. 883-86: The Verb. This citation serves for
double bracketed information found in sections # 75 through # 86. ]]
The Intransitive Verb.
Present tense.
# 75.
Plural.
Singular.
1st person:
(n) -
2nd
(mE)
(dEp)
Em
(mEsEm) - EnsEm
(dEp) Et (Et)
present
3rd
Etga, Ega
(dEp) Etga, Ega.
absent
3rd
The prefixes placed in parentheses are not always used, but
seem to serve merely for the purpose of giving greater clearness or
emphasis to the sentence.
# 76. The imperfect tense is formed by the prefix nE, the
future by dEm. It seems that in the imperfect the personal prefixes
are almost always used. They are contracted with the temporal
character.
Plural
Singular
Imperfect tense
nap - Em
nan -o
1st person
namsEm EnsEm
nEm
En
2nd
nap Et, or nE - Et
present nE - Et
3rd
nap - Ega, or nE Ega
nE
Ega
absent
3rd
I
I
I
I
II
II
En
- Et (Et)
82
Plural
Singular
Future tense
1st person
o
dEm (n)
dEm (dEp)
Em
dEm (mE) -En dEm (mEsEm) EnsEm
present dEm Et
dEm (dEp) Et
dEm (dEp) - Ega
absent
dEm - Ega
The perfect is formed by tla preceding the present tense, the
plusquamperfectum and futurism exactum by the characteristic particles of these tenses preceding,the perfect.
2nd
3rd
3rd
It
he has been sick, tla sTe-p§Et [[sT/epgEt]].
he had been sick, na tla siepgEt [[,sT/gpgEt]].
he will have been sick, dEm tla sTe-pgEt [[sT'FpgEt]].
Interrogative.
# 77.
Plural.
Singular.
- Enaw7
1 st person
EnamF.
- Eseme.
mE Erie"
2 nd
3 rd
e
Negative.
# 78
1 st person plural, atlgE - Em
1 st person singular, atlgE e
atlgE - En 2nd
atlgE - Es Em.
"
2 nd
atlgE - Et 3 rd
atlgE - Et.
3 rd
Note. Nouns and adjectives with the verbum substantivum are
inflected in the same way as the verbum intransitivum. If the noun is
11
accompanied by an adjective, the former is inflected.
I am a Tsimshian, TsEmsianO- [[Ts'Emsian"51].
I am a good woman, amg, hanarano [[ama' ha/IT/ran-OS
you are Tsimshian, Ts'Emsi-SnsEm [[Ts'EmsiginsEm]].
are you a Tsimshian? Ts'EmsianEne r[Ts'EmsianEnen?
The third person is frequently expressed by adding the demonstrative
pronoun:
they are Tsimshian, Ts'Emsian dEp guasga [[gua'sga]].
[[The Transitive Verb]]
Singular
3rd
# 79.
1st
;-4
al
'-'0,)
.,.9
r.r1
1st person present
1st
"
absent
2nd
II
3rd
3rd
11
II
2nd
Person Person
Object
mE -77
mE-7
-ut
absent
-e-Ega
t-Eno`
t-Ene-
t-En
n-En
present
Person
Present
-Ent
-Enga
-EdEt
-Etga
3rd
Person
Absent
t-Enha
t-Enrga
t-Enga
-EdEt
-Etga
83
Singular
3rd
1st
Person Person
mE-Em
Object
1st person
ni
2nd
II,
3rd
3rd
3.1
2nd
n- sEm
"
present
- ut
"
absent
-ZEga
-Ent
-Enga
Person
Present
t-EnEm
t-EnsEm
-EdEt
-Etga
3rd
Person
Absent
t-EnEmga
t-EnsEmga
-EdEt
-Etga
Plural
1st Person
Object
2nd Person
mEsEm-3.
mEsEm-e-
1st person present
1st
absent
II
dEp-En
2nd
,9
present
3rd
3rd
- EsEmt
- EsEmga
- Emt
- Emga
absent
mEsEm-Em
dEp-sEm
- EsEmt,,
-Emt
present
3rd
-EsEmga
- Emga
absent
3rd
[[correction of the first person singular present object, third person
singular absent:on page 82:: t---EnVga]]
It will be seen that the object generally appears as the suffix of
the verb. This makes the inflexion very much like that of the
possessive pronoun, and it must probably be understood in the same
way as the possessive pronoun; for instance, I see you = I your seeing.
1st
2nd
In accordance with this factthat the object appears as the suffix of
the verb--is the other: that when the object is in the plural the verb
has the plural form, while it has the singular form when the subject
is in the plural: I know you, nwulwulNsEm [[nwulwulesEm]]; you
know me, mEsEm wurgyo [[wuran.iyo]].
The tenses are formed in the same way as those of the intransitive verb.
Interrogative.
# 80
Object
1st person singular
2nd
"
3rd
It
1st
Singular
3rd Person
2nd Person
mE-owe-
If
t-Ene-Eng*
plural
me -Erne-
2nd
3rd
II
t - owe
- E ne-
-Edet-Eme".
t-sErn7
-EdF
84
Plural
Object
1st person singular
2nd Person
mEsEm-owe-
3rd Person
t -owe
t-En-e
2nd
- EsEm-e-
3rd
plural
1st
2nd
11
t-Em-et- sErne"
-Ede- EsEm-e-
mEsEm-Em-e-
..
3rd
[{correction of the first person singular object, third person singular
on page 83: t-- - owe']]
[[In]] the interrogative there is no distinction of presence and absence.
Negative.
atlgE-.
# 81.
Singular
1st
Person
Object
1st person singular
2nd
n-En
n-t
3rd
plural
1st
2nd
11
2nd
3rd
Person
Person
mE-e-
t -e
t -En
mE-t
mE-Em
n-sEm
t-t
t-Em
t-sEm
Plural
1st Person
Object
1st person singular
2nd
'I
3rd
1st
plural
2nd Person
mEsEm--e-
dEp-En
dEp-t
mEsEm-t
mEsEm-Em
dEp-sEm
Imperative.
I
have
not
reached
a satisfactory understanding of the
# 82.
formation of the imperative. The following examples show that the
indicative is frequently use1l for expressing an order:
2nd
Singular: eat! ya-wicigEn! [[y-EiwiqgEn!]]
drink! SksEn! [[aiksEn!]]
Plural:
sit down! clIgn!
eat! yl.wiqsEm!* [{y-SilwiqsEm!]]
drink! lalksEsEm! [[lailkoEsEm!]]
sit down! w4nsEm! [[walusEn!]]
Here according to the rule (# 34) tql/oqksEm (tkauk shim) ought
to be used.
85
In other cases I found the infinitive (stem) of the verb used as in
imperative form:
sit down! d'a!
warm the water sE gyZ.muk aks [[sE gyaimuk aks
come in! ts'een! [[ts'Fen!]]
Another imperative is formed with the suffix -tl [-lth]:
eat it! g'gptl!
look at him! neetl! [[nFletl!]]
[[de watktl a 4.11!]]
take it from me! dV watktl
The imperative first person plural is formed in various ways
let us sit down! kaltse wdnEm! [wa/nEm!]]
let us look at him! sTntse dEp nFest ! [sha'unza] [[sZT/ntse
dEp dgiest!]]
let us look at him! watse dEp neestl! Hwialtse dEp niest '1]
let us go up the river branch! gyilA`.. ts'altlegua [[gyil'av
tslitlegua!]]
The imperative negative is formed with gyilA.'Idse! do not
[gilau see later under "Negation" [[# 257, # 270]]; za (dse) [[the Boas
form]] is a special modal particle # 132. ]
Note 1. - It will be noted that in the negative and interrogative
the first person singular ends in 7 [7], while in the indicative it ends
inn [TT]. In the former case the person is evidently considered absent.
Note 2. - The first person singular has frequently, instead of
is used when there is no
-7, the suffix -En6. In transitive verbs
definite object; for instance, I strike it, t,75usken.ut f[t(T'uskenut]], but
I strike my beast, to'usiT kgye) [[tZilus-o- k7.1yego-]]. In the case of
intransitive verbs I am unable to give any rule. The use of -En7 or
-7 depends upon the adverb accompanying the verb. It may be that
whenever the state expressed by the verb is defined -Ciis used [most
likely].
I am sick, siepgEni5 [[sTigpgEn5]].
I am always sick, tliwna sie-pg77[[tlew5la sT/Fpg6]].
I am tired, sonatlEno [[son-g.4,1EnCi]].
I am again tired, tlagyik sonZt17, Rtlagyik son-57417n
I am hungry, kitZEn7 [[;(c17/En,77].
I am always hungry, tlb"..wina kItFy7 Rt17,/w7la k(te.'yZi]].
I am asleep, qst'a(,qE26 HqstVciEnO]].
I want to sleep, hasaran dEm qstaqo [[has7./ran dEm
qstSA5]]
Note 3. - When the word terminates with a vowel, y is inserted
between the end of the stem and .73 [a] of the first person singular. The
same is done in the case of the first person of the possessive pronoun
86
rr
I use it, hlyut f[la'avyudj, my
I knot, wulayo-LiwurglyS]j.
mother, nays [rnia`,/yOl]. Frequently a k is found inserted. I am not
able to explain its use [compare the euphonic k (also k) # 8]
Participle.
# 83. It seems that the present participle is formed by redup1ication
to speak, lgyaq [[ellgyaq]].
speaking, EElgyaq [[EE'lgyaq]].
to sew, tlSok.
sewing, tltloopk f[t1t1-6/opk]].
rr
to eat, yawij1k Lora
wiqkajj.
eating, h7y-lwiqk [[he-ya-/wiqk]].
The past participle is _ormed by the suffix -de (see passive)'
to sleep, qstP.q. [rciestP-qll
having, slept qs.t.qde.[[qst.qde-]].
to walk, ia
having walked, iTd-e-
to say, h7u.
having said, ha7ud7 Dialudefl.
Passive.
It
seems
that
the
passive
is somewhat irregular. It
# 84.
terminates generally in -k, joined to the stem by s or t
to tell, matl.
told, matlk.
to strike, tiCius.
struck, t'Susk [[tIC-/usk]].
There are a number of other forms:
to kill, ts'ak.
killed, tsIFIcsa.
to hate, lEbalEqs [[lEbV1Eqs]].
hated, lEbalEqdg. [[lEb-a7/1Eqde]].
to do,
done, walde
to say, h-gu.
said, h-a--ude. [[h-g/ude]].
From these passive forms a present, past, future, etc are
formed in the same way as from the stem.
87
# 85. Inchoative, formed by reduplication:
I get sick, sisitepgEn"6"[[sisTvepgEn5]).
I get hungry, kukIte'En7 [[kuketZ/En71].
I get tired, se-son-StlEn7).
# 86. Imitative, formed by sis- and by reduplication combined'
I feign to be sick, sissisTepgEn7 [[sissisT'epkEn7]]
I feign to be hungry, siskukIte"EgEnZ UsiskukftE/EgEn011
I feign to be tired, sissisEin.VtlgEnO [[sissis7n57/t1gEnc7]].
I feign to sleep, sisqaqstalcisEn7 UsisqaqstaicisEn311
Following, now, I have a series of examples which more
than anything else should illustrate the use of the transitive and the
intransitive verb. Because they are taken exclusively from the
translations of the Gospels, let it once again be briefly noted that
dEp = dup, e = T, tla = ltha.
mE = ma,
Et = it, nE = na [[etc. ]]
mEsEm = ma shim,
# 87.
En = un (in).
Matt. 18:26 Mry7n, ghadTkgaudun a goi, ada n'dum libalda
tk;nrdadT. gwan = Herr, habe Geduld mit mir, und ich will dir alles
bezahlen = Lord, have patience with me, and I will pay thee all.
Matt. 8:19 n'dum gwilthy7kun da... = ich will dir nachfolgen,
= I will follow thee....
Matt. 8:21 Miya'n anauk za gha ksh.gauzum doulthra n'dum wa',&a
nagw-gdir = Herr, erlaube, dass ich zuvor hingehe, damit ich meinen
Vater begrabe = Lord, suffer me first to go and bury my father.
Matt. 16:18 Petert nu,gun, ada lak lauba gwai n'dum wil ha"in
na Church grit = du bist Petrus, und auf diesem Felsen will ich meine
Kirche aufbauen = thou art Peter, and upon this rock I will build my
church.
Matt. 16:19 ada n'dum gilginam haZz.ash ga kingdomsh ga
1.11k-gga gwan = und ich will dir die Schlitssel des Himmelreiches geben
= And I will give unto thee the keys of the kingdom of heaven.
und ich will
ada n'dum libalda da gwan =
Matt. 18:29
dir (es) bezahlen = and I will pay thee [[it]].
88
Matt. 5:17 gilau haligaz.aud shim za goidukshTlth n'dum
lthnthia wilalaut dilth prophetsit: althga goidukshilth n'dum
dit = glaubet nicht, dass ich gekommen bin,
yazai
damit ich auflOse das Gesetz und die Propheten: ich bin nicht
gekommen, damit ich es auflne, sondern damit ich es eralle = Think
not that I am come to destroy the law, or the prophets: I am not come
to destroy, but to fulfill.
Matt. 22:44 dlign a nakshimy-a.c7na, wagait n'dum wil dau
nibilthgaushk gunt a lthrig.ashashTunt = setze dich zu meiner Rechten,
bis ich legen werde deine Feinde zum Schemel deiner
Sit thou on my right hand, till I make thine enemies thy footstool?
Matt. 23:29 ... awil ma shim zipzaba wildau prophetsit, ada
denn ihr bauet die
Grg.ber der Propheten und ihr schmackt die Grgber der Gerechten...
= because ye build the tombs of the prophets, and garnish the
sepulchres of the righteous.
Matt. 10:17 ada ma shim am-a7-nT giadit = hutet euch aber vor
Menschen = But beware of men.
Matt. 20:22 althga ma shim wilai gau gwunCIT shimt. Althga ma
ma shim g.anTiuna n'toigiadum
=
shim da' aklthk gulth ma dum shim lilaksh di gu ha'aksha ltha dum
akshiit? = ihr wisset nicht, was ihr bittet. Kgnnet ihr nicht trinken
den. Ketch, den ich trinken werde = Ye know not what ye ask. Are ye
able to drink of the cup that I shall drink of.
Matt. 20:21 ma dum ginam dum wan dupkad71 da klthgri
gieb, dass meine zwei Mane sitzen... = Grant that these my two
sons may sit....
Matt. 26:17 rildl hashagun dup dum wil gwildum zouun ma dum
wil gaba Passovert? = wo willst du, dass wir bereiten, damit du issest
das Osterlamm? = Where wilt thou that we prepare for thee to eat the
passover ?
89
Matt. 4:9 tk5/11.-gwai gau dum ginamri da gwan, zida klthnashg7ut
gun, ada ma lthaudr = dies alles will ich dir geben, so du niederfnlst
und mich anbetest = All these things will I give thee, if thou wilt fall
down and worship me.
Matt 26:75 hawalthk ga algia.g.a zCiuzut, ada gwilrma dum
ksh-inagout = ehe der Hahn krghen wird, wirst du mich dreimal
verleugnen = Before the cock crow, thou shalt deny me thrice.
Matt. 22:29 ma gishgTshin shimt, althga ma shim wilaish ga na
l\illth7dukshum Damish ga... = ihr irret nicht kennet ihr die heilige
Schrift... = Ye do err, not knowing the scriptures....
John 2:19 ... ada n'dum gik hai'in dit = ...und ich will ihn
wieder aufbauen = ...and in three days I will raise up.
= und ich will ihn wieder
John 6:40 ada n'dum gik ginran
auferwecken... = and I will raise him up on the last day.
John 7:8 al hawalthk ga n'dum di gau rialgiadit grarin = aber ich
will noch nicht mit geben jetzt auf das Fest = I do not go up yet unto
this feast.
John 20:15 malthilth ma wil shgu da goi, ada n' dum g7 dit=
saget mir den Ort, und ich will ihn holen = tell me the place and I will
get him. [[King James: tell me where thou hast laid him, and I will
take him away. ]]
Luke 9:61 n'dum yagunt, Mryrn = ich will dir nachfolgen, Herr
= Lord, I will follow thee.
Luke 10:3 na hashhaiz shim hoigia.ga da wagia da shpagait
gibout = ich sende euch als die L;.'mmer mitten unter die WOlfe = I
send you forth as lambs among wolves.
gwun.137yiltk ga shim... = ich will euch
Luke 12:5 ada
aber zeigen = But I will forewarn you.
Luke 12:18 ada n'dum zipzaba.galikl7ksha dit; ada nrnin'durn wil
lridadau .66-mina gralsh gat = und ich will grOssere (Scheunen) bauen
90
and ich will dort hinein sammeln alle meine Ernte = I will , build
greater [[barns]] and there will I bestow all my harvest. [[King
James: my fruits and my goods, ]]
Luke 20:3 n'dum di gtradak shim da gaut = ich will euch auch
nach etwas fragen = I will also ask you one thing.
Luke 20:8 ada althga n'dum di ligi maltha 017 gwashim... = und
ich will euch auch nicht sagen... = Neither will I tell you...
Luke 22:16 gup althga n'dum gik gapt... = ich werde nicht
wieder davon essen... = I will not any more eat thereof.
Matt. 24:42 ma zun shim 1171tht; awil althga ma shim wilaish ga
sha ga dum da z_oiduksh ga M7ya,"n shim ga = darum wachet; denn ihr
wisset nicht den Tag, wo kommen wird euer Vater = Watch therefore:
for ye know not the day [[King James: the hour]] your Father [[King
James: Lord]] will come [[King James: doth come]].
Matt. 24:26 gilau ma za shim hapt = gehet nicht heraus = go not
forth.
Matt. 13:18 ma ,gun shimnakri5 wiltkulzieunshk ga wila w-"1
hilkzurramuksha dit = so hOret nun das Gleichniss von dem S'a!emann
= Hear ye therefore the parable of the sower.
Matt. 19:19 ... dTlth ma dum shiebun shila giadun nTwa71dat lip
nqgun. . . = und du sollst lieben deinen NW.chsten wie dick selbst = and,
Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thyself.
Matt. 28:5 'Ewil wilaiyir ma shim gwilthgagTelsh ,Tesusit = denn
ich weiss, ihr suchet Jesum = for I know that ye seek Jesus.
Matt. 22:18 gau ma .g.un shim shanadut? = weshalb versuchet
ihr mich = Why tempt ye me.
Matt. 22:21 ninilth ma ,gun shim ginam dish Caesar... =
deshalb gebet dem Kaiser.... = Render therefore unto Caeser....
Luke 22:42 amilth ma anaukt, ma La ha'aksha gwaya goi = wenn
du es willst, so nimm du diesen Kelch von mir = if thou be willing,
91
remove this cup from me.
Luke 7:46 althga ma di lauzilth.gouuzTa gum_goushrit = nicht
mit Oel salbst du mein Haupt = My head with oil thou didst not anoint.
Luke 15:23 ada- ma shim da_g_oidukshlth shiyagum lthgum
mishmtishit = und bringet ein gemastetes Kalb her = And bring hither
the fatted calf.
John 2:8 sld- °una ma shim zuzit, ada ma shim ginam da mry-an
Malgiadit = schOpfet nun und gebet es dem Speisemeister (Herr,
Oberaufseher des Festes) = Ladle out now and give it to the chief of
the food [[master, inspector-general of the festival]]. [[King James:
Draw out now and bear unto the governor of the feast. ]]
John 8:13 ma lipgeluksh mag.aunshk gunt = du zeugest von dir
selbst = Thou bearest record of thyself.
John 8:40 ada at ma shim shigilth zaqudat graa = jetzt aber
sucht ihr mich zu tOsdten = But now ye seek to kill me.
John 4:27 gau ma gun dadgluk dida? = weshalb redest du mit
ihr ? = Why talkest thou with her ?
John 7:52 ma di wak gunT grilth Galilee? = bish du auch aus
Galilla = Art thou also of Galilee.
John 6:34 lth7 ma wila ginam anal nahod un dl" gum = immer
gieb das Brod, von dem du sprichst, uns = Lord evermore give us
this bread.
John 20:15 malthilth ma wil sher da goi, ada n'durri
sage den Ort mir und ich will ihn holen = tell me the place and I will
get him. [[King James tell me where thou hast laid him, and I will
take him away. ]J
John 21:15 Simon Peter, ... ma gashTebuntir ash dup gwa =
hast du mich lieber, als diese (mich haben) =
Simon Petrus,
Simon Peter, ...lovest thou me more than these [[have me]].
John 6:26 ma shim gwilthgagueltr = ihr sucht mich = Ye seek me.
92
John 528 gilau ma shim 17.shana7lthk ga gwa = wundert each
daraber nicht zi Marvel not at this.
John 4,'.35 ada ma shim ni. lak shikshindointk gut = and sehet auf
das Feld = look on the fields.
John l82,9 gaulth ma shim wil tkaTsha drya gu yaa gwa ? = was
bringet ihr fur Kiage wider diesen Menschen? = What accusation bring
ye against this man'
John 18'31 shim Ca-.1th ada ma shim lip dapt "a7n'lip wilalaut ga
shimt = nehmet ihr ihn hin u.nd richtet ihn nach eurem eigenen Gesetz
= Take him and judge him according to your law.
John 196 shim lip ggith, ada ma shim lizagwa da lak g.uz-algui =
nehmet ihn selber hin und schlagt ihn ans Kreuz ! = Take ye him, and
crucify him.
John 3J1 ada ma nakn-o na kshta-muk dit, ada al ma lthgukshin
ma dum maltha n'da wil watk ga dit... = und du horst sein Sausen,
aber du kannst nicht sagen, woher er (der Wind) kommt... = And thou
hearest the sound thereof, but canst not tell whence it [[the Wind]]
cometh....
= was ich thue,
John l3:7 gau wal7 althga ma wilait
das weisst du jetzt nicht... = What I do thou knowest not now.
John 6 36 ltha ma shim niazat... = ihr habt mich gesehen...
= That ye also have seen me....
John 653 arn7 ma za shim wha gapsh ga na shamesh ga
Lthg7Ithk gish ga giat ga. di-1th ma za shim wha aksh ga... = wenn ihr
nicht esset das Fleisch des Menschensohnes und wenn ihr nicht trinket... = If you do not eat the flesh of the Son of man, and drink his
blood.... [[King James Except ye eat the flesh of the Son of man,
and drink his blood.. 0 .]]
Mark 1102 ada ma shim dag.oiduksht = und ftThret es her = lead
it here. [[King ..Tames bring him. ]]
93
(Mark 12 15 gau ma gun shim shanhadut? = weshalb versuchet
ihr mich?) = [[Mark 12:15 Why tempt ye me ?]]
Mark 14:6 gau ma gun shim shiTwanau did57? = was bekt:mmert
ihr sie ? = why trouble ye her?
Mark 1210 ai.nith ma shim lizk di gu n'Ithodukshum Darnisha
gwa? = habt ihr ouch nicht gelesen in der heiligen Schrift dieses?
(ain ist eine andere Negation als althga und wird spqter genauer
charakterisirt werden; man beachte ma shim... ) = And have ye not
read this scripture. [rain is a negation other than althga and will be
characterized more exactly later; notice ma shim. 1]
Mark 4:13 ainith ma shim wilai di gti wiltkulnZ:Unshk ga gwa ?
ada n' da ma dum shim wila wilai tic-".a.nT wiltkulnukne-unshk gut? =
versteht ihr dieses Gleichnis nicht? und ihr wolit alle anderen
Gleichnisse'verz.teher ?= Know [[King James: understood]] not this
parable? and how then will ye know [[King James: understand]] all
parables?
Mark 1:40 amTma za anaukt, da' aklthkgun ma dum shakshanu= wenn du es willst, so kannst du mich reinigen = If thou wilt, thou
canst make me clean.
Matt. 17..16 ada nan dagpiduksh dada n.a disciples gunt = und
-
ich habe ihn zu den-ten 7:u'ingern gebracht = And I brought him to thy
disciples.
Matt. 25:35 nan lirgtTangwagantit, ada ma shim gilakshat; nan
lukshzabana, ada ma shim zilumga dirt = ich bin durstig gewesen,
und ihr habt mich get rnket; ich bin ein Fremdling gewesen, und ihr
habt mich beherbergt = I have been [[Kind James: was]] thirsty, and
ye have given [[King :lames gave]] me drink: I have been [[King
James: was]] a stranger, and ye have come unto me [[King James:
took me in]].
Matt. 25:36 nan shrepk ga nut, ada ma shim ziiaiyu ya; nan
Itidhgna da walp dakle-it
ada g.0 tzoidukshi rn. t a goi = ich bin krank
94
gewesen, and ihr habt mich be suchet; ich bin im Gef.ngniss gewesen,
and ihr seid zu mir gekommen = I have been [[King James: was]]
sick, and ye have visited [[King James: visited]] me I have been
[[King James was]] in prison, and ye have come [[King James:
came]] unto me.
Luke 22 35 nan da gwilth hash-haiz shimt... = ich sandte euch
= I sent you.
John 17'25 o hoigiagum Nagwa, althga n't wilaiyin halizogut,
ada nan al wilaiyint = gerechter Vater, die Welt kennet dich nicht,
ich aber kenne dich = 0 righteous Father, the world knows [[King
James: hath not known]] thee not, but I know [[King James: have
known]] thee.
John 17:4 nan lthaudint a lak halizog_ut = ich habe dich verklgret
out Erden I have glorified thee on earth.
John 1:50 nan nTazun = ich sah dich = I saw thee.
John 131 ada althga nan wilait = und ich kannte ihn nicht = And
I knew him not
John 17.12 ashihahokshk-gii dash dupniat, ada nan dakdok
na gitginamun da goi, ada nan habilbaul dit = w°a!larend
na zum WET.nt;
ich bei ihnen war, da erhielt ich sie in deinem Namen; welche du mir
gegeben hast, die bewahrte ich = While I was with them in the world,
I kept them in thy name; those that thou have given [[King James:
gave]] me I have kept.
Mark 1532 dup dum wil nrsh dit = damit wir es sehen = that we
see it. [[King James: may see]].
Mark 212 wagait hawalthk ga dup di nTlth n'lth v11.1 da gwa =
noch nie haben wir solches gesehen = Never have we seen such. [[King
James: We never saw it on this fashion. ]]
Mark 1g36 adat lryagut ga dup Simon ga dTith na shiksheOlt ga
and es folgten Simon und die, die bei ihm waren, ihm nach = And
95
Simon and they that were with him followed after him.
Mark 3.12 agwTrnaksh gut dup naun drlth waigiant t'in gwilthgav, int c raussen fragen deine Mutter und deine Brt{der nach dir =
thy mother and thy brethren without seek [[King James: ask]] for
thee
Mark L20 adat 11-rqucridakshish dup nagw7t gish ga zum
agwYkshai. ga = und sie liessen ihren Vater im Schiffe zurUck = And
they left the r father [[King James: father Zebedee]]in the ship.
Mark 9.5 sha'unza dup zipzaplth gwilidalth guba htiwa-lp = lasst
cans drei Hateri bauen = let us build [[King James: make]] three
tabernacles:
96
V.
FORMATIVES
Under this name we combine affixes and independent
auxil,aries They submit to the following classification:
deperident formatives (affixes):
A
1) placed before (prefixes)
2) placed after (suffixes)
3 se rted within [[infixes]]
independent formatives:
13
aux.liary [[verbs]] of time and modality
I
2) adverbs
3) prepositions
4) conjunctions
5) interjections
# 88
Addendum: Certain afformatives appear, [[it is]] true, sometimes as independent words, sometimes as mere structural elements.
Thus, ksha (- oat, forth, leave) a is found as a free-standing, independent word with the meaning "to go out, " "to leave. " [[Compare
1889 Boas Report. p 879' # 4. KsEr (singular)-ksq (plural) = to
leave the house; p. 887: Formation of words, ksci = out and to leave
the house ±; The same occurs with tiki, sha, gwilth, shila, and hT.
a
The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German): is a prefix which
ksha"out. " 'forth. " [[It indicates the movement from inside a
place as seen by the person outside. ]]
Luke 13 28j 20:12, 24:50; Mark 9:47, 1:43, 1:44 5:40, etc.
See -4 106.
b,
The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German):
= to go]]: (B.: ksEr) = to go out..0
kshu, see Rau [[g.au (B.:
probat iy related to ksha
= to go out, to go forth, to leave is
b. ksliauk, see gau (B. :
the plural of the singular kshil (see there),
Mark 1046, 5 :13, 16:8; John 4:30; Matthew 27:32, 8:32,
8:34, 9 :32.
97
as much as because these [[afformatives]] in by far the most
cases were portrayed in the text [[of the Gospel translations]] as
affixes, I have, thus, also treated them as such here in the grammar.
As to the particles na, ma, and dup, I here refer to the chapter
on verbs ( 'Hi 74-87) where I believe I have previously furnished
enough [linformation]],
A. Dependent Formatives
1. Prefixes
ga# 89. ga (# 33) expresses the meaning "more" with respect to
numter (plurality) rather than intensity:
Mark 4,33 adat ga_gash ga tkInTsh ga gau gish ga disciples gut
ga : und er legte alles seinen VIngern aus = And he explained everything to his disciples [[King James: and with many such parables
spc,ke he the world unto them, as they were able to hear it. ]]
Mark 5;42 ada shim winksh ga galashanalthashk gut ga = und
sie entsetzten sich in hohem Grade = and they were amazed to a high
degree, [[King James And they were astonished with a great
astonishment. ]]
hak-
h7k (# 33) indicates a plurality of subjects, of objects,
or, of actions and of the nomina actoris [[nouns of agent]] stemming
from the latter
# 90
Mark 15'16 adat wil shag.ait hukhEitk gish ga tk-gni7t ga = und sie
riefen alle zusammen = and they called all together. [[King James!
and they call together the whole band. ]]
Mark 6:7 ada wilt gwunhakhilitk gish ga kapault ga da dupkadEl
gish ga aw-gt ga = und er berief die ZwOlfe zu sich = And he called unto
him the twelve.
98
gwilth-
gwilth is indicative of something repeating or continuing or
occurring at different locations ( "everwh.ere, " "around").
# 91.
Mark 67 ada wit hrlqush gut gwilth hashhaizt ga... = und er
fing an, sie umher zu senden.... = and he... and began to send them
forth.
Mark 6 12 ada gwilth adoultht ga = und sie gingen umher
And
they went out.
Compare again at this point the more rarely seen plural
prefixes lu, li, la in the section on plural formation # 31.
shil# 92. shil- comitative expresses a very close association [[as
Note.
in "together with"]]°
Mark 6022 dilth shilwant ga = und denen, die dabei sassen = and
them that sat with him.
Mark 14754 adat shilawa-nsh ga tkulhrikwa-ulimlthk gaga = und er
sass zusammen mit den Knechten = and he sat with the servants.
klthna# 93. This prefix has the meaning "down":
Mark 311 ada klthnadauk gut gish ga hazaklthk gut ga = und sic
fielen vor ihm nieder = they... fell down before him.
Mark 5:33 ada klthnashgriutk gut gish ga hazaklthk gut ga = und
sie fiel vor ihm nieder = the woman... fell down before him.
klthriun-, klthurn# 94. The examples are:
Matt. 513 amuksha dum kshadalth ga dit dT.lth durn.t kltht.Tun
nur dass man es herausschiAte und dass
giaksh da gashashrgiadit =
die Ft.rsse der Menschen es niedertreten = ...but to be cast out and
to be trodden under foot of men.
99
Matt. 13:30 ada ma shim klthum dakdakltht... = und bindet es
in Bi:ndel... = and bind them bundles.
Matt. 14:24 awil klthum-bashkshit ga = denn der Wind war
zuwider 7-- for the wind was contrary.
Matt. 7:6 .. op zit klthiitungiakshit
auf dass sie dieselben
nicht zertreten = in order that they not trample them. [[King James:
lest they trample them. ]]
Mark 15:19 ada klthurrigulgaisha- gut gish gut = und er fiel auf
seine Kniee nieder = and he fell down on his knees. [[King James:
and bowing their knees worshipped him. ]]
In most cases this prefix also is based upon the idea "down. "
How then are Matthew 13:30 and 14:24 to be explained?
bak# 95. This prefix has the meaning "up, " "upward ":
Luke 6:12 ash gut bakg.aush ga lak sh.g.unTshta gish ga dum
gigrengwakltht ga = und er ging herauf auf einen Berg, urn zu beten =
that he went up on [[King James: out onto]] a mountain to pray.
Luke 2:42 ada wilt bakhapt ga = da gingen sie herauf = they went
up to Jerusalem,
man# 96. [[This prefix]] "man" likewise indicates the direction
"up, " "upward":
John 20:17 "a7wil hawalthk ga mandoulthT ash ga Nagwacirga =
denn ich bin noch nicht hinaufgefahren zu meinem Vater = for I am not
yet ascended to my Father.
John 4:14 ... dum ludham na aksha dash nrat g`u ltha dum wila
manhathaudak ga dit wa.g.ait aw-a- whati sha.b.gmg_undidElshit = ... es
wird ein Brunnen des Wassers in ihm werden, das in das ewige Leben
quillet 7-- but the water I shall give him shall be in him a well of water
springing everlasting life.
100
John 5:1 adat manzaut gut Jesus ga Jerusalem ga = und Jesus
zog herauf gen Jerusalem = Jesus went up to Jerusalem.
kba# 97. This prefix is found only in combination with ga (singular)
and dok (plural) and has the meaning "away":
John 10:29 ada althgat nat in da'aklthk gulth dumt kbadokt gish
ga zum anonsh ga Nagw-gt ga = und Niemandem ist es mOglich, dass er
sie wegnimmt, die in der Hand des Vaters sind = and no man is able
to pluck them out of my Father's hand.
Mark 14:36 kbag-a7 ha'aksha gwaiya goi = nimm diesen Kelch von
mir = take this cup from me.
Mark 6:40 ada ama kba hukwant ga = und sie setzten sich nach
Schichten (sie setzten sich immer ein gutes StUck von einander = and
they sat down in ranks. [[They sat down always a good bit from one
another. ]]
[[tiki-]]
# 98. tiki = down, downward:
Mark 15:36 dum nTizum za dum ligi goiduksh Elijah a dumt tiki
ga dit = lasst uns sehen, ob Elias kommt und ihn herab nimmt = let us
see whether E-li -as will come to take him down.
Mark 15:30 ada tikiyrna lak zuz-Ezut = und steige herab vom
Kreuz = and come down from the cross.
Addendum: In addition to "tiki, the still shorter form Agin
(B.: tgyZ):
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 887 in list of sentences of syntactic interest:
1.
I might fall down k-g/inade- gyFiEn.
2. you might fall down ko-einaEn gyVEn.]]
Matt. 12:11 ada amiza lagilaklak dalth zum wilagilthapa
halTshquaitk ga shat... = und wenn es (das Schaf) in eine Grube herabgilt an einem Sabbath... = and if it [[the sheep]] fall into a pit [[King
101
James: grave]] on the sabbath.
libilt# 99. Meaning: "against, " "opposed to in a hostile sense,
For example:
John 19:12 tkarlsh na- gu lip geluksha king ga dit libilthouit ga
dit Caesart = alle, welche sich selbst zum KOnige machen, sprechen
wider den Kaiser = whosoever maketh himself a king speaketh against
Caesar.
John 19:11 althga n'dum shgriilth gutgiada gwan a ma dum
libiltwaltk gut = nicht h5ttest du Macht, zu handeln wider mich = Thou
couldest have no power at all against me [[King James: to act against
me]].
lthim# 100. The concept "against" also probably underlies this
prefix. It is very rarely found:
lthim,gush (singular), lthimzushgosh (plural) = to be angry or
annoyed,
lthmhaitiksh = enemy; adversary (Luke 21:15).
Luke 21:15 [[Awil n'dum ginam zum-iga da gwashim dilth
shim dumt lthimwilgaush gut, gu dum wha cl"iklthk ga
haitksha dit ligi dum kshta dit. = Denn ich will euch Mund and
Weisheit geben, welcher nicht sollen widersprechen mOgen, noch
widerstehen alle eure Widersacher. = For I will give you a mouth and
wisdom, which all your adversaries shall not be able to gainsay nor
resist. ]]
ta#101. "ta" appears only in combination with gauk (= before, in
front of) in the meaning "to go before" or "first, " "to go ahead, " "at
the head":
102
Mark 11:9 ada housh ga tazauzut ga = und es sprachen, die
vorne gingen = And they that went before... cried, saying Hosanna.
Matt. 21:9 ada housh ga tag.augsh ga nazazTout ga giat ga = and
einige Menschen gingen vor = And a few men [[King James° the multitudes]] that went before.
di# 102. "di-" has the meaning "to become, " "to make":
Luke 18:26 dish rig da gu dum dilamautksha dit ? = wer kann
denn selig werden? = Who then can become [[King James: be]] saved.
Luke 6:19 awil kshawEtk gish ga gutgiat gish nTat, adat
dilamautk gish ga tk-E..nTt ga = denn es ging Kraft von ihm aus, und er
heilte sie alle = for there went strength [[King James: virtue]] out of
him, and healed them all.
da-
"da=" has a causative meaning and is used particularly
with verbs of progress (compare # 102):
Mark 4:28 lip dagpiduksh da yob a na gian dit = von selbst bringt
die Erde ihre FrUchte = For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself.
Mark 9:2 adat dahabat gish ga giepshum shgunish = und er
ftihrte sie auf einen hohen Berg = and leadeth them up into a high
# 103.
mountain.
sha# 104. "sha" likewise has a causative meaning for the most
part; it appears with verbs of "movement away" or "out" [[and is]]
frequently denominative in the meaning "to effect something':
Mark 15:20 adat shadogash ga gwishgviaTshk gut gish niat = und
sie zogen ihm den Purpur aus = they took off the purple from him.
Mark 10:50 adat sha gunmagash ga na wash gut ga = und er warf
sein Kleid von sich = And he, casting away his garment.
103
shri-
# 105.
'Ishii" means "to cause" (compare #104):
shuwilai = to teach
wilai = to know
[[in the sense of knowledge rather than
acquaintance ship]]
wa. = name
shawg = to name
ksha# 106. Meaning: out, forth, leave:
Examples:
Luke 1:68 adat kshagigTaksh ga n'zapt ga = und er hat erlOset
sein Volk = for he hath... redeemed his people.
Luke 2:38 ...babOishk. gut gish ga dum kshagigiakshit ga ash
die da warteten auf die ErlOsung zu Jerusalem
ga Jerusalem ga
= to all them that look for redemption in Jerusalem,
17Z-
Meaning: in, at, within, into.
Examples:
dum g.up 17fwglu da walpsh ga
Luke 2:49 alth ma shim wilai
NagwFdr ga? = wis set ihr nicht, dass ich sein muss in dem Hause
meines Vaters ? = wist ye not that I must be in the house of my Father
[[King James: must be about my Father's business]].
# 107.
Luke 2:48 nT radakdauklthk ga gag.audumt dish nagwadun a dup
gwilthgag7iunt = siehe, mit schweren Herzen haben dich dein Vater und
ish gesucht = Behold with heavy heart have your Father and I sought
you [[King James: behold, thy father and I have sought thee sorrowing]].
1T-
# 108. As lu was essentially inessive, thus, the meaning of 17
is essentially adessive (at, on, with, among):
104
Luke 10:34 adat 17c1ha dit gish ga na lip lak yezish gut ga = and
er setzte ihn auf sein eigenes Thier = and set him on his own beast.
Luke 13:13 adat lTdaush gaga'anont gish ga laka ga und er
legte die Ha"nde auf sie = And he laid his hands on her.
.gul-
This prefix gul is perhaps linked to the imperative
"gul" = "come, " the only instance where it appears to be independent.
Then the few examples would be explained as follows:
Mark 6:35 ada lthaguldoulthsh ga sha ga = und als der Tag zu
Ende ging (als es kam zum Fortgehen der Sonne) = and as the day
came to an end [[as it came to sunset]] [[King James: and when the
day was now far spent]].
Mark 15:31 dilamautk ga da.gulgigiadit = er hat Anderen geholfen (indem er zu ihnen kam) = he has helped others [[during the time
that he came to them]] [[King James: He saved others]].
tkul# 110. tkul = at, on, to, toward, against (compare libilt- # 99
which was used only in a hostile sense):
Matt. 22:25 ...ada zak dit, althga klthga, adat tkulqudakshish
ga naksht gish ga waikt ga = ...und er starb ohne Nachkommenschaft
und er hinterliess sein Weib seinem Bruder = and he died without
offspring and he left his wife to his brother [[King James: and the
first, when he had married a wife, deceased, and, having no issue,
left his wife unto his brother]].
Matt. 18:6 ... yagai ga'am dish nTat n'za tkulzipshilth
dem ware besser,
wile-kshum laubum mina da dunirgni. dit... =
# 109.
dass ein grosser Mahlstein an seinem Ha lse hinge... = it were better
for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck.
105
gwun-
"gwun" has the meaning "to that place" and "to this
place" [[hither and thither]]:
# 111.
Mark 6:7
ada wilt gwunlaTikhaitk gish ga kapault ga da dupkad-51
gish ga awa = da berief er die ZwOlfe zu sich = And he called unto
him the twelve.
Mark 15:44 adat gwunhaitk gish ga centurion ga = und er rief zu
sich den Hauptmann = And he called unto him the chief [[King James:
and calling unto him the centurion]].
ha# 112. "ha" points out an object or fact whereby a tool,
causative, or simultaneous circumstance is denoted (compare ## 17,
18):
Mark 4:9 ada houit ga na zumo dada dum han.aknoksh dit, amt
nakni5 dit = und er sagte: wer Ohren hat, urn damit zu hOren, der
hore = and he said unto them, He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
John 18:25 wai hahaitk gish Simon Peter gish ga giamukshit ga
= aber Simon Petrus stand und wgrmte sich (er wgrmte sich durch
das Dortstehen) = And Simon Peter stood and warmed himself [[he
warmed himself by the standing there]].
k 'am - (gum )
# 113. (Boas:) k'am- (in the Gospel translations: gum) miserable, good for nothing, from kamtse:
kamEleleq = good for nothing to speak = to play (compare # 24)
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888]]
Matt. 15:27 ada.g.up w571 hash-hashit gaba gumtkauk ga
thal dada na halitkauk ga gamry-Sntk ga dit = und doch essen die Hunde
die Brosamen (schlechte Essen), die herabfallen von den Esstischen
ihrer Herren = yet the dogs eat the crumbs [[bad food]] which fall
from their masters' table.
106
Luke 18:39 gumgaudun goi = habe ein (unglckliches)
mitleidiges Herz mit mir (gaud = Herz) = have a [[sad]] sympathetic
heart with me [[gaud = heart]] [[King James: have mercy on me]].
q- (k-)
# 114, (Boas:) q-, to eat, to receive:
qpZian(77, to smoke = to eat smoke .
qgyat, man-eater.
qana/7, bread-eater,
qlFan'o/n, to receive payment for burial (17, into; an'o'n,
hand) .
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888]]
In the Gospel translations k -:
Luke 8:42 ltha kapT1 da g7belt shinith kgaulth gut = sie war
zwOlf Jahre alt (gaulth = Jahr) = she was twelve years old [[ gaulth
year]] [[King James: For he had only one daughter, about twelve year'
of age, and she lay dying. But as he went the people thronged him]].
hr-
# 115.
"WI" denotes simultaneousness and immediate succes-
sion:
Luke 1:44 -swil nT, htgoiduksha amhoum dhoiyagun da zurriciya,
ada wil liigabakshk ga lthquaumlthk ga da zum nashgiVumlthk gut a
lthgwishei dit = denn siehe, als die Stimme defines Grusses an mein
Ohr drang, da htipfte mit Freuden das Kind in meinem Leibe = For lo,
as soon as the voice of thy salutation sounded in mine ears, the babe
leaped in my womb for you
Luke 7:11 ada wil wale ga, da hTtkulTn gwa, adat.gaush ga
gu!zap ga wat gulth Nain = and es begab sich darauf, dass er in eine
Stadt mit Namen nain ging = And it came to pass then [[King James:
the day after]] that he went into a city called Na -in]].
ksh# 116. uksh-" always has, as it seems, comitative-sociative
meaning:
107
Matt. 23:9 ada gilaush kshnagwak ga shim dash ligit na a lak
halrzoLut = und nicht sollt ihr Jemanden Vater nennen auf Erden = and
call no man your father upon earth.
Matt. 2:9 braashta ga na nTzit gish ga naka-gishTa7shk gaga,
ksbgaugut gish dupnTat = der Stern, den sie gesehen hatten in Morgenlande, ging vor ihnen hin = the star, which they had seen [[King
James: saw]] in the east, went before them.
tka# 117. This auxiliary [[which is]] to be mentioned again in the
chapter on numerals [[# 238]] has the meaning ''total, " "entire, "
complete, " "whole, " "all":
Matt. 17:2 ada sha tkalukshgiatk gut gish ga hazazaklthk gut ga
= und er wurde verklgrt vor ihnen (= zu einem ganz fremden
Menschen gemacht) = and was transfigured before them [["-- made into
completely strange man]].
ligi na nagiatk ga dit, g.un am,g,ait yaga, tkashirunshk
John 9:2
gut? = (wer hat gesUndigt, dieser) oder seine Eltern, dass er ist ganz
blind schon geboren? = [[who did sin, this man]] or his parents, that
he was born already completely blind [[King James: who did sin, this
ma, or his parents, that he was born blind?]]
wilth
,
wulth
"wilth-, " "wulth-" have the meaning "away, r0 "forth":
John 11:39 wilthga laubit = nehmet den Stein weg = Take ye away
the stone.
John 20:1 adat nTsh ga wilthg-Stk gish ga laup wilthgak gish ga
laup = und sie sahen, dass der Stein fortgenommen war = seeth the
stone taken away from the sepulchre.
Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwunOt gish niat dumt wha wulth hashhaizt
gish ga lakyOp ga = und er bat ihn sehr, dass er sie nicht aus der
Gegend fort schicken solle = and he besought him much that he would
# 118.
108
not send them away out of the country.
Matt. 2802 adat wulthgTggulsh ga laup ga = und er walzte fort dep
Stein = and he rolled away [[King Jamesg back]] the stone,
tgwa-, tgwi# 119. "tgwa, " in front of vowels utgwi, " = round about, about,
all around, aroundg
Mark 332 ada tgwawantk gut ga wilhElgiat ga ada houit gish
nTat = und urn ihn he rum sass das Volk und sie sprachen zu ihrng =
And the multitude sat about him, and they said unto him.
John 1n44 tgwa dukdadaklthk gaga anont ga dilth shishiat gish
ga... = verbunden um seine FIgnde und Vlsse = bound about his hands
and feet [[King James bound hand and feed].
John 20g44 ada wil twiyeltk gut ga = und sie wandte sich urn
and she turned herself about [[King Jamesg she turned herself back]].
John 21 020 ada tgwiyeltk gish Peter ga = und Petrus wandte
sich urn = Then Peter, turning about.
riksh# 120.
This prefix appears joined
1) to bag
Matt. 14029 ada ltha Okshba-sh Peter gish ga agwYkshau ga... =
und als Petrus aus dem Schiff getreten war... = And when Peter had
stepped [[King Jamesg come]] down out of the ship.
Likewise Mark 502 [[Ada ltha akshba gish ga agvir kshau ga,
ada dilt gut ladaltk gut ga gault ga yZita ga wilhokshk gish ga whati
shakshgum haik ga, wItk gut gish ga shpagait n'toigiat ga = Und als
er aus dem Schiff trat, lief ihm alsbald entgegen aus den GAbern ein
besessener Mensch mit einem unsaubern Geist = And when he was
come out of the ship, immediately there met him out of the tombs a
man with an unclean spirit. ]]
109
2) to Law
Matt. 21021 ma Ziksh,gau lakakshit = wirf dich hinaus in's [[ins ii
Meer! = and be thrown out into the sea [[King James be thou cast
into the sea.
Compare [[this prefix to]] ksha- (# 106) with which it is related
phonetically and semantically (oksh- with a short o- has the meaning
''to fall").
In addition to 'oksh -, Ziksh- is also found in the same meaning
John 2n9 [[Ltha ilkshgoltht gish ga gilhouli ga, ada wilt nish ga
lagum gumdouz gut, ada lTdaush ga 1Crwalum zum aksh ga, dilth anai
ga = Als sie nun austraten auf das Land, sahen sie kohlen gelegt und
Fische drauf, und Brot = As soon then as they were came to land, they
saw a fire of coals there, and fish laid thereon, and bread. ]]
Matt. 1806 [[Ada al ligit na dumt in lthimzoshin gaul dada guba
gwa giT shimhoudiksha dada goi, yagai ga'-am dish nTat'nza tkulzipshilth wilEkshum laubum mrila da durrifEnT dit, ada za likshoik ga da
wil lthaba akshit = Wer aber '..rgert dieser Geringsten Einen, die an
mich glauben, dem ware besser, dass ein Mghlstein an seinen Ha ls
gehgnget, und er ersguft wUrde im Meer, da es am tiefsten ist = But
whoso shall offend one of these little ones which believe in me, it
were better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, and
that he were drowned in the depth of the sea. ]]
shin# 121. It is not improbable that this prefix is of the same
origin [[as]] the independent auxiliary shin [[# 134]] in as much as
[[the]] latter indicates that something else [[other]] than that which has
been said is, in addition, incidentally possible.
John 183 ada wil .gpiduksht gut ash gut shindoksh ga guldum
laouqsh = und er kommt, indem er mit sich finart Fackeln = and he
comes, while carrying torches [[King James: Judas... cometh thither
110
with lanterns and torches and weapons]]
Matt. 16:5 ada lthat vrat ga disciples gut ga nakdaush da gaadat gaulsh ga dumt shindoksh ga anai ga = und seine JiInger waren
hertibergefahren und batten vergessen mitzunehmen Brod = And when
his disciples were come to the other side, they had forgotten to take
bread.
2. Suffixe s
-sh
The suffix -sh is used for the definite, the exclusive:
Mark 6:30 ada shagait y7sh ga Apostles gishga = und es
kamen die Apostel zusammen zu... = And the apostles gathered them# 122.
selves together.
Mark 9:4 ada -6.17wansh dup Elijah ga... = und es erschien
Elias... = And there appeared E-li -as [[King :Tames: unto them]].
-lth
122), the
# 123. In contrast to the preceding suffix -sh
character of the general, of the indefinite, is associated with this
[[suffix]]. It indicates, as a result of this basic meaning, that something is either not certain that is questionable, or has not yet
occurred, but will occur. It appears, therefore,
a) with completely general, indefinite statements,
b) in negative sentences,
c) in interrogative sentence s
d) in imperative sentences,
e) in conditional clauses,
Examples:
of a):
Mark 15:31 ada gik dT housh ga manpriests ga dilth hilkgadami-
shit... = auch sprachen die Hohenpriester und Schriftgelehrten...
also spoke the high priests and scribes [[King James: Likewise also
111
the chief priests mocking said among themselves with the scribes .]].
Mark 11027 ada gik gutgoi duk s ht gish ga Jerusalem ga; ada astir
yt gish ga zum temple ga, ada gutgoiduksh ga manpriests ga dTlth
hrik.g.adamTshit ga, dilth tashilgiat gish nTat = und abermals kamen sie
gen Jerusalem und als er in den Tempel ging, da kamen die Hohenpriester und Schriftgelehrten und die Aeltesten zu ihm = And they
came again to Jerusalem; and as he was walking in the temple, there
come to him the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders.
John 1 n5 wai shiebunsh Jesus ga dup Martha ga, crilth lthgoukt
ga, dTsh Lazarus ga = Jesus aber liebte Martha und ihre Schwester
und Lazarus = Now Jesus loved Martha and her sister and Lazarus.*
of b)g
Luke 404 althga amuksha anailth dum hadidalshlth giat = nicht nur
von Brod lebt der Mensch = man shall not live by bread alone.
Luke 4011 op za lip gvigndumukshlth shTun alth ligi laup = auf
dass du nicht deinen Fuss an einen Stein stossest = in order that you
not hit your foot against a stone [[King James lest at any time thou
dash thy foot against a stand].
of c)!
John 304 n'dalth dum wila gik kshalaklaklth giat zida ltha al
wudagiat? alth dum gik gwisha ziintk ga dalth na nashgriumlth gish
naut... ? = wie kann ein Mensch geboren werden, wenn er alt ist?
Kann er auch wiederum in den Leib seiner Mutter gehen... ? = How
can a man be born when he is old? can he enter again [[King James,
a second time]] into his mother's womb and be born?
Mark 13035 awil althga ma shim wilailth n'dalth dum dazoiduksh*
ga Mry5nsh ga Valp ga, zahT hi:Vbel shin, za shriilukt shinith -a7tk, ligi
Note carefully the difference between di-1th and di -sh!
to be read g_oiduksh instead of dazoiduksh.
112
zida ltha algiakt shinith z-6`uz = denn ihr wisset nicht, wann der Herr
des Hauses kommt, ob am Abend, oder ob zur Mitternacht, oder urn
den Hahnenschrei? = for ye know not when the master of the house
cometh, at even, or at midnight, or at the cock crowing?
of d):
Mark 6:36 hashhaizlth = schicke (sie) fort = Send [[them]] away
[[King James: Send them away]].
Mark 9:47 kshag-aTlth = nimm es heraus = pluck it out.
of e):
Mark 13:7 ada amiza da ltha ma shim nakni5lth = und wenn ihr
horen werdet = and it you shall hear [[King James: And when ye shall
hear]].
yag_ai amizatgaudilth gaul dalth w-itk ga dalth
Luke 16:30
sondern wean Einer aus der Mitte der Todten zu
shpag_ait
ihnen Binge.... = but if one from the middle of the dead went to them
[[King James: but if one went unto them from the dead]].
# 124. in and un (Boas: En and r'an) have causative meaning.
Matt. 20:7 Fwil althgat ria t'in hakhalthalshinurn = denn Niemand
hat uns arbeiten lassen = for no one has let us work [[King James:
Because no man hath hired us]].
Luke 12024 adat g.up tkaug.unt ga Shimoigiat ga Lakaga = und
Gott nahret sie dock (tkauk = essen) = and God feeds them for sure
[[ tkauk = to eat]] [[King James: and God feedeth them]].
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 886: Derivatives, # 1, ]]
-T
# 125. The suffix 2r is found in interrogative sentences*:
Mark 7:18 ainalth di dalgagaulshk ga shimT? = seid ihr denn
auch so unverstgridig? = Are ye so without understanding also?
This -T is not to be confused with the pronominal suffix 7.
[[# 45, Personal Pronoun chart: dependent first person singular
(absent) pronominal suffix; and # 47, b): T (B.: E)]].
113
Mark 818 ada ainith ma shim nishtT? = and ihr sehet nicht? =
see ye not
-kea.
# 1260 (Boas) Quotative, formed by lea, which is derived frorr
amElead, hearsay it is said that he is coming, leVEdEksk°a.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 886 Derivatives, # 4.]]
1.1111
The suffix -urn always indicates an attributive relation
ship and occurs in two constructions that are difficult to reconcile.
It is joined namely
I. to the attribute and specifically
a) to many adjectives after which substantives then follow;
b) to many adverbs after which verbs then follow.
Here, thus, the attribute occurs in front and appears to be
characterized by -um.
The opposite appears to be the case
IL whenever -urn is joined to the first of two substantives following each other (a type of status -constructus formation), then the
second substantive has a genitive relationship to the first.
Examples of I,
Luke 58 awil hadageum yFyilt denn ich bin ein slindiger Mensch
= for I am a sinful man.
Luke 2.36 prophetum hanak ga = eine Prophetin (ein prophetisches Weib) a prophetess [[a prophetic wor a-ni]
# 127.
Examples of 1,
bo
Mark 1049 haldum bin == stehe auf! , Stand up! [[King James,
rise. ]]
Mark 10 50 halclumb-a-t = er stand auf = he stood up [[King
rose)].
Tame s° he
Mark 719 wil althgat zilum g.au gaudit = denn nicht: gehet es
hinein in sein Herz == Because it entereth riot into his heart.
114
Mark 710 adat ligit ria hadag_um algiag_a dada nagw7dit dTlth
naud:it> dum gup zagut -7 und wer Vater oder Mutter flucht, der soil
sterben (hadak = schlecht, algiak = sprechen) = and whoso curseth
father or mother, he shall die [[ hadak = bad, algiak = to speak]]
f[King James let him die the death]].
Examples of
Mark 146 adat gapsh ga locusts dT1th hon7yum gilhoulT ga' = und
er ass Heuschrecken und wilden Honig (Honig der Wildnis) = and he
did eat locusts and wild honey [[honey of wilderness]].
Mark 15043 ada gpiduksh Josephum Arimathaea ga = und es
kam Joseph von Arimathia = Joseph of Ar-im-a-thae -a came.
-k
The suffix -k is used for the formation of the passive
(# 84) as the following examples will show (frequently connected to the
stern by means of sh or
Luke 1076 shifw7tk ga dalth Prophet gish ga g_alaka = ein
Prophet des Hgchsten genannt werden = to be called a prophet of the
highest [[King James And thou, child shall be called the prophet of
# 128.
the Highest],
Luke 2027 ada wilt dazTintk ga Haik gish ga zum temple ga = und
er wurde durch den Geist in den Tempel gefuhrt = and he was led by
the spirit in the temple [[King Jamesg And he came by the Spirit into
the tennple]J.
Luke 10g26 gau damtk ga dida wilalaut ? = was ist geschrieben
im Gesetz ? = What is written in the law?
Addendum This passive formation by means of [[the]] attached
k is by far the most common. For the rarer formations by means of
-sa (sha) and -61-e- ( -di and -da) reference is made to # 84.
[[Schulenburg forms
sha, -di, -da]]
115
The -k occurring at the end of some words has nothing to
do with the passive suffix in those few cases where it is obviously
caused by a following initial g- (# 8).
Luke 226 hawalthkga zit nish ga. Christk gish ga Miyan ga
wenn er nicht vorher den Christ des Herrn gesehen hA...tte (Statt
Christk also Christ) = if he had not before seen the Lord's Christ
[[Also Christ instead of Christk]] [[King James before he had seen
the Lord's Christ]},
Luke 4 12 gup althga ma dum shpaltgaudsh ga MTyln ga
Shimoigiatk gun ga = du solist nicht versuchen den Herren, deinen
Gott (Shimoigiat) = Thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God
# 129.
[[Shimoigiat]].
3. Enclosing Formative
q-ka
# 130. (Boas q-ka, misfortune, happening
qhasVepka, having sickness,
wulaqtla.otk, when a landslide went down,
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888 Formation of Words. ]]
B. Independent Formatives
1. Auxiliaries of Time and ModaLty
# 131. In a manner similar to that in the Semitic languages,
the temporal references are incorporated into the modals, "ltha"
signifies that which is completed and lasts or continues; "wil" that
which has just made itself mainfest; and ''dun.i" that wh =ich is subse-
quent, no matter whether starting from a present or past point of
time, [[and]] is thought impending.
"no." has perfect meaning similar to "ltha" but seems to be
differentiated from the latter in that it appears without relation to
another fact in a simple statement.
All these auxiliaries (Itha, wil, dum, na) will be discussed
later in more detail in sections on the perfect [[# 282-# 285]] and on
116
temporal joining [[# 322-# 336]].
# 132. "za" is a modal particle which expresses [[the idea]]
that it is a question of something unfactual, whether of something not
yet become fact, only intended or wished, or of something whose
actuality is not yet established (is uncertain). --- Resembling the
it always gives speech a certain subjective coloring.
Mark 8:26 gilau za am z7in.un a gulzabut = gehe nicht hinein in
die Stadt = go not into the town [[King James Neither go into the
Greek (Iv
,
town]].
Mark 6:37 nrishimt in gTen da za gabit = gebet ihnen zu essen
= give them to eat [[King James for they have nothing to eat]].
# 133. "gup" is an auxiliary of strong, affirming meaning:
a) only, just, directly
b) necessarily, of necessity, must
c) universally general, all, always
Examples pertaining to this [[auxiliary]] are
Mark 1232 Mry 7n, shimhou hou'unt, ash ga .gup gault ga =
Meister, du hast recht geredet, denn es ist nur cin (Gott) = Master,
you have spoken correctly, there is only one [[God]] [[King James:
Master thou hast said the truth: for there is one God]].
Mark 137 awil du.rngup wal diva gwa = denn es muss also
geschehen = for it must so occur [[King James: for such things must
needs be]].
Mark 514 adat malthilt gish ga.gulzap ga, dilth gup tria-riTsh ga
lakyFp ga = and sie verkiindigten es in der Stadt and in der ganzen
Gegend = and they announced it in the town and in the entire region
[[King James: and told it in the city and in the country]]°
Luke 12:31 shim yagai gup gwilthgagalsh ga na kingdomt ga =
doch ihr mu-sst trachten nach dem Ko"nigreiche = however you must
aspire to the kingdom of God [[King James: But rather see ye the
kingdom of God]].
117
Luke 22g16 gup althga n'dum gik gapt = ich werde niemals
wieder davon essen = I will never again eat of it [[King James] I will
not any more eat thereof]].
Matt. 4g1.0 awil ltha zup damtk ga dit, dum.g.up lthaudun ga
Mry-in ga... = denn es steht geschrieben, du sollst anbeten den
Herrn..
= for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord....
Mr. Boas mentions the following examplesI am sick a long while, r'ap slyepkEn-5.
I am in the habit of eating, r'ap ra.'wiqgEno
I must sleep, r'ap qstVqEno.
I am repeatedly (always) hungry, r'ap tla'wola kte-/y.7.
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888g Derivatives, # 4. ]]
# 134. "shin" has a presumptive, dubitative nature; with
numerical data it indicates inaccuracy. (Compare # 121)
Mark 523 [[wrong verse citation]]
althga ma shim wilailth n"dalth dumgoiduksh
Mark 13g35
ga Mryansh ga walp ga, zahT hVbel shin, za shrillukt shinith -a7tk, ligi
zida ltha algiakt shinith z3uz, ligi za ltha zunitha.ga shin = denn ihr
wisset nicht, wann der Herr des Hauses kommen wird, ob des Abends,
oder urn Mitte der Nacht, oder zur Zeit wenn der Hahn kilht oder des
Morgens frti.he = for ye know not when the master of the house cometh,
at even, or at midnight, or at the cockcrowing, or in the morning.
Mark 8A6 ada wil lip '1"gagut ga, ash ga houit ga, Wil wha
anaitgum shin = and sie gedachten bei sich, indem sie spracheno Das
ist es, dass wir nicht Brod haben = And they reasoned among themselves, saying, It is because we have no bread.
# 135. gin indicates that the opposite of the factual is assumed:
John 514 gilau za gik hadak gun, yagai zahadak ga gin za
zpiduksha da gwan = nicht wieder stindige du, sondern schlimmeres
kOnnte dir widerfahren = sin no more, lest a worse thing could happen
to you [[King James sin no more, lest a worse thing come unto thee]].
118
John 814 zZ5 lipgeluksh magAurishk ga nT, gin adag_up shimhou
na ma.gaunshk grit = wenn ich auch von mir selbst zeugen wifrde, so
ware mein Zeugnis wahr = if I also would testify of myself, then would
my testimoney be true [[King James, Though I bear record of myself,
yet my record is true]].
# 136 "lugwil' may indicate completion,
Mark 15g44 adat lrishgnalthk gut gut Pilate ga ziltha al lugwil
gozagut = and er verwunderte sich, dass er schon todt war = and he
wondered [[King James Pilate marvelled]] that he was already dead
[[King James if he were already dead]].
John 723 ma lthikltha'undin shim a goiyr, d na wil lugwil
dimautk ga gaul da yoga da hal.ishquaitk ga shat? = zIrnet ihr denn
fiber mich, dass ich gesund machte einen Menschen am Sabbath? = are
ye angry at me, because I have made a man healthy [[King James
every whit whole]] on the sabbath?
2. Adverbs
# 137. First of all, under this category come the pure adverbial
expressions like shim, wr. = "very, " "very much, 'greatly, " "very
well"; dil = "soon, "almost" gik = "again,
Afterward appear formations like lthawil (constructed from
ltha which designates that which is completed and lasts or continues
[[# 20, 5)]], and wil which designates that which has just occurred
[[# 20, 4 ]1) = all the time, 90 "always, " [[and]] shimhou (shim =
"very much, "greatly, 'very well" [[# 59]], [[and]] hou =
verily, all of which are used like adverbs and
"to speak") = "truly,
therefore are listed under this heading.
Finally, the list of those adverbs which are characterized by
the auxiliary syllable -urn belong here. Since ample mention [[has]]
already [[been]] made (# 127): only the most important for the logical
systematic treatment of adverbs are stated here
119
We divide the adverbs into those of place time, and manner.
Adverbs of Place
# 138. gwa and gwai (# 54) are pronominal = "here'
Mark 14:32 wan shim a gwa setzet euch hierher! = Sit ye here
Mark 13:21 nr gwait Christi; ligi nT gwit = siehe hier ist
Christus; oder sieh' dort ist er = Lo, here is Christ; or lo, he is
there.
nTric (# 57) is also pronominal = there
John 6:3 ada
ga wil want ga dilth na disciples gut ga =
und daselbst setzten er und seine JI7nger sich = and there he sat with
# 139.
his disciples.
John 19:18 nrnish gut wil lizagwut gish ga lak.guzEk ga = dort
aber tOdteten sie ihn am Kreuze = and there they killed him on the
cross [[King James: Where they crucified him, and two other with
him]].
John 10:40 ada n-Tnish ga wil dligt ga = und daselbst blieb er
and there he abode.
# 140. yagwa = here:
John 6:9 hriw-a-1 lthgwa yCit-a7 yagwa = es ist ein Knabe hier =
There is a lad here.
John 6025 n'da wila goidukshunr yagwa ? = wann bist du
hierhergekommen? = When camest thou hither?
# 141. zilum = into inside [[penetration into something, some-
times as seen from the outside, but often figurative]]:
Mark 7:18 ... gu ligi gau watk ga dida gralag.ut adat zilum gau
giadit... ...dass das, was von der Aussenseite kommt und
hineingeht in den Menschen.... = that whatsoever thing from without
entereth into the man.
Mark 15:46 adat liTishgat gish ga zum n'toigiat ga zilum yezk
gut gish ga laup ga = und er legte ihn in ein Grab, das in einen Felsen
120
hineingehauen war = and laid him in a sepulchre which was hewn out
of a rock.
# 142. logum = on or in something (down from above?) [[movement downward as seen from below]]:
John 5:4 ...1:*git na ga kshaaugum logum bat= wer nun
zuerst hineinsteigt.... = whoever now first climbed in [[King James:
For an angel went down at a certain season into the pool, and troubled
the water: whosoever than first after the troubling of the water
stepped in was made whole of whatever disease he had]].
John 4:6 ada wil shiTnalthsh Jesus gish ga wil yat ga, gun logum
dhat gish ga awash ga nisha'aksh ga = weil nun Jesus mude von der
Reise war, setzte er sich nieder auf den Brunnen = because now Jesus
was tired from the trip, he sat down on the well [[King James: Jesus,
therefore, being wearied with his journey, sat thus on the well]].
# 143. yaga = down, downward [[movement downward as seen
from below]]:
John 4:47 adat gwanZsh ga dum yaga-.gpiduksht ga = and er bat
ihn, dass er herab kame = and besought him that he would come down.
John 4:49 Mryan, yaga goidukshin = Herr, komme herab = Sir,
come down.
# 144. haldum = up
Matt. 9:9 ada wil haldum bat ga, adat yakut ga = und er stand
auf und er folgte ihm = and he stood up and he followed him [[King
James: he arose, and followed him]].
# 145. gik = back (with the verb "to come'`) [[return]]:
John 14:3 ...dum gik gpiduksha-n77, ada n'dum lip dok shimt =
... so will ich dock zur6!ckkommen und selbst euch hinnehmen = I will
come again, and receive you unto myself.
# 146. hazukshum is found also in the meaning "back":
121
Matt. 2703 adat hazukshum da.gutgoiduksh ga gwilit ga wil giapsh
gabigm dala ga ash ga manpriests ga di:1th tashTlgiat ga = und er
brachte zurii'ck die dreissig Silberlinge den Hohenpriestern und
Aeltesten = and he brought back the thirty silver pieces to the high
priests and elders [[King James and brought again the thirty pieces
of silver to the chief priests and elders.
Luke 4g20 ada wilt kbagash ga shaZinshk gaga, adat hazukshum
ginamt gish ga tkulw-aTulirnithk gaga = und er machte das Bach zu und
gab es zurUck dem Diener = And he closed the book and gave it back to
the servant [[King James gave it again to the minister]].
# 147. kbishum, kbashim in conjunction with shgri° = bow down
(to the ground)g
Luke 24g12 ada kbishum she rut gish ga zilum nizk gut ga... =
und er bilckte sich nieder und sah hinein = and he bowed down and
looked in [[King James Then rose Peter, and ran into the sepulchre;
and stooping down, he beheld]].
Mark 107 althga tkularn alth dum kbashimshgriT alth n'clum
ithTlthalth na dakltha zauksht = ich bin nicht werth, dass ich mich vor
ihm nieder bticke und die Riemen seiner Schuhe auflOse = I am not
worthy to bow down before him and loosen the throngs of his shoes
[[King Jame so the latchet of whose shoes I am not worthy to stoop
down and unloose]].
# 148. guluksha = through, throughout, acrossg
Mark 9g30 adat guluksha liyak gish ga Galilee ga = und sie
gingen durch Gall lga = and passed through Galilee.
Mark 11016 ada althgat anauklth dumt guluksha shinIggwa dit
ligit nalth ligi... ash ga zum temple ga = und er erlaubte nicht, dass
hindurchtrii!ge Jemand... in dem Tempel = And would not suffer that
any man... through the temple.
# 149. agwT = outsideg
122
Mark 3032 nT agwimaksh gut dup naun d-71th waigiant twin
gwilthgagri'unt = siehe. draussen stehen deine Mutter und deine Bru"der
und fragen nach dir = look, your mother and your brother stand outside and ask for you [[King James Behold, thy mother and they
brethren without seek for thee].
John 20011 ada al agwi tkulhaitk gish Mary gish ga n'toigiat ga 'aber ausserhalb stand Maria vom Grabe... = but outside Mary stood
at the grave [[King James But Mary stood without at the sepulchra.
# 150. zinsh is an adverb whose sense seems to be approximately "away, " "gone" ("to have no longer, " "no longer be thereTh
Mark 14g52 adat qudakshash ga halthau ga, adat zakautgum zinsE
g-euk gut = und er liess die Leinwand fahren und floh nackt von ihnen
= And He left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked.
Mark 1242 ada goiduksh ga gault ga gw-eum zinsh zagum hanak
ga = und es kam eine arme Wittwe = and there came a certain poor
widow.
shamagalth naksht,
Mark 10012 amiza yagai harigk ga za
ada zit naksh gulth gik gault. zinsh whazaudit ga = wenn aber ein
Weib sich scheidet von ihrem Manne und nimmt einen Anderen zum
Gatten, so bricht sie die Ehe = and if a woman divorces herself from
her husband and takes another for a husband, then she commits
adultery [[King Jame s o And if a woman shall put away her husband,
and be married to another, she committeth adultery]]
# 151. wagait dau = 'far off, " "distant, " "from afar, " at a
distance"
Mark 5 6 ada lthat nTsh Jesus gish ga... = und als er sah Jesup
von ferne = and when he saw Jesus afar.
Mark 14054 ada wag.ait dau gut wil }rigut gut Peter ga = und von
ferne folgte Petrus ihm nach = And Peter followed him afar off.
123
Addenda: geluksh = backward, back.
zaga = right across, diagonally or nearly opposite.
Adverbs of Time
# 152. A specific expression for 'today" does not occur; it is
found in paraphrase in all situations:
Mark 14:30 sha giaon = heute = today [[King jamesg That this
day]].
Luke 23:43 sha gwai dumg.up hokshk _gun (la goi ash ga zum
Paradise ga = heute (diesen Tag) wirst du mit mir im Paradiese sein
= Today [[this day]] shalt thou be with me in paradise.
# 153. "tomorrow" is called zagairep (B. g tsegyets'e'ip)
Matt. 6:30 [[Gun amizat shz,as..an-o-untk ga Shimoigiat ga. LakTga
kraugum gilhoulit, gu dalthil da da sha gra7n, ada zagazTep za zilum
dalthk ga da zum guldum lak, alth dum yagai wha z111th dumt wishwa-shum shimT? 0 niishTin alashgum shimhoudiksh? = So denn Gott das
Grass auf dem Fe lde also kleidet, das dock heute stehet, un morgen
in den Ofen geworfen wirdg sollte er das nicht vielmehr euch tun, o
ihr Kleinglaubigen? = Wherefore, if God so clothe the grass of the
field, which today is, and tomorrow is cast into the oven, shall he not
much more clothe you, 0 ye of little faith?]]
Matt. 6034 [[Gun gilau uphouitk ga .g.agaud shim wilawal zagazTep, awil dum lip uphouitk ga gauda za-gaziepa dum lip wila w-a71
dit. Ltha am lip gushgou hadaka da,griel da shat. = Darum sorget
nicht fu"r den andern Morgen; denn der morgende Tag wird fur das
Seine sorgen. Es is genug, dass ein jeglicher Tag seine eigne Blage
habe. = Take therefore no thought for the morrowg for the morrow
shall take thought for the things of itself. Sufficient unto the day is
the evil thereof. ]]
"day after tomorrow" = (Boasg tsenatq'tsegyets°Vip)
"yesterday" [[is called]] gazrep (Boas: gyets'e"ip)
124
John 4252 [[Ada wilt gtnadakt gish ga n'da ga hour ga da hi
gitwilhaitkshish ga walt ga. Gun houit gish niat, Gaziep da lthat wa
dupkaul da hour dat qudaksha da fevert. = Da forschte er von 'linen die
Stunde, in welcher es besser mit ihm geworden war. Und sie
sprachen zu ihm: Gestern urn die siebente Stunde verliess ihn das
Fieber. = Then enquired he of them the hour when he began to amend.
And they said unto him, Yesterday at the seventh hour the fever left
him. ]]
"day before yesterday" = (Boas nat&\.'da gyets'e"ip)
# 154. lthawil (ltha-wil) = for all time, always [[# 131, # 137]]
John 8:29 awil lthawila walu da gau ga anaugut ga = denn alle
Zeit thue ich, was ihm gefallt = for I do always those things that pleas,.
him.
John 18:20 lthawila shawilaigiamg_ushk gu da zum synagogue gut
= alle Zeit habe ich gelehret in der Schule = all the time have I taught
in the school [[King James I ever taught in the synagogue]].
John 634 ltha ma wila ginam anai nahou'un da gum = immer
gieb das Brod, von dem du sprichst, uns = always give the bread to
US of which you speak [[King James: evermore give us this bread]].
# 155.
gianZin = now, at present
John 884O ada al ma shim shigilth zaqudat gran = jetzt aber
sucht ihr mich zu tOdten = But now ye seek to kill me.
John 4:23 ada lthazoiduksha hourt gr.a-On = aber es ist die
Stunde jetzt gekommen = but now the hour has come [[King James: But
the hour cometh and now is]].
# 156. c1T1 = soon:
John 13:30 ada wil diltsh ga kshtfut ga = da ging er bald heraus
= then he soon went out [[King James: He... went immediately out]].
John 13:32 ada dilt ga dumt lthaudit ga = and bald wird er ihn
verlaren = and shall straightway glorify him.
125
# 157. whahrya" (wha-hr-y1) = not long afterward, soon
Mark 10:52 whahryat ga ada wil sha nrazk gut ga = und
alsobald, da ward er sehend = And immediately he received his sight.
Mark 14:43 whahTy3:sh ga houit ga = alsobald, als er noch
redete = And immediately while he yet spake.
# 158. hazish, hazush = "henceforth, 'I "from now on" or
"thenceforth, " "from that time on":
John 8:52 hazish wilaiyimt giaon shgli hadak ga da haiga da
gwan = nun wissen wir, dass du den Teufel hast = Now we know that
thou hast a devil.
John 21:6 ada wilt makshit gut, ada wil hazish lthgukshk gish ga
dumt shegit ga... = da warfen sie es (das Netz) und konnten es nicht
mehr ziehen (wegen der Menge der Fische) = then they threw it [[the
net]] and could not pull it [[because of the multitude of fish]] [[King
James: They cast therefore, and now they were not able to draw it
for the multitude of fish]].
# 159. altha = early:
Matt. 20:1 ... gu altha kshil dadT gunitha7gut... = welcher frA
am Morgen ausging... = which went out early in the morning.
Luke 14:22 [[wrong verse citation]]
# 160. gha, ghalFm and lam gha occur as adverbial expressions
in the meaning ''a little time, " "a little while":
Mark 6:31 zul shim1TiOunshk ga shim a wilgoishut ada gha
lTshquaitk ga shim = kommt, gehet besonders in eine Wii'ste und ruhet
ein wenig (ganz kurze Zeit) = Come ye yourselves apart into a desert
place, and rest awhile [[a very little while, an extremely short time]].
John 5:35 ada na shashuk ga shim da ghalam gulthzwisherada
shim gish ga na goibat = ihr aber wollt euch eine kleine Weile freuen
caber sein Licht = and you want to rejoice a little while in his light
[[King James: and ye were willing for a season to rejoice in his
light]].
126
# 161. gakpa = often (Boas: sometimes, at times, occasionally.
now and then, from time to time). [[Here Schulenburg gives the Boas
gloss of this adverb but does not give the Boas orthography, the term
itself. He gives the gloss in German, not in English as is usual. ].]
Mark 9:22 adat ,gakpat dagauda dida zum n'lagut di-1th zum
akshit = und oft hat er ihn gebracht in's Feuer und in's Wasser = And
ofttimes it hath cast him into the fire, and into the waters.
Matt. 17:15 [[Schulenburg does not give the verse example, but
says instead:]] It occurs in the same meaning. [[The example is:
Miyan gumgaudun 5: ltheilthgum yaa yrit: awil ma' o1 dit, ada shimgul
cladge. zum'nlagut dTith gakba
ga dit; awil lthgwila gakba
zum akshit. = Und sprach: Herr, erbarme dich ilber meinen Sohn!
denn er ist mondsiichtig und hat ein schweres Leiden; er fgllt oft ins
Feuer und oft ins Wasser. = Lord, have mercy on my son: for he is
lunatick, and sore vexed: for ofttimes he falleth into the fire, and
oft into the water. ]]
# 162. arngait = already:
John 6:64 a-wilt arn,g.ait wilait gut Jesus... = denn Jesus wusste
schon... = For Jesus knew already [[King James: For Jesus knew
from the beginning]].
John 13:37 gaulth gun lthgukshk gulth n'dum amg,ait yIgun
giaZn? = warum 1st es unmOglich, dass ich dir nachfolge jetze schon?
= why is it impossible, that I follow you now? [[King James: Why
cannot I follow thee now?]]
John 15:27 awll na ltha amgait hakhokshk ga shim da'T goi
wilhrshidak gut = denn ihr seid bei mir gewesen schon von Anfang an
= for you have been with me already from the beginning on [[King
James: because you have been with me from the beginning]].
# 163. hashba is found, it is true, in only a few places and
seems here to have the meaning: "already, " "now":
127
John 15:3 ltha al hashba shikshakshk ga shimt a ni-nr algiaga no
houyir da gwashim zunwal dit = ihr seid jetzt rein urn des Wortes
willen, das ich zu euch geredet habe = Now ye are clean through the
word which I have spoken unto you.
# 164. lugwil = before, beforehand, in advance:
Mark 6:33 adat hapt ga amy5t gish ga tkg..nrsh gagulzipzap ga,
ash ga amwgluksht ga, adat gilwil goltht ga = und sie kamen aus allen
Stgdten und indem sie gut gingen, kamen sie ihnen zuvor = And they
came out of all cities and in going well, they came to him beforehand
[[King James: and ran afoot thither out of all cities, and outwent
them, and came together unto him]].
# 165. hawFanT = henceforth, from now on
Matt. 26:64 hawganT ada ma dum shim nish ga wil dhash ga
Lthg5lthk gish ga giat: = von nun an werdet ihr sehen den Sohn des
Menschen sitzen... = Hereafter shall ye see the Son of man sitting...
# 166. kshgauk = first, at first, first of all.
Mark 4:28 -6:wilt lip dagoiduksh da yi5b a na gian dit; kshzauza
yenshit, ada... = denn von selbst bringt die Erde ihre Frucht; zuerst
das Gras, und... = For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself; first
the blade.
John 18:13 adat kshgaugum dag_audit gish ga awash Annas ga =
und zuerst firhrten sie ihn zu Mannas = And led him away to Annas
first.
shrigra.5n = finally, at last:
Matt. 26:60 shrigia-6n ada wil gutgoiduksh ga dupkadc7lt ga... =
# 167.
zuletzt traten herzu zwei....
At the last came two....
Adverbs of Manner
# 168. shimhou = truly, verily [[# 137]]:
John 14:12 shimhou, shil-nhou, houyir da gwashim = wahrlich,
wahrlich, ich sage euch = Verily, verily, I say unto you.
128
Luke 23:43 shimhou da gwan = wahrlich, ich sage dir = Verily I
say unto you.
# 169. shim = very, very much, greatly, very well, in front of
verbal and nominal expressions (compare shimhou # 168):
Mark 5:23 ada shimt gigrenak gut ga = und er bat ihn sehr = And
he besought him greatly.
Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwunOt gish nTat = und er bat ihn sehr =
And he besought him much.
# 170. In addition to shim, the language also uses an even
longer form in front of verbals and nominal expressions: shimzul
(compare # 24):
Mark 6:26 ada shimg.ul shrepk gish ga.g.audsh ga king ga = und
es ward sehr betrubt das Herz des Kgnigs = And the king's heart
became grieved [[King James: And the king was exceedingly sorry]].
Mark 10:14 ada shiriu1 lthi.T.ndrt ga = da ward er sehr zornig
= then he became very angry [[King James: he was much displeased]].
# 171. wr = very, very much, greatly, very well [[# 137]]:
Mark 5:38 ... dflth wil wrbauk gish ga wTheldit ga =
und
sehr weinten viele = them that wept and wailed greatly.
# 172. wram (wr-am) is an intensification of the former:
Mark 5:7 wram hou = laut schreien (hou = sprechen) = cried
loudly [[hou = to speak]] [[King James: and cried with a loud voice]].
# 173. shimgit, in addition, is found in the meaning "very,
very much, II "greatly, " "very well":
Mark 15:43 ada gpiduksh Josephum Arimathaea ga, gault ga
shimgit giadum ama councillor ga... = und es kam Joseph von
Arimathia, ein sehr ehrbarer Rathsherr.... = and Joseph of
v
Ar-im-a-thae
-a came, a very honorable counsellor[[King James:
v
Joesph of Ar-im-a-thre'/-45'.,
an honorable counsellor, ...came]].
129
Mark 1::43 adat shimgit yaoulthemakt = und er bedrohte ihn
hart = And he threatened him severly [[King James: And he straitly
charged him]].
Mark 8:25 ada shimgit nTazk gut ga = und er sah gut = and he
saw well [[King James: and saw every man clearly]].
# 174. gidi expresses the idea of being fixed, remaining = to
hold "fast" or to "seize, " to stand "still":
Mark 12:12 ada wilt shigilth gidiga dit ga = und sie trachteten
danach, wie sie ihn griffen = And they sought to lay hold on him.
Mark 12:13 ada wilt hashhaiz ga nazazToush ga Pharisees dIlth
Herodians gish nrat, ash ga dumt gidigT.t gish ga wila algiakt ga = und
sie sandten Einige der Pharisger und der Diener des Herodes zu ihm,
damit sie ihn in seiner Rede fingen = And they sent [[King James:
send]] unto him certain of the Pharisees and of the servants of Herod
[[King James: of the Hg-rF/-di.'-''ns]], to catch him in his words.
wil wa ada wil gidi dhlt gish ga lakaush ga
Matt. 2:9
wil dYsh ga ltheTwaumlthk gaga = ...bis dass er kam und stand stifle
oben uber, wo das Kindlein war = until it came and stood still above
over where the young child was [[King James: till it came and stood
over where the young child was]].
# 175. shidi = as usual, often, frequently:
Mark 10:1 ada shTdi houit ga hia7qush gut gik shriwilaigiamzut
ga = und wie es seine Gewohnheit war zu sprechen, so fing er abermals zu lehren an = as it was his wont to speak, thus he began again
to teach [[King James: and as he was wont, he taught them again]].
Luke 22:39 ada wil doultht ga, shTdi waIt ga, ash ga awash ga
shgunishum Olives ga = und er ging fort nach seiner Gewohnheit auf
den Oelberg = And he... and went, as he was wont, to the mount of
Olives.
# 176.
um z in = apart, separately, secretly, privately:
130
Mark 13:3 ada astir dh-Et gish ga lak shzunishum Olives ga,
adup gish ga temple ga, adat .g.umzin gtTadakt gut dup Peter ga, dish
James... = und als er auf dem Oelberge sass, dem Tempel gegenilber
fragten ihn besonders Petrus und Jacobus = And as he sat upon the
mount of Olives over against the temple, Peter and Jacob asked him
privately [[King James: Peter and James and John and Andrew asked
him privately]].
Matt. 24:3 ...ada z.umzin g_utgpiduksh ga disciples gish nTat...
= ...da traten zu ihm seine Jliger besonders... = the disciples came
unto him privately....
# 177. alu seems to be the opposite of Lumzin in the meaning
"freely, " "publicly, " "openly":
John 7:13 ada am althgat rig za aiu algiaga dalth wila wilt, awil
libYshit gish ga Jews ga = Niemand aber mochte offen heraus [lber ihn
sprechen, dean sie farchteten sich vor den Juden = Howbeit no man
spoke openly of him for fear of the Jews.
John 7:26 .g.ukshtanT., al alt a'algiak dit, ada althga gaulth hou
di ash niat = siehe, er redet aber frei, und sie sagen ihm nichts =
behold he speaks openly [[King James: But, lo, he speaketh boldly]]
and they say nothing unto him.
# 178. ligi = perhaps, by chance:
John 10:34 ligi wha damtk ga na wilalautk ga shimi... ?
stehet nicht etwa geschrieben in eurem Gesetz... ? = is not by chance
written in your law... ? [[King James: Is it not written in your
law... ?
John 8:42 ada althga za ligi lip dazpidukshk gi... = und nicht
mochte (za) ich etwa von mir selbst gekommen sein... = and I would
not like [[za]] to have come by chance to me myself [[King James:
neither came I of myself]].
131
# 179.
gik = again, anew, once more [[# 137, # 229, # 287,
# 289th
Luke 20:11 adat gik haiz ga gault ga tkulwaTulimlthk gaga = und
abermals sandte er einen Knecht = And again he sent a [[King James:
another]] servant.
Luke 24:6 althga \val da gwa, yag.ai ltha gik d51sh ga dit = nicht
ist er hier, sondern er lebt wieder = he is not here. but he lives again
[[King James: but is risen]].
# 180. hazukshum [[# 288]] also is found in the same meaning
as gik:
Mark 9:12 ... adat hazukshum hoigiag.un tkgiar gaut = ...und er
wird alles wieder zu rechte bringen = and restoreth all things.
# 181. amuksha = only, except for:
Mark 9:8 amukshat Jesus ga hokshk gut gish dupnTat = nu?' war
Jessus bei ihnen = only Jesus was with them [[King James: save
Jesus only with themselves]].
Mark 4:27 [[wrong verse citation]]
Mark 5:37 ada althgat anauklth dumt yga dit ligit nT., amukshat
Peter, dish James... = und nicht liess er zu, dass Jemand ihm
nachfolgte, ausgenommen Petrus und Jacobus = And he suffered no
man to follow him save Peter, and James [[King James: and John
the brother of James)].
# 182. gup also has the meaning "only":
nTnr gwai dumt g.un-a7dukt da y5Ia nagw-a7dit
Matt. 19:5
dTlth naudit, ada dumg,up hokshk ga dada naksh dit = denn aus diesem
Grunde wird ein Mann seinen Vater und seine Mutter verlassen und
wird nur sein bei seinem Weibe = For this cause shall a man leave his
father and mother and shall only be with his wife [[King James: and
shall cleave to his wife]].
132
Matt. 19:17 gup gaul ga amt ga = nur Einer ist gut = only one is
good [[King James: there is none good but one]].
# 183. shak = together:
Mark 12:7 ada al Agai lip na shagahoudash ga hilkgashindointk
gut ga = aber die Weinartner sprachen zusammen unter einander =
But the vine dressers spoke together among one another [[King James
But those husbandmen said among themselves]].
Mark 12:42 gri shag,ait kbrgmsh centit = welche zusammen einen
Heller ausmachen (einen halben Cent) = which together amounts to a
mite [[a half cent]] [[King James: which make a farthing]].
# 184. naga = one another or each other, among one another:
Luke 24:32 ada naga hou'unt ga = und sie sprachen unter
einander = and they spoke among one another [[King James: And they
said one to another]].
Luke 13:1 ...CI nagalilthgut gish ga nha lthwailil dash Pilate
gish ga naga7mgauksht ga = ...welcher Blut Pilatus vermischt hatte
unter einander mit ihrem Opfer = whose blood Pilate had mixed
among one another with the sacrifices [[King James: whose blood
Pilate had mingled with the sacrifices]].
# 185. nTnT = thus, so [[# 57, # 139]]:
Matt. 13:49 ninT dum wal da da zida ltha shab7 halizog.a = also
wird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt gekommen ist = So shall it be
[[King James: at the end of the world]].
Matt. 18:35 nTrci" dum di wg.lsh ga Nagw-alic ga lakgga gwashim...
= also wird auch mein himmlischer Vater euch thun... = So likewise
shall my heavenly father do also unto you.
# 186. In addition to the pronominal ninT, shga is found in the
same meaning = thus, so:
Mark 2:5 ada lthat nisht gut Jesus ga shga gashimhoudikshit ga
= und als Jesus sah ihren Glauben = And when Jesus saw their faith.
133
Mark 12:31 dumzup shila shg,a shTebun shilagiadunt = du sollst
lieben deinen Ngchsten (wie dich selbst) = Thou shalt love thy neighbor
as theyself.
3. Prepositions
# 187. The prepositions denote a formal designation of place,
of time, and of logical relations.
Ordinary prepositions like zum = in or into. lak = on, etc. are
to be differentiated from [[other]] derived [[prepositions]] like w-Etk
(to have come hither) from (something) hither [[to this place]]. etc.
# 188. zum = in, into (compare # 20, 1):
John 10:23 zum temple = im Tempel = in the temple.
John 10:25 n'zum wash = im Namen = in the name [[King James°
in my Father's name]].
# 189. lak = on, upon:
Luke 10:10 shim kshahaba na lak gaina dit = gehet heraus auf
ihre Strassen = go out upon your streets [[King James: go your ways
out into the streets]].
Luke 15:15 adat haizt gish ga na lak Zazuksh gut = and er
schickte ihn auf seinen Acker = and he sent him upon his fields [[King
James: and he sent him into his fields]].
# 190. lakau, lak = on, upon (something) thither [[away from
the speaker or point contemplated]]:
Matt. 23:36 tk-inTgau gwa dum.goiduksha dad7 lakau wilshidak
ga giada gwa = alles dieses wird kommen aber das Geschlecht dieser
Menschen = All these things shall come upon this generation.
Matt. 5:45 awilt nTat ga
kshgwa'ansh ga na giamukshit ga
lakau hadadak ga dit...dT1thzun wIsha lakau hakhoigiaza. dit... = denn
er ist es, der seine Sonne aufgehen lgsst Ciber die BOsen. ound regnen
lgsst liaber Gerechte... = for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil...
and sendeth rain on the just....
,
134
# 191. whati = without:
Luke 18:2 gu ga whati nakbizriut gish ga Shimoigiat ga LakTga
= welcher ohne Furcht vor Gott (war) = which [[was]] without fear of
God [[King James: which feared not God]].
Luke 18:6 housh ga whati hoigiagum hadabit ga = das Sprechen
des ungerechten Richters (ohne Gerechtigkeit) = the speech of the
unjust judge [[without justice]] [[King James: Hear what the unjust
judge saith]].
# 192. shpa_g_a = in the midst or center of, amid:
Mark 5:5 ada tlanTsh ga hVbel ga dilth ziTtshta ga, wait gish ga
shpaaait sh.gunTshta ga, dilth shpaLait n'toigiat ga = und er war alle
1\11,chte (Abende) und Tage auf den Bergen und in den Grabern = and he
was every night [[evening]] and day [[King James: And always, night
and day, he was]] in the mountains and in the tombs.
Mark 10:43 ada al althga dum di wal da shpaga shimt = aber
also soll es unter euch nicht sein = But so shall it not be among you.
# 193. nadau = "on the other side of, " "across":
John 3:26 ...nadau da Jordan = jenseit des Jordan = ...on the
other side of Jordan [[King James: beyond Jordan]].
John 10:40 ada wilt gik zaush ga nadau gish ga Jordan ga = und
er zog wieder jenseit des Jordan = And he went again across Jordan
[[King James: And went away again beyond Jordan]].
John 6:1 ...wilt zagazaut gut Jesus ga nadaush da gish ga
lakakshum Galilee ga = Jesus fuhr weg durch das galilgische Meer =
Jesus went across [[King James: over]] the sea of Galilee.
# 194.
quclFon = along:
Matt. 3:5 tk-inTsh ga zakzozut gish ga qudFnsh ga Jordan = alle
Under lgngs des Jordan = all countries along the Jordan [[King James.
all the region round about Jordan]].
# 195. zogash = at, on, by, to, along:
135
Matt. 4:13 ada dh-at gish ga Capernaum ga,
ga zozash ga
aksh ga, nIzo.g.ash ga Zabulon dT.lth Nephthalim ga und er lies s sich
nieder zu Capernaum, welches liegt am Meere, an den Grenzen
Zabulons und Nephthalims = and he... dwelt in CM-p'e'rl-n%.-i.fm, which
is on [[King James: upon]] the sea coast, on [[King James: in]] the
borders of Za-bu -lon and Neph
Matt. 4:18 ada ashT y7,sh Jesus gish ga zog.ash ga akshum
1.1
11
Galilee... = und als Jesus am galilgischen Meer entlang ging... = and
as Jesus went along the sea of Galilee [[King James: And Jesus,
walking by the sea of Galilee]].
# 196. hazaklthk (singular), hazazaklthk (plural) = in front of
(in the presence of people)
Mark 6:41
dumt daut gish ga hazazaklthk gut ga = dass sie
dieselben vor sie legten = that they laid these in front of them [[King
James: and gave them to his disciples to set before them]].
Mark 13:9 ada dum makshk ga shim da hazazaklthk ga governorsit dT1th kingsit = und sie werden euch ftihren vor Fri'rsten and KOnige
= and they were led before sovereigns and kings [[King James: ye
shall be brought before rulers and kings]].
# 197. gauk = before, ahead [[of]], according to time and place:
John 15:18 wilai shim na dTt libalukshu da.g.auk shimt = wis set,
dass sie (die Welt) mich vor euch gehasst hat = ye know that it [[the
world]] hated me before you [[King James: before it hated you]].
Matt. 28:7 ada nT ltha* doulth dada-zauk shimt a Galileet = und
siehe, er wird vor euch hingehen in Galila = and behold, he goeth
before you into Galilee.
Here dum is probably used instead of ltha [[# 131, # 277,
# 282, # 322]].
136
# 198. hagau = behind, after or following (in the presence of
people):
Mark 8:33 bUyina hagauyrit Satan = gehe hinter mich Satan = Get
thee behind me, Satan.
Mark 5:27 ada dT,goiduksht gish ga shpagait giat gish ga hagaut
ga = und auch sie kam aus der Mitte des Volkes hinter ihn = and also
she came out of the midst of the people behind him [[King James:
When she had heard of Jesus, came in the press behind, and touched
his garment]].
# 199. tkula'n = behind, after, following (according to time and
place):
Luke 23:26 ...dumtgplzakt gish ga tkul-gnsh Jesus ga =
...damit er es (das Kreuz) tri.ige hinter Jesu her = that he might bear
it [[the cross]] after Jesus.
John 1:27 Cf. nTiff_goiduksha dida tkura-na... = der ises, der
nach mir kommen wird... = he it is, who will come [[King James:
who coming]] after me....
# 200. watk (singular) = come, having come from, signifies
origin, source of something to this place (compare # 12, b).
[[Schulenburg considers watk the passive form of w-a-. See # 84 on the
formation of the passive and "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German):
watk (passive of wg) "come" is also used in the meaning "originate
(in), " "proceed, " "flow (from). " watk translated into German:
gekommen, or "come, " the past participle formjF
Matt. 16:1 adat shpaltgaud ga ash gut gwunFsh ga dumt
gwuniazunsh ga shinlaiduksh ga w-gtk gut gish ga lak-a-ga = und sie
versuchten ihn, indem sie ihn baten, dass er ihnen ein Zeichen vom
Himmel zeige = and tempting desired him that he would shew them a
sign from heaven.
137
Matt. 18:35 ...zida whazumzaud shim a na hadak ga waik shim
waik ga dagag.aud shimt = ...wenn ihr nicht die Fehler eurer Brner
vergebet von euren Herzen = if ye from your hearts forgive not his
brother their trespasses [[King James: forgive not every one his
brother his trespasses]].
# 201. amyr (am-yr) away, from*:
John 10:32 vThe'l da ama halthalsha ltha gwunrazunri da gwashirn
amyrt gish ga Nagwrt ga = viele gute Werke habe ich erzeiget euch von
meinem Vater = Many good works have I shewed you from my Father,
John 8:47 wil althga amyr shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga
= denn nicht seid ihr von Gott = for [[King James: because ]] ye are
not of God.
# 202. rwr = thither or that way, to [[expressing motion away
from the speaker or reference point]].
Matt. 3:13 ada wil zoiduksh Jesus ga wr...tk gut gish ga Galilee
gish ga Jordan awash John = da kam Jesus aus Galilga an den Jordan
zu Johannes = Then cometh Jesus from Galilee to Jordan unto John.
Mark 9:14 ada ltha goiduksht gish ga awash ga disciples gut ga
= und er kam zu seinen Ji.ingern = and... he came to his disciples.
# 203. wazait = until, up to:
John 13:1 ltha wilt shipsHiebunt ga wag.ait wil Shaba ga = er
liebte sie bis an's Ende = he loved them unto the end.
John 16:24 wazait gYaZin = bis jetzt = until now [[King James:
Hitherto]].
# 204. adup(k) = opposite, facing:
Mark 12:41 ada dhrsh Jesus gish ga adupk gish ga n'tar'amw.a-.1
ga = und Jesus setzte sich gegenuber dem Gotteskasten = and Jesus sat
opposite to [[King James: over against]] the treasury.
amya is the plural of wrtk (# 200): compare the chapter on
plural formation (# 34) [[Chapter II]].
138
Mark 11:2 haba lthgwa zulzaba I:dupk ga shimt = gehet hin in
den kleinen Ort gegentiber von euch = Go to the little place opposite yol,
[[King James: Go your way into the village over against you]].
# 205. Paraphrasing is also popular:
Luke 7:1 lthat shadab-ish ga tkg.nTsh ga nahouit gish ga zum
.g.azumZish ga giat ga... = als er ein Ende all° seinen Reden gemacht
vor dem Volke (eig. in den Ohren des Volkes) = when he made an end
of all his discourses before the people [[really in the ears of the
people]] [[King James: when he had ended all his sayings in the
audience of the people]].
Mark 12:6 [[wrong verse citation]]
Mark 2:12 ada wil doultht gish ga
ga tk-inTt ga = and
er ging weg vor Allen (vor den Gesichtern Aller) = and went forth
before all [[before the faces of all]] [[King James: before them]].
# 206. Most extraordinary is the paraphrase in the following
sentences (mT.y7n = lord, chief):
John 1:48 hawalthkgut hiTitk gunt Philip, n'da
da
rriTyln shun figut, ada nan nTazunt = ehe dich rief Philippus, wo du
warest unter dem Feigenbaum, da sah ich dich = Before that Philip
called thee, when thou wast under the fig tree, I saw thee.
John 1:50 nan niazun da rriTy-in shun figut = ich sah dich unter
dem Feigenbaum = I saw thee under the fig tree.
(It is thought the situation forbids a polite miyIn = lord [[or sir]]
instead of [[the familiar form of]] you. )
Note: In Tsimshian no preposition corresponds to "for, "
"because of, " "on account of, " "for the sake of. " Rather, in order to
express this relation, the language always makes use of the paraphrase with gun (= instrument, cause):
John 14:11 amilth aint halthalshilthzun shimhoudiksh shim
goi = wenn nicht, so glaubet mir doch urn der Werke willen (wenn
139
nicht, so mOgen die Werke der Grund eures Glaubens an mich sein =
if not, thus believe me for the sake of the works [[if not, thus might
the works be the reason of your belief in me]] [[King James:, or else
believe me for they very works' sake]].
John 12:11 -a7wilt niat ga .gungadoulthsh ga hrldit ga Jews ga
denn seinetwegen gingen viele Juden hin = for his sake many Jews
went away [[King James: Because that by reason of him many of the
Jews went away]].
gunw-il is also used with preference (# 12, b)..
Matt. 18:20 7,wil nrda wil shag.ait wan dupkadF1 dit ligi gwilaun
dit a na wai yrigunwEl dit... = denn wo zusammen sind Zwei oder
Drei urn meines Namens willen.... = for where two or three are
together for the sake of my name [[King James: For where two or
three are gathered together in my name]].
Luke 18:29 althgat nalth giat gra: lthat in qudaksha na walp dit,
ligi... ash ga na kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-gazunw7.1 dit... =
es giebt keinen Menschen, welcher sein Haus verlgsst, oder... um
des Reiches Gottes willen.... = There is no man that hath left house,
or... for the kingdom of God's sake.
a, -37.
# 206 a.
The words a and 3: seem to be only phonetic variants.
They appear extremely often in the sense of a preposition for the
place or the time where, occasionally for the place to which one is
going, and rarely for the place from which one comesprobably
depending on the governing verb. Generally, but not always, they
relate to something in the presence or proximity of the speaker.
Pertinent examples:
Matt. 28:7 ada ni dum doulth dadZgauk shimt a Galileet = and
siehe, er wird vor euch hingehen in Gall lga = and, behold, he goeth
before you into Galilee.
140
Matt. 21:11 Jesus a gwai, prophetum Nazareth r Galilee =
Jesus ist dieser (in diesem), der Prophet von Nazareth in Gall lga
This [[in this one]] is Jesus the prophet of Nazareth of Galilee.
4. Conjunctions
# 207. As conjunctions are found:
ada (joining sentences)
and
di- (joining words)
wai
but
al
yag.ai
but [[in the sense of "on the contrary"]]
dha
then, at that time, at the momentc
ash, ashT
while, during
ltha
as, when
wil
then
wa,g.ait dum (wil) until
hi
c
as soon as
Schulenburg translates dhl' into German as "da, in dem
Augenblick" in contrast to his translation below of the conjunction wil
as "da, dann. " According to "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German),
dill' is the Boas form cre. See Language Sample I where the Tsimshian
form da is translated into English as "just. 'I See also Language
Sample IV where the Tsimshian form d'gitatEt with the number 8
footnote notation of dhri is translated into German as Her setzt ihn"
[[ "he sets him"]]. dliihere is the singular verb form: to sit, to sit
down; to be; to stay, to tarry; to set; (B. d' a).
141
hawalthk
not yet, before
hawEnilth,1
as soon as, whenever
zida
1. for the designation of the future
dum
2
to introduce clauses of intent
in order that... not,
dum wha
so that... not
op za
in order that... not,
so that...not
"gwil
gun
for
because,
for that reason, therefore
consequently
amT
if = real
amiza
if = unreal
gin: the opposite is taken as the factual.
z"6"
although, even though
142
althga amuksha
ligi
yagai di
not only-- -but also
or
5. Interjections
# 208. As [[interjections]] the following occur
o,
Matt. 1125 ninF'unt o Nagw-it = ich preise dich o Vater
thank thee, 0 Father.
aha = expression of aversion (Mark 15:29)
ni
zukshtF
= look, behold
gukshfihT.
tsaq = Oh shame! Oh fie!
143
VI. NUMERALS
A. The Cardinal Numbers
# 209.
The [[biblical]] texts which are at my disposal offer little
support for the treatment of the difficult chapter at hand. Fortunately.
Dr. Boas has devoted his particular attention to the subject.
In accordance with his division, there are seven classes of
numerals [[classified]] according to the type of objects counted
I. The first of these classes is used in counting whenever the
number refers to no definite object (abstract);
II. the second class applies to flat objects and animals;
III. the third to round objects and divisions of time;
IV. the fourth to human beings;
V. the fifth to long objects (here the numerals have the suffix
kan (shgun) [[Schulenbures term]] = tree),
VI. the sixth to canoes;
VII. the seventh to measures; Mr. Boas supposes that these
numerals are composed with anon
hand).
[[1889 Boas Report, p. 880.]]
# 210. Mr. Boas gives the chart of cardinal numbers [[shown
on pages 144 and 145]]. [[Hereafter all Boas citations in this section
on cardinal numbers refer to the chart of cardinal numbers in the
1889 Boas Report, p. 881. ]]
Numeral One
# 211. gT.g.k (first class), griel (third class), gual (fourth class)
and .gam' ma (sixth class) occur:
a)' gi.-57k (Boas: gyakt) is used whenever the number does
not refer to a definite object (abstract):
Matt. 10:29 ada althga gi5k za tikilaklaga da lakyObit za wha
wilaishga Nagwat shim ga = and nicht alit einer auf die Erde ohne
The Boas Chart of Cardinal Numbers [[cardinal number chart correction according to the Boas
chart: add kCIA.1 tE k12/1 to number 11, under "Men. "]]
No. Counting
Flat
Objects
Round
Objects
Men
Long Objects
Canoe s
Measure s
k.'alwutskan
k'''amget
kl'al
guilbEl
1
g yak(
gakt
g'ElrEl
2
t' EpciVt
t'EpciFit
gFupEl
t'EpqadS.'/1
A
g'a'opskan
ge' alpVeltk
3
guaint
gua'nt
gutlF"
gulV1
go a/ltsk*an
galtska-a-,Intk gulVont
4
tqalpq
tqalpq
tq'npq
tcialpqdail
tqZ/apsk'an
tclilpqsk
5
kctonc
kct7Cnc
kctcinc
kcEnecSY1
k' Et3/Ents ka an kctVonsk
6
k' alt
7
t'EpeS/lt
8
guandMt yuktVlt
9
kctErria`/c kctEmVc kctEmVc kctEmacV1
kctEmVetskan kctEmIck
10
gy'ap
kcpe
11
gy-5,k(
12
t'Epqa't
k'aldV1
t'EpqVlt t'Epq'alit t'Epqaldt./1
gy'ap
yuktVit
k(pgfel
yuktread.11
k(a,1
k441 tE t'Epqadlil
'gloltskan
tqalpqaloInt
kctZinsiloint
k 'aA ltk
k"'S*1dElo'nt
t'Eepq'altskan
t'Ep4./ltk
t'Ep41dEloi nt
7krtlaEdskan
yuktntk
yukt1,1dElo'nt
gy'apsk
kctEmasilo nt
kcp7o/nt
The Boas Chart of Cardinal Numbers continued.
No.
Counting
Flat
Round
Objects Objects Men
20
kyecreel
kyedV1
30
gulgIwulgyap
trEpqadVlgyitk.
tqalpqwulg ya/p
gullEgyitk
40
_
--
200
kce6ncwulgyap
kcEnEcV1
kcpal
300
kCp'al tE kcEnEcn
--
400
kyedV1
500
kyEd.'1 tE kcEnEcal
600
gulnEgyitk
700
gulia?lEgyitk tE kcEnEcM
tqalpqtVlEgyitk
tqalpqtVlEgyitic tE kcEnEcV1
50
100
800
900
1000
Ic(p'al
-
-
--
Long
Objects
Canoes Measures
146
Wissen eures Vaters = one [[King James: of them shall]] not fall on
the ground without the knowledge of your Father [[King James: without your Father]].
Note: gTak is questionable in the following example°
Matt. 12:11 nalth giada shpaz,a shim, gir za grala da matit ga
dit... = welcher Mensch ist unter euch, welcher ein Schaf hat... =
What man is [[King James: shall there be]] among you, that [[King
Jame s: shall have]] has one sheep....
b) gel (in Boas: g'ElrE1) is used whenever the number
refers to words like grain of mustard seed, land, hour, hut, day,
city, pound, and pearl which are all looked upon as round (with hour
one would probably have to think of the round shape of the clock ).
Examples:
Luke 5:12 ada wil wilt ga, ltha- dh7t gish ga girelt gazulzap ga
= und es begab sich, da er in einer Stadt war = And it came to pass,
since he was in a city [[King James° in a certain city]].
Luke 5:17 ada wil welt ga grielt ga sha gish ga... = und es
begab sich auf einen Tag... = And it came to pass on a day [[King
James: on a certain day]].
c) gaul (in Boas: kl1) is used whenever it refers to
human beings;
Examples:
Mark 5:22 adazoiduksh ga gault ga t'in algiaLushk ga
synagogue ga = und es kam Einer der Obersten der Schule = And...
there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue.
Mark 10:37 ginamlth "6: gum dum wanum, gaul nakshimyaZint,
ada gaul nakmedakTaiint = gieb uns, dass wir sitzen, Einer zur
Rechten, und Einer zur Linken = Grant unto us that we may sit, one
on thy right hand, and one on they left hand.
d) gam 'met (Boas: k'amVet) is used for canoes.
guma, instead of .g.arn'rngt, is also found. John 6:22
147
Luke 5:3 ada wil mok gut gish ga
ga agwikshau ga =
und er trat in ein Schiff = And he entered into one of the ships,
John 6:22 [[Ltha gazrep ga adat nrsht ga wilhelgiat ga makshk
gut gish ga nha daush da gish ga lakaksh ga wha gik gTaush
ga agwikshau gut, amuksha nigh ga wil shrntk gish ga disciples gut ga
ada althga di mok gish Jesus ash ga disciples gut gish ga zum
agwikshau ga, amuksha laga'unshk gaga disciples gut ga z.adoulthit
ga = Des andern Tages sah das Volk, das diesseit des Meers stund,
dass kein ander Schiff daselbst war denn das einige, darein seine
Janger getreten waren, und dass Jesus nicht mit seinen Angern in das
Schiff getreten war, sondern allein seine ,J-nger waren weggefahren =
The day following, when the people which stood on the other sea saw
that there was none other boat there, save that one whereinto his
disciples were entered, and that Jesus went not with his disciples
into the boat, but that his disciples were gone away alone. ]]
Numeral Two
# 212. For this [[numeral two]] is found dupkT. (class 2, Boas:
t'Epcalt), ecilbel (class 3, B.: gOlupE1), dupkad-O-1 (class 4, B.:
t'EpquadS.'1), g.aubsh.g.un, also written zauupshg_un (class 5, B.:
g'S.'opsk'an), and .zulbeltk (class 6, B.: ealpe'eltk). [[corrections
according to the Boas chart:
class 2: t'Epcia-/t
class 3: go/upEl
class 4: tlEpqadV1
class 5: gtavopsk'an
class 6: ealp-e/eltk
Examples:
a) dupk3 (in front of flat objects and animals):
Luke 2:24 dupkg.t ga doves ga, ligi duplCa: da klthgtrum pigeons
ga = ein Paar Turteltauben oder zwei junge Tauben = A pair of
148
turtledoves, or two young pidgeons.
Mark 6:38 dupka daluwalum zumakshit = zwei Fische = two
Fishes.
Matt. 10:10 ...ligi duple -itlth g7daz =
noch zwei ROcke = nor
two coats.
b) g7bel (in front of flat objects and animals):
Mark 8:19 kapil da
zwolf (KOrbe) = Twelve
[[baskets]].
Mark 14:1 ltha zoucrish ga gVbelt ga sha ga = nach zwei Tagen
= After two days.
Mark 5:13 ada shazait gO"bel shinith wil thousand = and zusammen waren sie (Sgue) bei 2000* = they [[swine]] were about 2000.
c) dupkac13-1 (in front of human beings).
Luke 24:4 gwun makshk gish ga dupkadO-lt ga giat gish ga
ga... = da traten herzu zwei (Menschen)M;!nner... = then two
[[human beings]] men went near [[King James: two men stood by
them]].
Luke 18:10 dupkad771 ga yiTta ga... = zwei
= Two
men....
d) ggubsh.g.un, also gauupshz.un (in front of long objects;
the numerals here have the suffix shs_un = tree)
Luke 22:38 MIV5.-n, nT, zaubshg_un.g.awaiam d7uzk ga gwa = Herr,
siehe, hier sind zwei Schwerter = Lord, behold, here are two swords.
Matt. 18:8 ... ya.gai aina ltha dum wila.g.auupsh.g_unza'anont ligi
g,auupshg_un gashashTunt...
...denn das du zwei 1-1Znde oder zwei
habest... = rather than having two hands or two feet.
e) .gulbeItk (in front of ships):
Not the animals, but the thousands are counted.
149
Luke 5:2 ada nTsh ga....gulbFltk gut ga agwr.g.akshau gish ga
awash ga lakdTga = und er sah zwei Schiffe am See... = and he saw
[[King James: and saw]] two ships on the lake [[King James: standinv
by the lake]].
Numeral Three
# 213.
a) gwan (B. : gld..nt) [[correction: guarit]] is used in
absolute position:
John 21:11 [[Ada wil mok gish Simon Peter ga, adat wil am
shegish ga at gish ga gilhoulT ga, holtk go gish ga likle-kshum lirwalum
zum aksh ga, gel ga wil gwishtinshault ga da qwisht3-nsha wil giap da
gwan ga: ada z75ga, adas.up althga b-e'aksh ga at ga.
= Simon Petrus stieg hinein, und zog das Netz auf das Land voll
grosser Fishche, hundertunddreiundfiinfzig. Und wiewohl ihrer so
viel waren, zerriss doch das Netz nicht = Simon Peter went up, and
drew the net to land full of great fishes, an hundred and fifty and
three: and for all there were so many, yet was not the net broken.
b) gwilT (B.: gutrei) is used for divisions of time and for
round objects like the following examples will show:
Mark 9:5 shirunza dup zipzaplth gwilr dalth guba hriwalp = lasst
uns drei Hirtten bauen = let us build [[King James: make]] three
tabernacles.
Mark 15:29 adat in gik haiin dida gwi1T da shat = und bauest ihn
in drei Tagen wieder auf = Ah, thou that destroyest the temple, and
buildest it in three days.
In addition to these regular [[terms which]] agree with the terms
on Mr. Boas's chart, another term "gwun'' is found in a few places.
Phonetically [[gwun]] is probably united with gua/nt but in use it
seems to be identical with gwilt. The situations in question are:
150
Matt 12:40 awil nTw7lt ga na wa.-.1sh Jonah gish ga n'da liTgwunsh7
dit ga ada gwiiTsh ga hotel gish ga zum bansh ga. , = denn wie Jonas
drei Tage and drei Nqchte war im Bauch... = For as Jonas was three
days and three nights in the [[King James: whale's]] belly.
Mark 8:2 awil ltha gwun sha dalth hakhokshk ga da goi = denn
sie sind drei Tage bei mir geblieben = for they have now remained
[[King James: have now been]] with me three days.
Numeral Four
# 214. Only tkalpk (B. : tq7.1pq) is found:
John 4:35 giamgia tkalpka giamga = es sind noch vier Monate
= There are yet four months.
John 11:17
ltha al tk-a-.1pk sha dash ga da lirshgtrut gish ga
zum... = schon vier Tage hatte er gelegen im... = he had lain in the
grave four days already.
Numeral Five
# 215. gwishtinshaul, also written qushtinshaul, (B.:
kctZinc: class 3) are found:
kcEnEcV1: class 4) and gwisht-c7nsh
Luke 16:28 awil gwishtinshaul waikiak g7.t = denn ich habe noch
ft!Inf Brikler = For I have five brethren yet.
Mark 6:38 gwishtFinshit [[ ]] arif (Brode) = Five [[loaves]].
Numeral Six
third class) [[correction: k"Lt]] which are both used in the same way and are also
# 216. I find only,g.ul and .g.aul (B.:
ea1/4,1t
probably the same word:
John 12:1 ash ga ltha gimgia .g.ulsha dash ga dum Passover ga =es waren noch 6 Tage vor den Ostern = it was six days before Easter
[[King James: then Jesus six days before the passover]].
Luke 24:13 zault ga wil giapsh ga furlongs ga shzanakt gish ga
Jerusalem ga = sechzig Meilen weft entfernt von Jerusalem = sixty
miles distance from Jerusalem [[King James: which was from
151
Jerusalem about threescore furlongs]].
Numeral Seven
# 217.
dupkaul (B.: t'Ep4.11t: third class) and dupkuldaul
(B. : t'EpqaldV1: fourth class).
a) dupkaul:
Mark 8:5 ada houit ga, Dupkaul dit = und sie sprachen: sieben
(Brode) = And they said, Seven [[loaves]].
Mark 8:6 adat doksh ga dupkaul dit ga anai ga = und er nahm
die sieben Brode = and he took the seven loaves.
Luke 2:36 ada am dupkaulsh gazaulth ga n'dh-a't gish ga naksht
= und sie hatte sieben Jahre gelebt mit ihrem Manne = and had lived
with a husband seven years [[King James, from her virginity]].
b) dupkuldauL
Mark 12:20 dupkuldaul ga na nawaikiat ga sieben Brader sind
gewesen = have been seven brothers [[King James Now there were
seven brethren]].
Numeral Eight
# 218. yincla (B.: yuktVIt: third class) and yill.d.tha occur
equally in use [[and are]] probably only different [[in]] style (compare
.g.ul and Laul # 216):
Luke 1:59 ltha yala a sh7., dit ga = nach acht Tagen = after
eight days [[King James: that on the eighth day]].
Luke 2:21 ada ltha rdhoigiaksh ga yukla a sh7dit = und als acht
Tage vergangen waren = And when eight days were accomplished.
(yrikltha-a-dual, fourth class, will be mentioned under
numeral "eighteen").
Numeral Nine
# 219. kshtamaush (B.: kctEmVc: third class) and
kshtamashaul (B.: kctEmacS/1: fourth class).
a) kshtamaush:
152
Mark 15:34 ada ltha kshtamaushit ga hour ga = und UM die
neunte Stunde = And at the ninth hour.
b) kshtamashauL
Luke 17:17 n'cla da g 1.7 kshtamashaul dit? = wo sind die Neune?
(neun
= where are the nine ? [[nine men]].
Numeral Ten
# 220. Only kapT1 (B.: kcp7'el: third class) and kapaul
([[B.:]] k(pS.1: fourth class) are found.
a) kapil:
Luke 19:24 ada ma ginam dish niat gif wil didau kapil da
poundsit = und gebet es dem, der zehn Pfund hat = and give it to him
that hath ten pounds.
Luke 19:17 am shimoigiadun da kapil da_gulzipzabut = du sollst
Herr sein Ner zehn Stgdte = You shall be master over ten cities
[[King James: have thou authority over ten cities]].
b) kapaul:
Only in (following) compounds.
Numeral Eleven
# 221. kapaul da* gaul (B.: 1c4p'Al tE k'Vl: fourth class):
Luke 24:9 adat malthash ga tkrnTsh ga gau gish ga kapault ga da
gaul = und sie verkilndeten alle Dinge den Elfen = and told all these
things unto the eleven.
Matt. 18:16 [[wrong verse citation]]
Numeral Twelve
# 222. kapil da eVbel [g7pel] (third class) and kapaul da
dupkad71 (B. : k4A1 tE t'EpqadVle fourth class):
a) kapil da gi7bel (g7pel):
(kapaul) "da" (gaul) compare # 50 = (ten) "with present" (one).
153
Luke 8:42 ltha kapil da gO'belt shinith kgaulth gut = sie war
zwolf Jahre alt = she was twelve years old [[King James: For he had
one only daughter, about twelve years of age]].
Luke 2:42 ada ltha kaprlsh ga kgaulthk gut ga da g73'bel = und als
er zwolf Jahr alt war = And when he was twelve years old.
b) kapaul da dupkadi5L
John 6:67 ada hough Jesus gish ga kapault ga da dupkadc71 = da
sprach Jesus zu den ZwOlfen = Then said Jesus unto the twelve.
John 6:70 nha ligi wha kshaniazili gut nrishim kapaul da dupkadal = habe ich euch Zwglfe nicht erwghlt? = Have not I chosen you
twelve.
John 6:71 gault gish ga kapault ga da dupkad7lt = es war Einer
von den ZwOlfen = it was one of the twelve [[King James: being one of
the twelve]].
# 223. The terms for higher numbers, as my [[biblical]] texts
present them to me, now follow one after the other
a) 14:
Matt. 1:17 nrnr.g.un tk7niwil shishaw7nt ga giat w-Itk ga dish
Abraham awash David shgait kapTi da tka"lpka wilshilw7ntk ga giat =
daher sind alle Geschlechter von Abraham bis auf David zusammen
vierzehn Geschlechter = From there are all the generations from
Abraham to David together fourteen generations [[King James: So all
the generations from Abraham to David are fourteen generations]].
b) 18: kapaul da yirkltha-a-dual (B. 1(41A,l tE
yuktle.ae.41, fourth class):
Luke 13:4 [[DTith n'ThIsh da kapaul da yaltha-a-daulda na wil
rigainash da giepshum wa-lbum Siloam, adat lriga.g.un da, haligas.aud
shim alth z,,ahrikake-shk ga dalth, tk-gnilth zoga dash ga Jerusalem gaai.
= Oder meinet ihr, dass die achtzehn, auf welche der Turm in Siloah
fiel: und erschlug sie, seien schuldig gewesen vor alien Menschen,
154
die zu Jerusalem wohnen. = Or those eighteen, upon whom the tower
in Siloam fell, and slew them, think ye that they were sinners above
all men that dwelt in Jerusalem. ]]
c) 30: gwilT wil giap (B.: gule"'Wulgyap):
Matt. 13:8 ...nag..az-gou da gwili wit giapa tkuliy7dit =
etliches dreissigftltig = some thirtyfold.
Matt. 27:3 adat hazukshum dagutgoiduksh ga gwitit ga wil giapsh
.gabTem data ga... = and er brachte wieder die dreissig Silberlinge...
= he... brought again the thirty pieces of silver.
d) 38:
John 5:5 gif ga ltha gwilTsh ga wil giapsh ga gaulth ga da
yrikdFlt* ga... = welcher achtunddreissig Jahre... = which [[King
James: had an infirmity]] thirty and eight years...
e) 40: tkalpk wil giep (B.: tcglpqwulgya/p):
Matt. 4:2 ada lthat tkalpksh ga wil giepsh ga sha ga, &nth
tkalpk ga wil giepsh ga "Stk ga ga raltht ga, ada wil qudTit ga = and als
er vierzig Tage und vierzig Ngchte gefastet hatte, da hungerte ihn
= And when he had fasted forty days and forty nights, he was afterward an hungred.
Mark 1:13 ada ninrsh ga wil dhat ga gilhoulT gish ga tkalpkut ga
wil giapsh ga sha ga = und er war daselbst in der Wilste vierzig Tage
= And he was there in the wilderness forty days.
f)
46: tk-5.1pk wil giap da glut
John 2:20 UNThTsh gasunhoush ga Jews ga, TO:lpka wil giap da
gaul da gaulthat zaba temple gwa, ada al ma dum hai'in dalth gwilT.'
dalth sha hi? = Da sprachen die Juden: Dieser Tempel ist in
sechsundvierzig Jahren erbauet; und du willst ihn in dreien Tagen
yrikalt (B. : yuktV1t: fourth class) [[see No. 8, Class IV, on
the Boas chart of cardinal numbers]] is perhaps to be united with
yrikla (# 218).
155
aufrichten? = Then said the Jews, Forty and six years was this temple
in building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days ?]]
g) 50:
gukshtiTnish wil giap
kctO'newulgy p)
Mark 6:40 [[Ada ama kba hrikwant ga, na gaga-el ga wil
qushtinshaul ga, drth na guksht7nish ga wil gipgiapt ga. = Und sie
sezten sich nach Schichten, je hundert und hundert, funfzig und
ftInfzig. = And they sat down in ranks, by hundreds, and by fifties. ]]
John 8:57 hawalthk ga gwishtinishilth wil giaplth kgaulthk
shin... = du bist noch nicht fitnfzig Jahre alt... = Thou art not yet
fifty years old...
h) 60: gaul wil giap:
Matt. 13:8 na.gaz-a7ou da gaul da wil giapa tkuliy7 dit = etliches
sechzigaltig = some sixtyfold.
70: dupkaul wil giap, third class:
Luke 10:1 [[Wai, na tkul7n gwa ada wilt lip gan'dalthilt ga
dupkaul dit ga wil giapsh ga nagazl'out ga, adat nada dupkadnum hashhaizt gish gagaukt gish ga tk-gnish ga gulzipzap ga drlth n"da ga, gup
ligi n'da ga dum wil lip goiduksht ga. = Danach sonderte der Herr
andre siebenzig aus, und sandte sie je zween und zween vor ihm her
in alle Stnte und Orte, da er wollte hinkommen; = After these things
the Lord appointed over seventy also, and sent them two and two
before his face into every city and place, whither he himself would
i)
come. ]]
k) 84:
yrikdal wil giap da tk-glpk.
Luke 2:37 ada ltha yadal da wil giap da tkIlpk da shinith
ga.ulthilth da zinshzakt = und (es war da) eine vier und achtzig Jahre
alte Wittwe = And [[it was then]] a four and eighty year old widow
[[King James: And she was a widow of about fourscore and four
years]].
1) 99: kshtamaush wil giep da kshtamaush.
156
Matt. 18012 alth dumt wha qudaksha kshtamausha da wil giep
dit da kshtamaushi... ? = wird er nicht die 99 (S chafe) verlassen... ?
= doth he not leave the ninety and nine [[sheep]]... ?
Luke 1504 [[N'dalth giada gwashim, za wil hifwanith gwishtinshaul dalth matt ada za gwrtk gulth granga dit, alth dumt wha
qudakshalth kshtamaush a dalth wil giap da kshtamaush a libaLait
gilhoulit, ada zat gwilth ygka nha gwak ga dit, wagait dumt wil wr
dit? = Welcher Mensch ist unter euch, der hundert Schafe hat, und so
er der eines verlieret, der nicht lasse die neunundneunzig in der
/I
Wuste und hingehe nach dem verlornen, bis dass er's Linde? = What
man of you, having an hundred sheep, if he lose one of them, doth not
leave the ninety and nine in the wilderness, and go after that which is
lost, until he find it. ]]
m) 100: qushtinshaul (compare numeral five # 215):
Matt. 18g12 [[INda,gagaid shimt ? Zida girelth wil qushtinshaulth matika gaul da gTadit, ada za libazait ba gT.5ga dit, alth dumt
wha qudaksha kshtamausha da wil giep dit da kshtamausht ada dumt
gdau shpag.ait sliz.unTsh dit, a dumt gwilthgagifela libaLait 137 dit ? =
Was dtinket euch? Wenn irgendein Mensch hundert Schafe hatte, und
Eins unter denselbigen sich verrirteo las st er nicht die neunundneunzig auf den Bergen, gehet hin, und suchet das verirrete ? = How
think ye? if a man have an hundred sheep, and one of them be gone
astray, doth he not leave the ninety and nine, and goeth into the
mountains, and seeketh that which is gone astray?]]
Matt. 13g8 [[Ada al nagazaou da qualthgl dada
y7but,
adat da,gpiduksha na gian dit, nagazaou da qushtinshaul wil tkuliygdit.
nag.azaou da gaul da wil giapa tkuliyr dit, nagazaou da gwilT wil giapa
tkuliyr dit. = Etliches fiel auf ein gut Land, und trug Frucht, etliches
hundertaltig, etliches sechzigrAltig, etliches dreizigfg.ltig. = But
others fell into good ground, and brought forth fruit, some an
157
hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold. ]]
Mark 6:40 [[see Mark 6 :40 under g) 50]]
The form gwishtinshaul occurs:
Luke 15:4 [[see Luke 15:4 under 1) 99]]
[[as well as the stylistic]] qwishtinshaul:
John 21:8 [[Ada wil.gutig,oiduksh ga shila disciplest gish ga
lthgwa zum agwThshau ga awil althga Trkshnakt dish ga gilhouli ga, ligi
gO"bel shinith wil qwishtinshaulth cubitsilth sh.g.anakt, ash gut zogum
gguklthsh ga at ga holtk gut gish ga lriwalum zum aksh ga. = Die
andern JUnger aber kamen auf dem Schiffe, (denn sie waren nicht
ferne vom Lande, sondern bei zweihundert Ellen, ) und zogen das Netz
mit dem Fischen. = And the other disciples came in a little ship; (for
they were not far from land, but as it were two hundred cubits, )
dragging the net with fishes. ]]
n) 153: gel wil qwishtinshaul da qwishtMasha wil giap da
gwan (absolute):
John 21:11 [[Ada wil mok gish Simon Peter ga, adat wil am
shegish ga at gish ga gilhoulr ga, holtk ga gish ga lik1Fkshum liTwalum
zum aksh ga, griel ga wil qwishtinshault ga da qwishtan.sha wil giap da
gwan ga: ada zo shimgul wThe'lt ga, ada gup althga be-aksh ga at ga. =
Simon Petrus steig hinein, und zog das Netz auf das Land voll grosser
Fische hundertunddreiundflifzig. Und wiewohl ihrer so viel waren,
zerriss dach das Netz nicht. = Simon Peter went up, and drew the net
to land full of great fishes, an hundred and fifty and three: and for all
there were so many, yet was not the net broken. ]]
o) 200:
g7;'bel wil qushtin.shaul:
Mark 6:37 dumgadoultha-numT ada dup dum gTklth gr'bel dalth
wil qushtinshaulth bidilth shgadauklth gulth wune-ya... ? = sollen wir
denn hingehen und zweihundert Pfennig werth Brod kaufen.... ? = Shall
we go and buy two hundred pennyworth of bread... ?
158
John 21:8
eirbel shinith wil qwishtinshaulth cubitsilth
shzanakt = ...etwa zweihundert Ellen entfernt = about two hundred
cubits distance [[King James: as it were two hundred cubits]].
p) 300: gwilida wil kshtinshaul (B. k(A tE
kcEnEcg..11):
John 12:5 gaulth nazun wha w"a",/atk ga diya giT...gouruziga alth
gwilTdalth wil qushtinshaulth bit... ? = weshalb ist diese Salbe nicht
verkauft ftir dreihundert Groschen... ? = Why was not this ointment
sold for three hundred pence... ?
Likewise Mark 14:15 [{Awl' n'dum as wallatk ga dit, nrclumt gist
ga gwilTda wil kshtinshaul bidit na dum dal dit. ada nrdum ginamtk ga
dida gagw7a dit. Ada diTala alalgiakshit gish niat. = Man kOnnte das
Wasser um mehr denn dreihundert Groschen verkauft haben, und
dasselbe den Armen geben- Und murreten Mper sie. = for it might
have been sold for more than three hundred pence, and have been
given to the poor. And they murmered against her. ]]
q) 500: gwisheeinsh wil qushtinshaul.
Luke 7:41 gaul ga gwisht7nshit ga wil qushtinshaulsh ga bit ga
e'shk gut ga = der Eine war flifhundert Groschen schuldig = the one
owed five hundred pence.
r) 4000, 5000, 10, 000, and 20, 000 were always formed
with [[the English word]] thousand in my [[biblical]] texts.
4000: Mark 8:9 [[Tk-ilpk ga wil thousands ga shgabot ga:
adat wil hashhaizt ga. = Und ihrer waren bei viertausend, die da
gegessen hatten; und er liess sie von sich. = And they that had eaten
were about four thousand: and he sent them away]].
5000: Mark 6:44 [[Ada shgab7sh ga hq trin gapsh ga anal
ga gwishtZinsha wil thousanda yOtat. = Und die da gegessen hatten, der
waren fanftausend Mann. = And they that did eat of the loaves were
about five thousand men. ]]
159
John 6:10 [[Ada housh Jesus ga, Wanda giadit. Ada al zirsh ga
kTauk gish ga wil wilt ga. Ada wil wansh ga giat ga, gwisht3nsha
shinith wil thousandlth shgabZ5it. = Jesus aber sprach: Schaffet, dass
sich das Volk lagere. Es war aber viel Gras an dem Ort. Da
lagerten sich bei firnftausend Mann. = And Jesus said, Make the men
sit down. Now there was much grass in the place. So the men sat
down, in number about five thousand. ]]
Matt. 14:21 ada shLabOsh ga na tkauk gut ga gwisht7nsha wil
thousands ga y3ta ga = und es hatten gegessen fdnftausend Manner =
and five thousand men had eaten [[King James And they that had
eaten were about five thousand men]].
10, 000 and 20, 000: [[Ligi n'clalth wilsh king, za dumt in
baklth shila kingt alth wildogiatk, za wha gha kshLaugum dhIt ada za
shagaudgut a za liki dumt da°57k1thk gut dTlth na kapTlum thousandk gut
alth dumt lrid7.1sh ga dum goidukshit gish ga dumt in bakt ga shikshtolt
ga g3tbel ga wil giapsh ga thousands ga ? = Oder welcher Kgnig will
sich begeben in einen Streit wider einen andern Kgnig, und sisst nicht
zuvor, und ratschlaget, ob er kgnne mit zehntausend begegnen dem,
der ilber ihn kommt mit zwanzigtausend? = Or what king, going to
make war against another king, sitteth not down first, and consulteth
whether he be able with ten thousand to meet him that cometh against
him with twenty thousand?]]
Note: Here one should have expected gwishtinshaul; the
thousands alone, not the men, are being counted!
# 224. The inspection of the experimental data at hand furnisher:
no sure clue to the basis of the number system. The relation in whit:
the naming of six, seven, [[and]] eight is to the naming of two, three,
[[and]] four pointedly brings to mind an original quinary system. But
then contrary to [[that system]] is [[the fact that]] the name for nine
agrees not with four, but with five. The tens are formed throughout
160
according to the decimal system. We find a trace of the vegesimal
system with forty [[and]], more frequently yet, with the hundreds.
With the latter, [[the hundreds]], we find a continuous association of
the even hundreds in such a way that the uneven hundreds are
expressed by the addition of a hundred to the nearest preceding even
hundred number.
B. The Ordinal Numbers
[[See the 1889 Boas Report, 13. 881, for the following information and chart on the ordinal numbers, # 225; for the information on
the numeral adverbs, # 227; and for the information on the distributive
numerals, # 228. The verse examples and the comments in # 225 and
# 228 in reference to the Gospel translations forms are Schulenburg's
contributions to this material borrowed from Boas. Schulenburg presents the borrowed material in German, not in the English of the
Boas Report. ]]
# 225. ''The first" has two forms. One [[form is]] for animate
objects; the other for inanimate [[objects]]. The following ordinal
numbers are formed by means of naanhia [[correction: naanhiV]]
(= "the next to") and the preceding cardinal number. In the Gospel
translations [[the form is]] na'aniy7, written na'any7. The "second"
[[which]] = next to the first (not "to one") forms the only exception to
this [[rule]]. Further, the t which is attached to the end of the
cardinal numbers is probably nothing other than that euphonic terminal
t (# 8).
With reference to:
animate objects
the first: kskaoq [[correctiow ksIce/oq]]
the second: naanhia kskaoq [[correction: naanhiI/ kskiVoq]]
161
inanimate objects
the first: kstscfq* [[correction: kstso/q]]
the second: naanhia kstsoq [[correction: naanhia/kstso/q]]
the third (Boas):
Counting: naanhia: t'EpqrdEt
/
Flat Objects: naanhia tEpqadEt
/
/
Round Objects: naanhia goupElt
Men: naanhia t'Epqaddlt
Long Objects: naanhia gaopsk'anget
Canoes: naanhia galpe-eltk
Measures: naanhia gulbElt
[[chart corrections according to the Boas ordinal number chart
for the "third": naanhiT/in every class precedes
tlEpq-a-/dEt
under
Counting,
go UpElt
Flat Objects,
Round Objects,
t'EpqadVlt
Men,
gaopskanget
galp7/eltk
Long Objects,
Canoes,
t'Epq-a7/dEt
I1
gu/lbElt
Measures.]]
# 226. Whenever [[it]] is evident from the sense of the sentence
II
that "the second... " (or the "third") is intended, only na'aniya [[from
kshg.auk (B.: kskaoq) [[correction: ksk*Aa /oq]] and kshzok
(kstsq) [[correction: ksto/q]] are found in the Gospel translations.
The first [[is found]] very frequently; the latter only [[in]] John 19:32
[[Ada lth zutgoiduksha soldiers ga, adat guna-nzunsh gazashishish ga
kshzogut ga, ada gik wirgoqush ga nishtagaulshk ga n't shila iTyezit
gish ga lak .g.uz-gk ga. = Da kamen die Kriegsknechte, und brachen
dem ersten die Beine, und dem andern, der mit ihm gekreuziget
war. = Then came the soldiers, and brake the legs of the first, and
of the other which was crucified with him. ]]
162
the Gospel translations]] (without the subsequent numeral term) is
used.
Mark 12:30,31 ...einr kshzaug.a da yaoulthemg.ushgut.
Nataniy7 da gwa = ...dies ist das erste Gebot. Das zweite ist dies.
Mark 12:30 this is the first commandment.
Mark 12:31 The second is this [[King James: And the second
is, namely this]].
Mark 12:21 adat ga7t ga na'aniy-i7t ga ada zakt ga... = und der
Zweite nahm sie und er starb = And the second took her, and died.
C. The Numeral Adverbs
# 227. The numeral adverbs are identical to the forms which
are used for the counting of round objects and time divisions (third
class).
Therefore only a few examples [[are given]] here:
Luke 17:4 ada amilth tkash dupkaulth hadak ga da gwan T. gel
da shat, ada za dupkault za hazukshum iyeltk ga da gwan = und wenn
er siebenmal sitndigen wt?rde an dir an einem Tage und siebenmal
wieder kg.me zu dir = And if he trespass against thee seven times in a
day, and seven times again come to three [[King James: and seven
times in a day turn again to thee]].
Mark 14:30 hawalthk ga za g7belth algiaklth Z7uz, ada gwilr
ma dum ksh-Snaaout = ehe der Hahn zweimal kraht, wirst du mich
dreimal verleugnet haben = before the cock crow twice, thou shalt
deny me thrice.
D. The Distributive Numerals
# 228. The distributive numerals are formed by placing
"mEtlE" in front of cardinal numbers; for example "one (round) to
each" = "mEtlE gIE'rEl. " [[correction: gtE/rEl]]
This "mEtlE" is written meltha in the Gospel translations.
163
John 2:6 [[Ada daush ga g_aul dit ga guldum akshum laup ga, di
wilalaum shikshakshinshk gish ga Jews ga, meltha g"Vbel ligi gwili
shinith guldum'oulth shga dikdauyint. = Es waren aber allda sechs
steinerne Wasserkrtlge gesetzt nach der Weise der Adischen Reinigung, und ging in je einen zwei oder drei Mass. = And there were set
there six waterpots of stone, after the manner of the purifying of the
Jews, containing two or three firkins apiece. ]]
John 19:18 [[1\linish gut wil lizagwut gish ga lak zuzak ga, ada
dupkadolsh ga shilawalt ga, meltha shta gaul gaga nashtauksht ga, ada
lrishpagait haitk gish Jesus gut. = Allda kreuzigten sie ihn, und mit
ihm zween andre zu beiden Seiten, Jesum aber mitteninne. = Where
they crucified him, and two other with him, on either side one, and
Jesus in the midst. ]]
E. Indefinite and Other Numeral Terms
# 229. The definite numeral term for "one" is also used for the
indefinite "another. " In most cases, gik (# 179), in addition, is
placed in front of this one [[the indefinite numeral]].
John 19:37 ada gik hou gal da N'lthZdukshum Damishit = und
wieder spricht eine andere heilige Schrift = And again another
scripture saith.
John 14:16 ada dumt ginam gik gTiel da gung_undoulthumgauda da
gwashim = und er wird euch geben einen anderen Trost = he shall
give you another Comforter.
Note: In many cases the compound word lukshgiat (= another
human being, a stranger) is also used:
John 21:18
ada lukshgiada dumt in bilant.
= ...und ein
Anderer wird dich erten...
= and another shall gird thee....
ada dumt ginamsh ga shindointk ga gish ga
lukshgigiat ga = ...und er wird geben seinen Garten an Andere = and
he will give his garden to another [[King James: he shall give the
vineyard to others]].
Luke 20:16
164
# 230. nag.azaou = several, some, a few, others:
Mark 12:13 ada wilt hashhaiz ga nagazaoush ga Pharisees dTlth
Herodians gish nrat = und sie entsandten Einige der Pharisg.er und
Herodianer zu ihm = and they sent a few of the Pharisees and
Herodians unto him [[King James: and they send unto him certain of
the Pharisees and of the 1-1-r3/-di-lii.ns]].
Mark 12:5 nag_az-a-out ga wakwunezagut ga, ada nazaz--out ga
yezit ga = Etliche stgupten sie und Etliche tOdteten sie = beating some,
and killing some.
# 231. ab7-) = few, a few:
Mark 6:5 ...amukshat lTdaush ga zalanont gish ga ab-5t ga
shipshrepgum giat ga =
ausgenommen er legte wenigen Kranken
seine lignde auf = save that he laid his hands upon a few sick folk.
Luke 13:23 alp-Ore-11th dilamautkshit ? = werden Wenige selig
werden? = are there few that he saved?
# 232.
z-6-shk = little, slight [[unimportant]]:
Luke 7:28 althga hokshk gulth.g.awTre-ksha dash John a shpa.gait
tkb-..nT kshaqulthal dida han-Inag_ut: ada g.up zawile-ksha z-c-) z-cishk ga da
dash ga na kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga LakTga ash nTat = nicht gibt
es einen GrOsseren unter alliden von Weibern Geborenen als
Johannes; doch wenn er auch noch so gering 1st im Reiche Gottes, so
ist dieser grOsser als er = Among those that are born of women there
is not a greater prophet than John [[King James: the Baptist]]; but he
that is least in the kingdom of God is greater than he.
Luke 7:17 ada alt na z7S-shk ga da nat shalthT1 da dit, nTnT zFshk
ga da drshrebunshk ga dit = und welchem aber wenig vergeben wird,
der liebt wenig = but to whom little is forgiven, the same loveth little.
# 233. hel = many, wThe-1 = a great many (compare # 171):
Matt. 22:14 awil hnda hilkhriitksha dit, ada amlb7) kshanaknTshk ga dit dum = Viele sind berufen, doch sind nur Wenige
165
auserwUhlt [[King James: For]] many are called, yet [[King James:
but]] few are chosen.
John 7:31 ada heft gish ga giat ga shimhoudikshit gish nrat =
and viele Menschen glaubten an ihn = And many of the people believed
in [[King James: on]] him.
Luke 7:47 ltha shalthiltht ga na hadak ga dit, gu wTh71 da dit =
die SUnden sind ihr vergeben, welche sehr viele waren = the sins are
forgiven you, which are a great many [[King James: Her sins, which
are many, are forgiven]].
# 234.
zu = much (contrary to z3-shk # 232):
Luke 7:47 -gwil zu shrebunshk ga dit = denn viel hat sie geliebt
= for much has she loved [[King James: for she loved much]].
Luke 21:3 yagaig.azil. ladalth da gw7um zinsh zagum hanas,p.
gwaya tkFnidit = doch mehr legte hinein diese arme Wittwe als sie
Al le = this poor widow cast [[King James: hath cast]] in more than
they all.
# 235. tkTnT = each, every; all:
Matt. 7:17 nrw-5,1 tk7.ni" a-ma zun t'in da,g,piduksha 7,ma malt... =
also bringt ein jeglicher guter Baum gute Frucht... = Even so every
good tree bringeth forth good fruit.
John 3:26 tka-nTgiada zut_gpiduksha dash /fiat = alle Menschen
kommen zu ihm = all men come to him.
# 236. Lou'uzg.un = only, single, sole:
Matt. 5:36 awil lthguksh ga ma dum shamaukshk ligi dr>uzk ga
zpuluzgun da nagoushint = denn du vermagst nicht ein einziges Haar
von dir weiss oder schwarz zu machen = for you cannot make a single
hair of you white or black [[King James: one hair white or black]].
John 19:36 althga dum bilotk gulthsou'uzzun dalth na shaipt =
ihr sollt ihm kein einziges Bein zerbrechen = you shall break no
single bone of him [[King James: A bone of him shall not be broken]].
166
mila = both with one another, both together; also in the
case whenever both parts themselves are composed of multiple parts:;
Luke 1:6 ada mila hakhoigiakt gish ga zalsh ga Shimoigiat ga
Lakr.ga = sie waren alle beide fromm vor Gott = they were both
righteous before God.
Luke 7:42 ada ltha althga daulth dum luklibalshit, ada wil mila
g.umg.aud gish dupnTat = und da sie nicht hatten zu bezahlen, schenkte
er es ihnen beiden = and since [[King James: when]] they had nothing
to pay, he forgave it to them both [[King James: he frankly forgave
# 237.
them both]].
# 238. tka = entire, total, complete, whole, all; an adverbial
term for the sum of all, the totality (compare tkani # 235):
John 20:12 adat nTsh ga wil wansh ga dupkad7lt ga angels ga
mukshmaukshk gut ga = und sie sieht sitzen zwei Engel in ganz weisser
Kleidern = And she sees two angels sitting in completely white clothes
[[King James: And seeth two angels in white sitting]].
Luke 11:34
ada tka holtksha tkamau'un da
, ada
tka stizgutksha tkamau'unt = (wenn dein Auge einfgltig geworden ist),
dann ist dein Leib ganz voll von Licht... , dann ist ganz finster dein
Leib =[[when thine eye has become innocent]] then is thy body completely full of light... then is thy body completely dark [[King
James: when thine eye is single, thy whole body also is full of light;
but when thine eye is evil, thy body also is full of darkness.
# 239. If it refers to a person, the adjectival ordinal number
is, as a rule, replaced by another term: shTlgiat.
Luke 2:7 ada wilt clazoiduksh ga shTlgiadum ltheilthgum yCitat
ga = und sie gebar ihren ersten Sohn = And she brought forth her
firstborn son.
Mark 12:20 ada naksh ga shilgiat ga = und der Erste heirathete
= and the first got married [[King James: and the first took a wife]].
167
# 240. kb177 = half:
Matt. 11:27 [[wrong chapter and verse citation but translated
as follows]]: ada ma zida ltha gaga zurriFk dit, du.m wai'in kbre-um
dglat = und wenn du seinen Mund aufgethan haben wirst, wirst du
finden einen halben Dollar = and if you will have opened his mouth,
you will find a half dollar.
Mark 12:42 adat lirdalthash ga g"6"belt ga mites ga gu sha.g.ait
kbigmsh centit = und sie legte hinein zwei Scherflein, welche
zusammen einen halben Cent ausmachen = and she cast in [[King
James: threw in]] two mites which together make a half cent [[King
James: a farthing]].
168
VII.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE
# 241. In this section which examines the language from the
synthetic viewpoint, I have, in general, kept to the classification
which Georg von der Gabelentz observed in his Chinese grammar.
Yet I was determined to omit a few of the topics found there, because
the subject matter either is not represented, at least in my sources,
or is already treated in earlier places.
1. Predication of to be
# 242. The simple copula "to be" remains unexpressed or
finds sufficient expression in reciprocal relationship of subject and
predicate.
For example:
John 1:1 ada Shimoigiat ga Lak Tga Algiak = und Gott war das
Wort = and God was the word [[King James: and the Word was God]].
John 4:24 haik ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga = ein Geist ist Gott =
a spirit is God [[King James: God is a Spirit]].
2. Words for to be
# 243. hokshk designates the to be of location:
Luke 4:18 hokshk gaga na Haik gish ga MTy7n ga goi = der Geist
des Herrn ist bei mir = The Spirit of the Lord is upon me.
Luke 6:6 ada hokshk gish ga gault ga y-Onta ga = und da war ein
Mann = and there was a man.
# 244. In addition to the usual meaning "to sit, " dhg (singular)
and wan (plural) also have the [[meaning]] of "lingering, " of "tarrying, " of "abiding, " of "being in a place."
a) Examples of dill:
John 9:5 da dh"gyii da lak halizogut, adat ritTy7i nagoiba da
halizogut = weil ich in der Welt bin, bin ich das Licht der Welt =
because [[King James: as long as]] I am in the world, I am the light
of the world.
169
John 1:1 wilhTshidak gaga ada lthT, dhT.sh ga Algiak ga = im
Anfang war das Wort = In the beginning was the Word.
b) Examples of wan:
Matt. 18:20 wil n'da wil shagait wan dupkad51 dit ligi gwilaun
dit... = denn wo zusammen sind Zwei oder Drei... = For where two
or three are [[King James: gathered]] together.
Matt. 17:22 ada ashi want gish ga Galilee ga, ada housh Jesus
gish dupnTat... = und als sie in Gall lga waren, da sprach Jesus zu
ihnen... = And while they were [[King James: abode]] in Galilee,
Jesus said unto them....
# 245. wal (plural of hilwal) means "to do" and is also very
frequently used where the usual "to be" suffices:
John 21:2 shagait wal ga dup Simon Peter ga dish Thomas
ga... = es waren bei einander Simon Petrus und Thomas = There
were together Simon Peter and Thomas.
John 14:11 ada di walsh ga Nagwa't ga goi = und auch der Vater
ist in mir = and also the Father is in me [[King James: Believe me
that I am in the Father, and the Father in me]].
# 246. leitk [[plural: amy-i]], come [[German past participle
form]], is used in many places in the meaning "to come from, " "to
come from something to this place, H "to be from somewhere. "
For example:
John 9:16 althga wItk ga yZita gwai ash ga Shimoigiat ga
Laka-ga = nicht ist dieser Mensch von Gott = This man is not from
God [[King James: of God]].
John 7:27 al wilaiyum wil watk ga y7ta gwa = aber wir wissen,
woher dieser Mann ist (das Hergekommensein dieses) = Howbeit we
know this man whence he is.
# 247. The sense of the plural form amya [[# 246]] is likewise
[[the "to bell]: from something [[or somewhere]]. Since, however,
170
ample reference to this [[has]] previously [[been]] made, I believe it
sufficient here to only refer to those places---# 12, b; # 34; # 200;
and # 201.
3. to become, to have
# 248. In addition to other meanings (compare # 104), sha has
this one also: "to turn into something. "
John 1:14 ada sha shamet gish ga Algiak ga = und zu Fleisch
wurde das Wort = and the word became flesh [[King James: And the
Word was made flesh]].
John 2:9 ada lthat bakt ga mTyTnsh ga lualgiat ga aksh ga nat
sha winet ga = als aber der Speisemeister das Wasser kostete, das
zu Wein geworden = When the ruler of the feast tasted [[King James:
had tasted]] the water that became wine [[King James: that was made
wine]].
# 249.
The prefix di- frequently expresses to become" (corn-
pare # 102):
Matt. 21:15 ada lthat nTsht ga manpriests ga dilth hiikladamishit
ga...dT1th wil wTamlahoudash ga gubutginthk ga... ada shimg.ult
dishTepk gut ga = als aber die Hohenpriester und Schriftgelehrten
sahen die... und die Kinder schreien...da wurden sie entrUstet = And
when the chief priests and scribes saw the... and the children crying
... then they became irritated [[King James: And when the chief
priests and scribes saw the wonderful things that he did, and the
children crying in the temple, and saying, Hosanna to the son of
David; they sore displeased]].
# 250. sher means "to have. "
For example:
John 6:47 nTat ga gu shimhoudiksha dit shishgri whatT shabl'm
gundidalsha dish niat = der, welcher glaubet an mich, der hat das
ewige Leben = He that believeth on me hath everlasting life.
171
John 812 ya,g,ai dum shgri goibam g_undido-lsha dash xi-rat =
sondern er wird haben das Licht des Lebens = but he shall have the
light of life [[King James: he that followeth me shall not...but
shall have the light of life]].
# 251. dadau is found in a few places in the meaning "to have";
John 1615 tkaTnTgau dadauit gish ga Nagwat ga rirly nhawg1 dit
= alles, was der Vater hat, das ist mein = All things that the Father
hath are mine.
Mark 638 dumaisha anai dadau dada" gwashim? = wie viel
Brode habt ihr bei euch? = How many loaves have ye with you?
# 252. didau appears in the same meaning more frequently
than the preceding dadau:
Luke 19024 kbagrg: pounda dash niat, ada ma ginam dish nTat gti
wil didau kapT1 da poundsit = nehmt das Pfund von ihm und gebt es
dem, der zehn Pfund hat = Take from him the pound, and give it to
him that hath ten pounds.
Luke 1925 ada houit gish nTat, MTy57n, ltha didau kapTi da
pounds a dash nTat = und sie sprachen zu ihm Herr, er hat doch zehn
Pfund = And they said unto him, Lord, he hath ten pounds.
Note Furthermore, as the following example may show, the
Tsimshian often prefers more specific verbs when we are satisfied
with the indefinite "to have. "
Matt. 3:12 shiny-atquadit ga hashawanshk ga gish ga zum anont
ga = er trg.gt die Wurfschaufel in seiner Hand, (ha-sha-wansh-k =
womit-fort-gethan wird) = he carries the fan in his hand [[ha -shawansh-k = with which is done away]] [[King James: Whose fan is in
his hand]].
4. yes and no
# 253. To answer with yes is accomplished by the special
expression a'a (Boas: o and---from a distance---haV)
172
John 21:16 ada houit gish niat. A'A. MTy-gri = und er spricht zu
ihm: ja, Herr = He saith unto him, Yea, Lord.
Matt. 11:9 ada gau haba shim ma dum shim nish dit ?
Propheti?
houyil da gwashim ghalak7 da prophetit = und was seid
ihr hinausgegangen zu sehen? einen Propheten? ja. ich sage euch,
der noch grOsser ist als ein Prophet = But what went ye out for to
see? A prophet? yea, I say unto you, and more than a prophet.
# 254. niadit (= it is so, " "truly, " or "indeed") is a more
emphatic form of affirmation.
John 11:27 ada houit gish nTat, Nradit, MTyln = und sie spricht
zu ihm: ja, Herr = She saith unto him, Yea, Lord.
# 255. Although in a declining sense (so that it actually
amounts to a no), niadit also serves in connection with the adversative particle yagai for the intensification and affirmation of the
expre s sion.
Luke 7:26 ada al gau na habashim da ma dum shim nTsh dit ?
Propheti? Yagai niadit, houyil da gwashim, galak7 da prophetit = und
was seid ihr hinausgegangen zu sehen? einen Propheten? Aber
furwahr, ich sage euch, der ist noch viel grOsser als ein Prophet =
And what went ye out for to see? A prophet? Truly [[King James:
Yea]] I say unto you, and much more than a prophet.
Luke 11:27, 28 ada houit gish nTat, Gumgaulth wal nasherumlthi.
ga nat in dagoidukshint, drlth mashka na dakdaugunt. Ada al houit ga.
Yagai niadit, gumgaulth wIlt in nakn7sh ga na algial-csh ga Shimoigiat
ga Lakaga, adat warandit = und sie sprach zu ihm: selig ist der Leib,
der dich getragen hat, und die BrUste, die du gesogen }last! Er aber
sprach: Nein, vielmehr selig sind, die Gottes Wort hOren und
bewahren! = a certain woman of the company lifted up her voice, and
said unto him, Blessed is the womb that bare thee, and the paps which
thou hast sucked. But he said, No [[King James: Yes, rather]]
173
blessed are they that hear the word of God and keep it.
# 256. ain = no:
Matt. 5:37 am gwai dum wila algiazunt, NTadit, NTadit: Ain,
ain... = deine Rede aber sei so: ja, ja, nein, nein... = But let your
communication be, Yea, yea; Nay, nay....
Luke 13 :2, 3 halignag.aud shim alth gakshlak-ilth hadadak ga di
gu Galileans a gwai alth tk7nTlth shila Galileanst ash ga wil haklak gut
ga gwa? Houyir da gwashim, Ain = meinet ihr, dass diese Galilger
vor alien andern Galilgern grOssere StYrider gewesen sind, weil sie
dieses erlitten haben? Ich sage euch: nein! = Luke 13:2 Suppose ye
that these Galileans have been [[Kind James: were]] sinners above all
the Galilaeans, because they have suffered [[King James: suffered]]
such things? Luke 13:3 I tell you, Nay.
5. Negation
# 257. There are very many different expressions for our
simple "not. H The general and only pure definite negation is althga;
all the other negative words include something more than the mere
negation. (compare # 78, # 81, # 123, b)
Examples of althga:
Matt. 5:17 althga goiduk s hrlth n'dum lthuut, yazai n!clum
dit = ich bin nicht gekommen um aufzulgsen, sondern urn
zu erfilllen = I have not come [[King James: am not come]] to destroy,
but to fulfill.
Matt. 15:2 wil althgut* yoiyikshaza'anon dadI da tkauk ga dit
= denn nicht waschen sie ihre HA!nde, wenn sie essen = for they wash
not their hands when they eat [[King James: bread]].
# 258. wha is, so to speak, a negation in the subjunctive in
contrast to the indicative althga.
althgut seems to be only a phonetic variant of althgat.
174
It appears chiefly in final and conditional clauses (both subjunctive and relative).
a) in final clauses:
Mark 5:7 gwuni3yri da gwan ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga a ma
dum wha haguntit = ich beschwgre dich bei Gott, dass du mich nicht
quglest = I adjure you by God that you would not torment me [[King
James: I adjure thee by God, that thou torment me not]].
Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwuna gish niat dumt wha wulth hashhaizt
gish ga lakyOp ga = und er bat ihn sehr, dass er sie nicht aus der
Gegend wegtriebe = And he besought him much that he would not drive
them out of the area [[King James: And he besought him much that he
would not send them away out the country]].
b) in conditional clauses: [[see page 174a for examples]]
Mark 14:38 171th ada gigrengwaklth shim, dum wil wha
laumgolth shim dagunshpaltzaudat = wachet und betet, damit ihr
nicht in Versuchung fallet = If you do not convert and become like
children, you will not come into the kingdom of heaven [[King James:
Except ye be converted and become as little children, ye shall not
enter into the kingdom of heaven]].
Mark 8:30 adat yakyloulthemakt gish ga dumpt wha malthash
nTat gish ligit na-= and er bedrohte sie, dass sie Niemandem von ihm
sagen sollten -= if he does not hear you, then take one or two more
with you [[King James: But if he will not hear thee, then take with
thee one or two more]].
# 259. Compounds such as the following (compare # 20) attest
to the fact that wha earlier had a more general meaning.
whahoigiak = unjust:
Luke 16:10 [[Na shimhou dida shimzul z7shgum gaut gik
shimhou da wile-ksha dit; adat na wha hoigiaga dida shimgul z-o-shgum
gaut, gik wha hoigiaga da wrreksha dit. = Wer im Geringsten treu ist,
Matt. 18:3 amiza wha yilyeltk ga shim, ada ma za shim
gubutgifilthk gut, althga dum lamzak shim ash ga na kingd,:yrnsh ga
lakgga = wenn ihr nicht umkehrt and werdet wie die Kinder, so werde
ihr nicht kommen in das Himmelreich = If you do not convert and
become like children, you will not come into the kingdom of heaven
[[King James: Except ye be converted and become as little as
children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of heaven]].
Matt 18:16 ada al amizat wha naknEun tkayawa goulda ligi
dupkad51 dit... = wenn er dich aber nicht horet, so nimm ncch Einen
oder Zwei zu dir..
= if he does not hear you, then take one or two
more with you [[King James: But if he will not hear thee, then take
with thee one or two more]].
The Tsimshian and German chapters and verse on the preceding
page for "b) in conditional clauses" are in error,
175
der ist auch im. Grossen treu; und wer im Geringsten unrecht ist,
der ist auch im Grossen unrecht. = He that is faithful in that which is
least is faithful also in muchs and he that is unjust in the least is
unjust also in much. ]]
whagaud = to be heartless, to commit adulterys
Mark 1O019 [[Wilaiyin yaoulthemzushgut, Gilau wha-Laudunt,
Gilau shrigedunt, Gilau galgunt, Gilau bigum magaunshk gunt, Gilau
naknog_umw-En.t, Lthauda nagwIdunt dilth nau'unt. = Du weisst ja die
Gebote wohls Du sollst nicht ehebrechen. Du sollst nicht tOten. Du
sollst nicht stehlen. Du sollst nicht falsch Zeugnis reden. Du sollst
niemand tguschen. Ehre deinen Vater und Mutter. = Thou knowest
the commandments, Do not commit adultery, Do not kill, Do not
steal, Do not bear false witness, Defraud not, Honour thy father and
mother. ]]
wha-gitgum anai = (not yeast [[bread]]), unleavened breads
Mark 14'0'1 [[Ltha zoudish ga gO9belt ga sha ga, ada nTnrsh ga
half-lualgiadum Passover ga, dilth wha-grtgurri anai gas ada
gwilthgagalt ga manpriests ga dilth hilkgadamishit ga dumt wila
y7.m.g.um gidigat ga, ash ga dumt zagwut ga. = Und nach zween Tagen
war Ostern und die Tage der sUssen Brote. Und die Hohenpriester
und Schriftgelehrten suchten, wie sie ihn mit Listen griffen und
t&teten. = After two days was the feast of the passover, and of
unleavened breads and the chief priests and the scribes sought how
they might take him by craft, and put him to death. ]]
whahTya = not long thereafter g
Mark 10g52 [[Ada housh Jesus gish neat, N'dau yali; Na shimhoudikshun gun dimautkshints Whahryat ga ada wil sha tifazk gut ga
adat y-igut gish ga lak gaina ga. = Jesus aber sprach zu ihms Gehe
hin, dein Glaube hat dir geholfen. Und alsbald ward er sehend, und
folgete ihm nauch auf dem Wege. = And Jesus said unto him, Go thy
176
way: thy faith hath made thee whole. And immediately he received
his sight, and followed Jesus in the way. ]]
Mark 14:43 [[WhahTga'sh ga houit ga, Dha, goiduksh gut Judas
ga, gault gish ga kapault ga da dupkad71, adat shiksht71sh ga wT
wilhelgiat ga yirgazawaiam dO-Lizk gaga dilth gat ga, amiya gish ga
manpriests ga dilth hrik.g.adamTshit, dilth tashTlgiat ga. = Und alsbald,
da er noch redete, kam herzu Judas, der ZwOilfe einer und eine gros se
Schar mit ihm, mit Schwertern und mit Stangen, von den HohenpriestIt
ern und Schriftgelehrten und Altesten. = And immediately, while he
yet spake, cometh Judas, one of the twelve, and with him a great
multitude with swords and staves, from the chief priests and the
scribes and the elders. ]]
whazulgiatkum hanlk = virgin:
Matt. 1:23 [[NT, dum waibun gaul da whag_ulgiatgum han-a-za, ada
dumt dazpiduksha lthgalthgum yO-t, ada dumt shriwa da dish Emmanuel,
gIT da shim algiaksha da da, Hoksh, ga ga Shimoigiat ga Lak57ga gum.
= "Siehe, eine Jungfrau wird schwanger sein, und einen Sohn geblren,
und sie werden seinen Namen Immanuel heissen, das ist verdolmetschet: Gott mit uns. " = Behold, a virgin shall be with child, and
shall bring forth a son, and they shall call his name Emmanuel, which
being interpreted is, God with us. ]]
whanahokshgum giat = spirit:
John 6:69 [[Ada ltha g.ashimhoudikshumt ada dup wilaish nt7gun
Whanahokshgum Giat gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-iga. = Und wir haben
geglaubet und erkannt, dass du bist Christus, der Sohn des
lebendigen Gottes. = And we believe and are sure that thou art
Christ, the Son of the living God. ]]
# 260. ain (B. : "(yen) is the adversative negation and is, as
such, mostly emphatic (compare # 256):
177
Mark 2:27 na zapsha halTshquaitk gut a giadit, al aina ya.g.ai
giada da halTshquaitk gut = der Sabbeth ist urn des Menschen willen
gemacht, aber nicht der Mensch urn des Sabbaths willen = The sabbath was made for man, and not man for the sabbath.
Mark 7:18 ainalth di dalgagaulshk ga shimT? Ain lth ma shim
wilai di? = versteht ihr es denn auch nicht? wisset ihr es auch
nicht? = Are ye so without understanding also? Do you not perceive?
# 261. wagait ain = never:
Mark 2:25 wa,gait ainith ma shim di lrazk di gu gau walsh
David... ? = habt ihr nie gelesen, was David that... ? = Have ye never
read what David did... ?
# 262. gup althga = by no means, not at all:
Matt. 26:33 z,73 tkai da dum lthimgushgosha dadTgwan, zup
althga dum di lthim.gosh7 = wenn auch Alle sich an dir qrgerten, so
will ich doch mich keineswegs argern = Though all men shall be
offended because of thee, yet will I by no means [[King James:
never]] be offended.
# 263. althga gau = nothing:
John 3:27 althga gaulth lip da wailth giat = nichts kann ein
Mensch nehmen = a man can take [[King James: receive]] nothing.
(compare the more customary althga ligi gau # 73. )
# 264. althgat na. = nobody, no one
Luke 10:22 ada althgat /la trim wilaish ga na ga Ltheilthk gaga =
und Niemand weiss, wer der Sohn ist = And no one [[King James: no
man]] knoweth who the Son is.
(emphatic: ain (lth) na-: compare # 71, # 72. )
# 265. whati = without (# 191):
Mark 6:7 adat ginamsh ga gutgiat gish dupnrat ash ga whati
shakshgum haik ga = und er gab Macht ihnen, die ohne reinen Geist =
and gave them power, [[King James: over unclean spirits]] those without unclean spirits.
178
# 266. hawalthk = not yet
John 3024 awil nThish ga hawalthk ga zilum makshash John ash
ga walp dakre ga = denn dort war noch nicht Johannes in das GefAgnis
geworfen = For John was not yet cast into prison.
John 20g5 ada hawalthk ga ziindit = und noch nicht ging er
hinein = yet went he not in.
John 204 hawalthk ga 1-1.7.gw3;ntk gulth hour a goi = noch nicht ist
gekommen meine Stunde = mine hour is not yet come.
# 267. hawe-nilth, hawalth (= not yet) is related in sound and
meaning
gwashim, ada wagait
John 14g9 ltha shganaklth hokshk
hawe-nilth ma wilaiyawr, Philip? = so lange Zeit bin ich bei euch und
noch nicht kennest du mich, Philippus ? = am I [[King James have 1
been]] so long time with you, and you do not yet know me, Philip
[[King James and yet hast thou not known me, Philip]]?
# 268. wa_gait hawalthk = never yet, until now not yet [[never
before]]g
Matt. 933 wagait hawalthk ga di nrshk gulth n'lthaw-gl da Israel
= noch nie ist auch solches gesehen worden in Israel = never before
has such been seen in Israel [[King James It was never so seen in
Israel]].
Matt. 1111 wagait hawalthk ga haldum bllth gaul da shpagait
klthgu hanTnagut... = noch nie ist aufgekommen eins aus der Mitte
der Kinder der Welber... = never before has one risen out of the
midst of the children of women [[King James g Among them that are
born of women there hath not risen a greater than John the Baptist]].
John 7g46 wagait hawalthk ga cdi wila algiaklth giadash ga na
houit ga = no ch niemals hat ein Mensch so geredet, wie er gesprochen
hat = never yet has a person so spoken, as he has spoken [[King
James Never man spake like this man]].
179
op za (= in order that... not) seems to indicate that
something fearful should be prevented:
Matt. 4:6 ...ada zurn,gaan.on da dumt in shinTh7qudint, op za
ligi gw-gndamukshlth shin alth laup = ...un.d sie werden dich auf den
Hgn.den tragen, auf dass du nicht deinen Fuss an einen Stein stossest
= and they will carry in their hands, in order that you not strike your
foot on a stone [[King James: and in their hands they shall bear thee
up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone]].
# 269.
Matt. 7:6 gilau ma shim ginam n'lthZ5duksha da hashh-a'shit, ma
za shim ligi shadaltha na bilh-a- shim da hazazlklth ga gwashaut, op
zit* klthalungiakshit... = ihr sollt nicht das Heiligthum den Hunden
geben und eure Per len solit ihr nicht vor die Saue werfen, auf dass
sie dieselben nicht niedertreten... = Give not that which is holy unto
the dogs, and cast not your pearls before the swine, in order that they
not trample them down [[King James: Give not that which is holy unto
the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine, lest they trample
them under... ]].
# 270. In prohibitive [[imperative]] clauses, !! not" is expressed
by means of gilau (compare # 82):
Luke 1:13 gilau b7shin = filrchte dich nicht = Fear not.
Luke 10:20 ada al gilau za gwai za ,gun galthgwishgiTa da shim =
doch darinnen freut euch nicht! = Notwithstanding in this rejoice not.
# 271. lthguksh = not possible, not to be able:
Mark 3:20 ada gik shag.ait gash ga wilhelgiat ga, gun lthgunksh
gish ga dum tkauk gut ga = und abermal kam das Volk zusammen,
also, dass es unmoglich war, dass sie assen = And the multitude
cometh together again, so that it was impossible that they ate [[King
James: so that they could not so much as eat bread]].
op zit appears to be only a phonetic variation of op zat.
180
Mark 3:25 lthguksh ga dumt da'alclthk gut ga w-glp ga dum
hahaitk ga dit = es ist unmgglich, dass ein Haus bestehen kann = It is
impossible that a house can endure [[King James: And if a house be
divided against itself, that house cannot stand. ]]
6. must, shall, can
# 272. zup is a previously mentioned auxiliary, # 133, which
expresses necessity with regard to an objective or goal.
Pertinent examples:
Mark 12:30 ada ma dum g.up shTebunsh ga MryFn ga... = und du
sollst lieben den Herrn... = And thou shalt love the Lord....
John 12:34 dum.g.up manbazk gish ga Lthgcilthk gish ga giat ga?
= des Menschen Sohn muss erhght werden? = The son of man must be
lifted up?
# 273. dum also (# 131) appears in the meaning 'shall, "
"should":
? = was soll ich
Matt. 19:16 gaulth am'm gaulth dum
Gutes thun... ? = what good thing shall I do... ?
und
Matt. 19:19 ...dT1th ma dum shrebun shila giadun...
du sollst lieben deinen I\TZchsten... = and, Thou shall love thy
neighbor....
The expression am dum (it is good that... ) is very
frequently [[employed]] for our "shall, " "should":
Matt. 19:6 gun gau ltha lainithaudash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakg.ga
# 274.
am dumt wha basha.gun da giadit = was nun Gott in einan.dergefLrgt hat,
das soil der Mensch nicht scheiden = what therefore God hath joined
together, that shall no man sever [[King James: let not man put
asunder]].
Matt. 5:48 am dum wha nahakhokshk ga shim... = ihr sollt
vollkommen sein = you shall be perfect [[King James: Be ye therefore perfect]].
181
# 275. Iklthk, more customary da'aklthk = to be able, to be
possible:
Mark 4:32 mount dataklthk ga da na zZiuzash ga lakTga lrwan dit a
wilu shakshge-utk ga dit = also dass die Vggel unter dem Himmel unter
seinem Schatten wohnen kO'nnen = so that the birds under heaven are
able to live under its shadow [[King James: so that the fowls of the
air may lodge under the shadow of it]].
Mark 4:33 ...malthash ga algiak gish dupnrat, ash ga wilt
dataklthk gish gut nakriciit ga = ...er sagte das Wort ihnen, als sie es
hOren konnten = spake he the word unto them, as they were able to
hear it.
# 276. lthguksh = not to be able, not to be possible:
Mark 5:3 ada lthguksh gut na ga dumt in dadaklth ga = und
Niemand konnte ihn binden = no man could bind him.
Mark 6:5 ada lthguksh gish ga dum di wait gish ga... = und
es war fi.ir ihn unmoglich, dass er that... = and for him it was impossible that he did... [[King James: And he could there do no mighty
work]].
7. to have in mind, to want, to wish
# 277. dum, which expresses the concept of future (# 131), is
also used in the meaning "to have in mind, " "to want to"2
Mark 1:41 dum w7.17.1 = ich will es thun = I want to do it [[King
James: I will]].
Mark 14:58 dum .g.oldif temple gwai = ich will abbrechen diesen
Tempel = I want to destroy this temple.
# 278. hashak = to want, to wish, to desire:
Matt. 20:32 gau hashak shim dum wan.. da gwashim? = was
sollt ihr, dass ich euch thun soll? = what do you want [[King James:
what will ye]], that I shall do unto you?
182
Matt. 13:17 wThe-I da prophets dilth am-gm da giat na hashag,a
dada dumt nigau nTiza shimt... = viele Propheten and gerechte
Menschen haben begehrt, zu sehen, was ihr sehet... = many prophets
and righteous men have desired to see those things which ye see....
# 279. anauk = will, to be willing, to suffer, allow, to permit'.
Mark 1:40 amT ma za anaukt, da'aklthgun ma dum shakshaniT
wenn du es willst, so kannst du mich reinigen = If you want it, then
you can cleanse me [[King James: If thou wilt, thou canst make me
clean]].
Mark 10:4 anau,g.ash Moses a dum damtk ga sh7O-nshgum bish-
bashuk gut = Moses hat zugelassen dass ein Scheidebrief geschrieben
wird = Moses has permitted that a letter of separation is written
[[King James: Moses suffered to write a bill of divorcement]].
# 280. shag.aud = to want (with conviction), to conclude, to
counsel, to persuade; will:
John 1:13 gir ga kshaqulth-ilt ga, althga amyq dalth ilthe, ligi
= welche
na shag.a,ud gulth shame, ligi na shagaud gulth giat,
geboren sind, nicht von dem Gebla, noch von dem Willen des
Fleisches, noch von dem Willen eines Menschen, sondern... = which
were born, not of blood, nor of the will of the flesh, nor of the will of
man, but. . .
John 9:31 ... adat wgiansh ga na shag,.audk gut ga, ninTsh ga
naknZit ga = ...und (wenn) er thut seinen Willen, diesen hgrt er =
and [[when]] he doeth his will, him he heareth.
John 12:10 ada al shagagaudk gish ga manpriests gish ga dumt
gik dit zagwush Lazarus ga = aber die Hohenpriester beschlossen,
dass sie auch den Lazarus tddteten = But the chief priests consulted
that they put Lazarus also to death [[King James that they might put
Lazarus also to death]].
183
shigilth = to want, to desire, to strive for, to aspire to
John 8:37 ada ma shim al shigilth zaqudrit = ihr aber wollt mich
# 281.
tOdten = but ye seek to kill me.
John 10:39 .g.un.t gik hazukshum shigilth g'g,t ga = deshalb trachteten sie abermals danach, ihn zu greifen = Therefore they sought
again to take him.
8. Perfect Tense
# 282. ltha signifies that which is completed and lasts or
continues, and wil [[signifies]] that which has just made itself manifect.
ltha: the Boas form = tla; see # 76 on the formation of the
perfect tense and also 1889 Boas Report, p. 883. For ltha
also see # 20, 5; # 131; # 207; # 322.
2. wil: # 20, 4; # 131; # 207; # 322.
3. ithawil: # 154.]]
Here are a few pertinent examples:
Matt. 2:14 ltha haldum bat ga, ada wilt gash ga lthgriwaumlthk
gaga... = als er aufgestanden, nahm er das Kind. = when he arose,
he took the [[King James: young]] child....
Matt. 5:1 ada lthat /fish ga wi wilhelgiat ga, ada wilt mang,aush
ga lak shz.unTshta ga = als er viel Volk sah, ging er auf einen Berg
when he saw many peoples, he went up on the mountain [[King James.'
And see the multitudes, he went up into a mountaionr and when he was
set, his disciples came unto him]].
Note: Later in the section over temporal joining [[# 322]], we
will go into more detail.
# 283. While, in most cases, we could render ltha by means
of "as, " we will best translate the following combination with "after":
ltha zpudr (aoudi = to end, terminate, cease), which expresses a type
of perfect with the secondary meaning of settled or disposed of.
.
184
John 21g15 ada ltha goudrsh ga tkauk gut ga und nachdem sie
das Mahl gehalten hatten = and after they had held the meal [[King
James So when they had dined]].
John 20014 ltha goudish ga houit ga gwa = nachdem sie dies
gesagt hatte = after she had said this [[King James; And when she haci
thus said]].
John 1801 ada lthagoudish ga housh Jesus ga gwa = nachdem
Jesus solches geredet hatte = after Jesus said such things [[King
James When Jesus had spoken these words]].
John 13012 ada lthagpudTsh gut yoiyiksh ga g.ashishiat ga =
nachdem er nun ihre Ilsse gewaschen hatte = after he now had washec,
their feet [[King James So after he had washed their feed].
Mark 1014 ltha gpudish ga lalha-tk gish John gish ga walp dakle°
ga = nachdem Johannes in das Geangnis geworfen war = After John
was thrown in prison [[King James Now after that John was put in
prison]].
Mark 16g1 ada ltha gpudish ga halishquaitk gaga = nachdem der
Sabbeth vergangen war = after the sabbath was past [[King James!
And when the sabbath was pasta
# 284, sh.gabTi has perfect meaning and, so it seems, the
secondary sense that a desired [[thing]] is attained, a need is satisfied
Matt. 14821 ada shgab7sh ga na tkauk gut ga gwishti3nsha wil
thousands ga yota ga = und gegessen hatten funf tausend IvInner (satt
gegessen) = and five thousand men had eaten [[eaten their fill]]
[[King James And they that had eaten were about five thousand men;
See also Matt. 14020 And they did all eat and were filled]].
Matt. 14g36 ada shgabUsh ga t'in gwaltk gut ga shim dilamautk
shit ga = und welche angerUhrt hatten, die wurden sehr gesund = and
as many as had touched were made perfectly whole]],
185
Also, lugwil may indicate completion; compare # 136.
# 285. na like ltha (# 282) has similar perfect meaning, but
seems to differ from ltha in that it appears without reference to
another fact in the simple sentenceg
Luke 2Z037 na tkullTzk ga gish ga hrikgagigiansh gut ga = er ist
unter die Uebelthgter gerechnet = he is reckoned among the wrongdoers [[King James And he was reckoned among the transgressors]].
Luke 19046 na damtk gut = es stehet geschrieben = it is written.
Note
9. also, still
# 286. drmostly in the meaning "together with, " "and"
(word combining)---often has the meaning "also",
Matt. 1903 ada drzntspiduksh ga Pharisees gish 111-at = und auch
die Phariser kamen zu ihm = and the Pharisees also came unto him.
Matt. 2007 n`dau shim di haba zum shindointk gut = gehet ihr
auch hin in den Weinberg = Go ye also into the vineyard.
# 287. gik nearly has the meaning and also, likewise, too, as
well, again, anew, furthermore; that is, it arranges, by a preliminary similarity, sequential elements [[# 145, # 179, # 229]]
Luke 14g12 ada gik houit gish nTat gu nat in wau'ut ga... = und
desgleichen sprach er zu dem, welcher ihn eingeladen hatte... = and
likewise he said to him who had invited him [[King Jamesg Then said
he also to him that bade him]].
Luke 1406 ada gik lthgukshk gish ga dum d'ilamak gut ga gwa
und abermals konnten sie nicht Antwort darauf geben = And again they
could not thereupon answer [[King James And they could not answer
him to these things]].
# 288. hazukshum which probably actually has more the meaning "back" [[return]], occurs very frequently in the same sense of gik
[[# 146, # 180]]:
186
Luke 245 ada lthat wha wat ga, ada wil hazukshum yilyeltk gut
gish ga Jerusalem = und als sie ihn nicht fanden, da kehrten sie
wiederum nach Jerusalem zurtick = And when they found him not, they
turned back again to Jerusalem.
Luke 14g12 op za dit hazukshum wau'un, ada za shitiy-gwuk ga
da gwan = auf dass sie dich nicht wiederum einladen und dir vergolten
werde = in order that they again not invite you and repay you [[King
James: lest they also bid thee again, and a recompence be made
thee]].
# 289. In different places where we are satisfied with the
single "again" or "anew, " the combination of gik and hazukshum with
identical meaning occurs:
John 927 gau gun gik hashak shim da ma dum shim hazukshum
nakno dida? = weshalb wollt ihr es abermals hOren = wherefore
would ye hear it again?
John 10039 Lunt gik hazukshum shigilth g7t. ga = deshalb
suchten sie ihn abermals zu greifen. = Therefore they sought again to
take him.
# 290. tkulTya (= to grow, to increase) frequently has the mean-
ing moreover, in addition, besides, even more
Matt. 5117 gau tkuliy7 da w71 shimt ? = was thut ihr Cberdies?
= what do you do in addition [[King James what do ye more than
others]]?
John 19:8 g.un lthat nakn-Oit gut Pilate ga houit ga, ada tkulrygsh
ga b-asht ga = als Pilatus das Wort hgrte, fiiirchtete er sich noch mehr
= when Pilate hears the word, he was even more afraid [[King James
When Pilate therefore heard that saying, he was the more afraid]].
# 291. In addition to tkulTy7, mandlyT appears in the meaning
above and beyond, even more [[in addition]]:
187
er
ada yagait mandiy1sh ga amhout ga... =
aber schrie noch viel mehr = but he cried even more [[King James°
so much the more]].
Addenda: nishta (etymology uncertain) in connection with gaul
has the sense "another, " "one more. "
For example:
John 19:32 [[Ada ltha gutgpiduksha soldiers ga, adat gun-a-ligunsh
ga gashishish ga kshzogut ga, ada gik wilaoqush ga nishtagaulshk ga
n't shila liyezit gish ga lak guza-kgag = Da kamen die Kriegsknechte,
und brachen dem ersten die Beine, und dem andern, der mit ihm
gekreuziget war. = Then came the soldiers and brake the legs of the
first, and of the other which was crucified with him. j]
gimgia could have the meaning "still, " "in addition. "
Luke 18:39
(John 12:1, 16:12)
[[John 12:1 Gungoiduksh Jesus gish ga Bethany ga, ash ga ltha
gimgiagulsha dash ga dum Passover ga, gu ga wil dh-Ish Lazaurs ga,
nha zagut ga ada n't gik dOlshunt gish ga wak gut gish ga shpagait
driit ga. = Sechs Tage vor den Ostern kam Jesus gen Bethanien. da
Lazarus war, der Verstorbene, welchen Jesus auferwechet hatte von
den Toten. = Then Jesus six days before the passover came to
Bethany, where Lazarus was which had been dead, whom he raised
from the dead.
John 16g12 Ashi gimgia h-elda gau dum houya da gwashim, ada
grao-n. = Ich habe euch noch viel zu sagen
al althga ma shim
aber ihr kOnnet's jetzt nicht tragen. = I have yet many things to say
unto you, but ye cannot bear them now. j]
10. only
# 292. amuksha = only, except for (compare # 181):
dum gup lthaudun ga MTyZn ga Shimoigiatk gun
Matt. 4z10
dass du anbeten sollst
ga, adat amukshat nrat ga dum y7,kun ga =
188
den Herrn, deinen Gott, und ihm allein nachfolgen = that thou shall
worship the Lord thy God and him alone follow [[King James: Thou
shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve]].
Matt. 5:47 ada amilth amuksha waikia shim dhoiuksha shimt..
= und wenn ihr nur zu euren Briidern freundlich thut... = and if ye
salute your brethren only....
althga amuksha = not only:
John 13:9 Mry57n althga amuksha gashishi yagai dilth gik
garanona di-1th dumLoushrit = Herr, nicht nur meine Fu"sse, sondern
auch meine HInde und mein Haupt = not my feet only but also my
hands and my head.
althga amuksha anailth dum gundidolshlth giat,
Matt. 4:4
# 293.
yagai tk5117 algia.g.a gu kshaw-a-tk gut gish ga zumF.ksh ga Shimoigiat ga
Laka'ga = nicht nur vom Brod leben die Menschen, sondern von einem
jeglichen Wort, das aus dem Munde Gottes kommt = Man shall not
only live by bread, but also by every word that comes out of the mouth
of God [[King James: Man shall not live by bread alone, but by every
word that proceedeth out of the mouth of God]].
# 294. gup = only (compare # 133, # 182):
John 9:34 gup shpagait hadak ga na wil kshalaklagunt = nur in
S(1'.nden bist du geboren = only in sin were you born [[King James:
Thou wast altogether born in sins]].
John 8:41 .gup gaul ga nagw-idum ga = wir haben nur einen
Vater = we have one Father only [[King James: we have one Father]].
Mark 12:29 Mryan ga Shimoigiat gun ga, gup gaul gish ga
INATyan ga = der Herr, dein Gott, ist nur ein Herr = the Lord thy God
is one Lord only [[King James: The Lord our God is one Lord]].
Remark: althgagup does not occur.
189
11. as
# 295. nTw71 = as [[and]] compares events [[or]] facts with
another:
John 20:21 niwFlda n't wila haiziga Nagw7,t ga, nini n'drwila
hash-haiz shimt = gleichwie mich der Vater gesandt hat, so sende ich
auch euch = just as my Father sent me, so I send you also [[King
James: as my Father hath sent me, even so send I you]].
Mark 10:15 ligit na dumt in wha gl'sh ga na kingdomsh ga
Shimoigiat ga Lak-iga niw5.1da* lthquaumlthk gut, g.up althga dum di
zilum aklthk ga dit = wenn Jemand nicht empfgngt das Reich Gottes
wie ein Kind, der wird nicht hineinkOnnen = Whosoever does not
receive the kingdom of God as a [[King James: little]] child, he shall
not enter therein.
# 296. hoigiak compares things or objects with one another:
Mark 1:10 dil.th wil tiki-goiduksh ga Haik ga hoigiagut ga dove
gish ga laka ga = und es kam herab der Geist gleich einer Taube auf
ihn = and the Spirit like a dove descending on him.
Mark 4:31 hoigiaga da gal da guba nawanum mustard =
gleichwie ein kleines Senfkorn = just as a little grain of mustard seed
[[King James: like a grain of mustard seed]].
# 297. adigriel = same, like, equal, equivalent (a-di-grle1):
Matt. 21:36 ada gik adrgriel gut wila willgwut ga = und sie
thaten ihnen gleich also = and they did like thus unto him [[King
James: and they did unto him likewise]].
Matt. 20:12 ada adigilel ma wila wilFgwa dit dish nrigum = und
du hast sie uns gleich gemacht = thou hast made them equal.
If hoigiak were to occur in this position, then the sense would
be as though the kingdom of God were a child, while niwal (ni- or
nTn7,-wal) indicates as a child receives a gift.
190
wudi seems to express a comparison 'so to speak".
Matt. 26:55 alth g.utgoiduksha shimr a wudit in libilt wri
hukzgowulshum giadit a... = seid ihr gekommen, urn so zu sagen
wider einen Mgrder zu handeln... ? = have you come: so to speak, so
as to act against a murderer... ? [[King James: ye come out as
against a thief.... ]]
Matt. 27:35 ada lthat 1Thokshint gish ga lakz_uzak ga, ada wilt
# 298.
bishbashag,.unsh ga na wishwash gut ga, ash ga wudi na y7yukt gut =
and als sie ihn ans Kreuz gebracht hatten, theilten sie seine Kleider,
indem sie das Loos darum warfen = and as they had brought him to
the cross, they dealt out his clothes by casting lots [[King James:
And they crucified him, and parted his garments, casting lots]].
Note: In this last example (Matt. 27:35) yeyuk probably does not
actually mean to draw lots, but [[is]] a custom of the natives which
calls to mind drawing lots and the sense is "while they, so to speak,
made yeyuk [[lots]]. "
12. Comparative
# 299. The comparative is expressed by the prefix g.a (compare # 33, # 89) [[and]] in a few places [[is]] also written gha:
John 12:43 wilt gashiebun na lthaumshk ga giadit ash ga na
lthaumshk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lakgga = denn sie hatten mehr lieb
die Ehre bei den Menschen, als die Ehre bei Gott = For they loved the
praise of men more than the praise of God.
John 19:11 nTnT'.g.un ya.gaigawil7ksha hadak ga t'in dagaudir d7.
gwan = deshalb hat aber derjenige grO's sere SAde, der mich dir
aberantwortet hat = therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the
greater sin.
John 4:12 alth gawilEkshunTga a nagwrdumt Jacob? = bist du
grOsser als unser Vater Jacob? = Art thou greater than our father
Jacob... ?
191
John 14:12 ada gik ghalikl7kshum halthalshr7 gwa dum zaba
dit = und er wird noch grOssere Werke thun, als diese = and he will
do greater works than these [[King James: and greater works than
these shall he do]].
13. Superlative
# 300. There is not a special form for it One usually uses a
paraphrase, [[and]] shimg.ul = very (also shim, etc.; compare # 169,
# 170) is placed in front of the adjective in question.
Luke 16:10 n'S shimhou dida shimLul z7shgum (z"c7shk = small,
little) gaut gik shimhou da wi717ksha dit; adat na wha hoigiag_a dida
shirrigul zEishgum gaut, gik wha hoigiaga da wilgksha dit = wer treu im
Geringsten ist, der ist auch treu im Grossen; und wer unrecht ist im
Geringsten, ist auch unrecht im Grossen = He that is faithful in that
which is least is faithful also in much: and he that is unjust in the
least is unjust also in much.
Mark 5:7 shim lam Shimoigiat = der allerhOchste Herr = the
most high Lord [[King James: the most high God]].
14. Command
# 301. While I refer to the notes of Mr. Boas on the imperative
(# 82), I would, above all, like to state here that the imperative mode
usually is differentiated from declarative statements by the suffix
-1th (Boas: tn. [[1889 Boas Report, pp. 884-85. ]] (Compare also
# 123 for the discussion of the character of this auxiliary syllable):
Luke 9:13 gigienith a za gabat = gebet ihnen zu essen! = Give
ye them to eat.
Luke 11:9 gwunTilth, ada dum ginamtk ga dida gwashim;
gwilthgagilelth, ada ma dum shim w-a-, dit; nadishdT5shlth, ada...
bittet, und es wird euch gegeben; suchet, und ihr werdet finden;
klopfet an, und... = Ask, and it is given to you [[King James: Ask,
and it shall he given you]]; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and....
192
Luke 13:7 gozah...haue ihn ab... = ... cut it down....
Remark: In addition to this suffix, the suffix -T is found',
Matt. 3:2 gelukshataitikshT shim = thut Busse = do penance
[[King James: Repent ye]].
If we are concerned here with the same suffix with which we
became acquainted in # 45, it would, thus, then have the meaning of a
good-natured dat. commod. [[The meaning of this phrase is unknown.]j
as in the German, "Do penance unto me!" The use is, of course,
completely sporadic.
# 302. n'dau is a special imperative form with the meaning
"go":fg
Matt. 8:9 n'dau, ada doulth dit = geh', und er geht = Go, and
he goeth.
Mark 6:38 n'dau shim nilth = gehet und sehet! = go and see.
Luke 10:3 n'dau shim = gehet hin! = Go your ways.
# 303. Likewise (independent only in imperative sentences)
gul (= "come") appears. Compare the prefix gul-, # 109.
Matt. 14:29 .g.ul = komm ! = Come.
Matt. 11:28 gul shim 7 goi = kommt her zu mir ! = Come unto
me....
Mark 5:23 gul 1T.Clau zalanon dish niat = komm und lege die
lignde auf sie! = come and lay thy hands on her....
Mr. Boas has g.ul za instead of k'altse; compare the modal
particle za, # 132.
# 304. nIzrf is likewise a special imperative form with the
meaning "bring here":
Mark 9:19 n'zia -5: goi = bringet ihn her zu mir = bring him unto
me.
Mark 12:15 n'zu penny cr5 goi = bringt mir einen Pfennig her !
bring me a penny....
=
193
= bringet her
einige Fische... ! = bring a few fish... ! [[King James: Bring of the
John 21:10 nIzil nag.azTou ltrwalum zum aksha.
fish... .]]
# 305. Sentences of exhortation are very frequently begun with
shiVunza (etymology uncertain):
Mark 12:7 shiVunza dup zagwut = lasst uns ihn tgdten! = let us
kill him....
Mark 14:42 slitrunza walukshum = lasst uns gehen! = let us
go....
Mark 4:35 shil'unza dup haba daushdat = lasst uns hinii'berfahren! = Let us pass over unto the other side.
Matt. 26:46 haldum golthun, shriunza w1lukshum = stehet auf,
lasst uns gehen! = Rise, let us be going....
Mr. Boas transcribes [[shri'unza as]] sOintse, # 82,
# 306. In one place ula-nzaH is used instead of shu'unza (but
with what difference?).
Mark 1:38 lInza dup haba gik na.g.az-iou da .g.ulzipzabut = lasst
uns in die ngchsten Stgdte gehen! = Let us go into the next towns....
Addendum: wa/tse, mentioned by Mr. Boas in # 82, probably
was composed from the verb stem w5".. (= "arrive) at and the modal
particle za, # 132.
15. Interrogative Sentences
A. Simple hiterrogative Sentences
# 307. The word order here is entirely that of declarative
statements. Apart from the possible sentence stress, only modal
suffixes indicate the interrogative. (Compare at this point # 123
[[and]] # 125; with the forms stated in the charts in # 77 [[and]] # 80
bear in mind the pronoun components !)
# 308. The suffix which characterizes the interrogative is T
(Boas: el [[See # 77 and 1889 Boas Report, p. 883. ]]
194
John 9:27 hashak shim alth dum dT disciplesk ga d57. gwashimT?
= wollt ihr, dass ihr auch seine Janger werdet? = will ye also be his
disciples ?
John 10:34 ligi wha damtk ga na wilalautk ga shim7...
stehet nicht geschrieben in euerm Gesetz... ? = is it not written in
your law... ?
John 11:9 alth ligi wha kapil da eirbelT gwilth hour da gel da
shat? = sind nicht 12 Stunden an einem Tage? = Are there not twelve
hours in the day?
John 14:9 ada wag.ait haw7nilth ma wilaiyawr, Philip? = and du
kennst mich noch nicht, Philippus ? = and you know me not yet,
Philip? [[King James: and yet hast thou not known me, Philip ?]]
#309. The suffix -lth, with which, as I pointed out in # 123,
the character of the general, of the indefinite, is always associated,
also naturally indicates interrogative sentences. I have previously in
that section [[# 123]] given a sufficient quantity of examples to which I
will simply make reference here.
B. Alternative Expressions
# 310. Alternative expressions are connected by ligi, ligi - --
ligi (= "or, " "eitheror").
For example:
Mark 11:30 na baptismsh John, alth watk ga dalth lakyT ligi
giat? = Die Taufe des Johannes, war sie vom Himmel oder von
Menschen? = The baptism of John, was it from heaven, or of men?
Mark 12:15 alth dup dum ginam di, za ligi dup dum wha
ginamt? sollen wir ihn geben, oder sollen wir ihn nicht geben? =Shall we give it or shall we not give it? [[King James shall we give
or shall we not given]
Remark: Here, in addition, ligi, # 178, and za, # 132, may be
called to attention.
195
C. Interrogative Adverbs
#311. n'da gun = how?
John 8:33 n'da gun al hou 'un da... ? = wie sprichst du denn...
= how sayest thou then... ? [[King James How sayest thou... ?]]
John 9:15 nIc1a za_gun wila nTazk gut? = wie list du sehend
geworden? = how have you got sight? [[King James Then again the
Pharisees also asked him how he had received his sight. ]1
John 14:9 rilda g,_unt hou'unt... ? wie sprichst du? = how do
you say? [[King James: how sayest thou then....]1
# 312. gau gun = why? wherefore?
Mark 15:34 gau ma gun qudakshut? = warum hast du mich
verlassen?= why hast thou forsaken me?
Mark 11:3 gau ma ,gun shim wila-gwa gwa ? warum thut ihr
das ? = Why do ye this?
Mark 12:15 gau ma gun shim shanh7dtit ? = weshalb versuchet
ihr mich? = Why tempt ye me ?
John 8:46 gau _gun whagashimhoudiksha shim 7 goi ? warum
glaubt ihr nicht an mich? = why do ye not believe me?
John 20:15 hanak, gau gun wThouitk gunt ? = Weib, weshalb
weinst du? = Woman, why weepest thou?
# 313. n'da, n' da express the following
a) where?
Luke 8:25 n'dada gu na gashimhoudiksh shimt? wo ist euer
Glaube ? = Where is your faith?
Luke 17:17 rild-5: da gt-f kshtamashaul dit? = wo rind die Neune ?
= but where are the nine ?
Matt. 2:2 ndb," da gu kshalaklaga da king da Jewsit? = wo ist der
geborene KOnig der Juden? = where is the king born of the Jews ?
[[King James: Where is he that is born King of the Jews ?]]
196
da? = da sprachen sae
John 9:12 ada wil houit gish niat,
zu ihm: wo? = Then said they unto him: Where? [[King James- Then
said they unto him, Where is he ?]]
b) from where? from which place? whence?
Here, in addition to n'da, the even more distinct and better
n'da wil wl7tk (singular), n'da wil amy-S: (plural), appears:
Mark 6:2 nrdat wil daw-altk ga da ya57gwa na houdit? = woher
kommt diesem Marine sein Reden? = from where comes this man his
speech? [[King James: From whence hath this man these things ?]]
Mark 8:4 rildalth dum wila sha Blzaida dalth giada gwai alth anal
azuldau gwa? = woher nehmen wir, um diese Menschen zu sagttigen,
Brod in dieser Wilste? = from whence take we bread in this wilderness
to satisfy these men? [[King James: From whence can a man satisfy
these men with bread here in the wilderness ?]]
John 19:9 n'da da gu wil viitk gunt ? = woher bist du gekommen"
Whence art thou? ]]
= from which place have you come? [[King Jame
Matt. 13:27 n'dalth wil amiyalth lukshgigedum kiauga da?
woher sind denn die Unkrg,uter? = from whence are then the weeds?
[[King James: from whence then hath it tares ?]1
c) to which place? whither ?
John 13:36 Miy-In, n'da dumgauyint? Ada dnamak gish Jesus
ga, Lthgukshk ga ma dum yagut gral7n, a n"da dum gauyrit = Herr,
wohin gehest du? and Jesus antwortete: es ist unmOglich, das s du
mir jetzt nachfolgst, wohin ich gehe = Lord, whither goest thou?
Jesus answered him, Whither I go, thou canst not follow me now....
John 11:34 nrdalth ltha ma shim wil shgti dia? = wohin habt ihr
ihn gelegt? = whither have you laid him? [[King James: Where have
ye laid him?]]
John 16:5 n'da dum g.auyint? = wohin gehst du? = Whither goest
thou?
197
d) when?
Luke 21:7 n'dalth dum da w71 dida g7i.na hou unt ?
wann wird
das geschehen, von dem du sprichst? = when will that of which you
speak come to pass ? [[King James: but when shall these things be ?]]
John 6:25 Rabbi, n'da wi la goidukshuniyagwa? = Rabbi, wann
bist du hierher gekommen? = Rabbi, when have you come here?
[[King James: Rabbi, when camest thou hither ?]1
Matt. 24:3 malthilth 7 gum, n'dalth dum da w71 nahouunT?
sage uns, wann wird geschehen, wovon du sprichst? = tell us when
this whereof you speak will happen? [[King James Tell us, when
shall these things be ?]]
# 314. n'dalth shganaklth (shz.a-nak) = how long?
Mark 9:19 n'dalth shganaklth dum hokshk gT a gwashim? wie
lange soil ich bei euch sein? = how long shall I be with you?
Mark 9:21 n'dalth sh.g.anaklth da wil dida? wie lange ist das
her ? = How long is it ago...
# 315. dumaisha = how much?
Mark 8:5 dumaisha anai dadau did. gwashim? = wie viel Brode
habt ihr bei euch? = how much bread have you with you?
# 316. n'cl7. shzabF = how often? how oft?
Matt. 18:21 n' da." sh_g,.abO dum g_umgaudif da waig77 da hadak ga
dadFgoi? = wie oft muss ich vergeben meinem Bruder, der an mir
sundigt = how often must I forgive my brother who wrongs me?
[[King James: how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive
-Li
him ?]]
Matt. 23:37 n'dalth sh.gab-Olth n'clum shTgilth sha,gait gouun na
klthgriunt... = wie oft habe ich versammeln wollen dein Kinder... =
how often will I have gathered your children... [[King James: how
often would I have gathered thy children together. 0]1?
198
VIII.
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
AND
THE MEANS FOR JOINING THE CLAUSES TOGETHER
Preliminaries
# 317. There is not a formal influence of clause upon clause or
the manifestation that certain forms in the clause preceding and in
the clause following influence one another according to certain laws.
The logical connection between the clauses finds its expression solely
in introductory relative words and conjunctives. Instead of speaking
of the complex sentence, one may also speak of the joining of simple
clauses, and therefore only the auxiliary words which serve to bind
clauses together are to be treated in this chapter.
A. Adnominal Clauses
# 318. The reader is directed here to the respective sections on
relative words and on interrogative words.
Matt. 604 ada Nagw-idun ga gri t'ingumzin nlizun, dumt in 5:1.6
kshfgunt = und dein Vater, welcher heimlich dich sieht, wird dir
Offentlich vergelten = and thy father who sees you secretely will
reward you openly [[King James and thy Father which seeth in secret
himself shall reward thee openly]],
Matt. 7 24 gun tkanish na t'in naktiT na algiagou gwa, adat
walandit, dum shilawilgiant7 da wilg,aushgum y5tat, gu t'in zaba na
vialp dada lak laubit = darum alle, welche hOren diese meine Rede und
thun sie, will ich vergleichen mit einem klugen Marine, welcher sein
Haus baute auf einen Felsen = Therefore whosoever heareth these
sayings of mine; and doeth them, I will liken him unto a wise man,
which built his house upon a rock.
Matt. 908 adat lthaudish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-ga, girt in
ginamsh ga shg.a gutgiat gish ga giat ga = und es lobte Gott, welcher
199
solche Macht den Menschen gegeben hat = and glorified God who [[King
James which]] had given such power unto men.
John 4g5 ada wilt wash ga grielt ga Lulzabum Samaria ga, gu
wat gulth Sychar = und er kam in eine Stadt Samariens, welche heisst
Sichar = Then cometh he to a city of Samaria, which is called
Sy! char.
Luke 22019 gwai na tkamauya gu ginamtk ga did gwashim =
dies ist mein Leib, welcher fur euch dahin gegeben wird = This is my
body which is given for you
Luke 23027 adatlry7gut ga w7wilhelgiat ga dilth han-a".nak ga, gri
ga baugut ga... = es folgten ihm viel Volk nach und Weiber, welche
weinten... = And there followed him a great company of people, and
of women, who [[King James which]] also bewailed and lamented him.
B. Adverbial Clauses, Conjunctives
L Indefinite Joining By Means Of ada
[[see # 207]]
# 319. The conjunction "ada" is by far the most common [[and]]
as indefinite as "maka" of the Malayans, "war of the Semites, [[and]]
!land then" in the tales of children.
It indicates neither temporal, nor causative or other sequences,
but only the stringing together of thoughts
Matt. 9g8 ada lthat nTsht ga wilhelgiat ga, ada lihasht ga, adat
lthaudish ga Shimoigiat ga Laka-ga = und das Volk sah es und es
filrchtete sich und lobte Gott (als das Volk... ) = and the people saw it
and were afraid and glorified God [[when the people ..]] [[King James
But when the multitudes saw it, they marvelled, and glorified God]].
Matt. 9,25 ada ltha kshauguntk gish ga giat ga, ada wil efint
ga, adat ga gash ga anont ga; ada wil ginrat gish ga lthgwa hank ga =
(und) als das Volk ausgetrieben war, (und) da ging er hinein, und er
griff sie bei der Hand; (und) da stand das Mg.dchen auf = [[and]] when
200
the people were drawn out, [[and]] then he went in, and he seized her
by the hand; [[and]] then the girl stood up. [[King James; But when
the people were put forth, he went in, and took her by the hand, and
the maid arose. 1]
IL Temporal Joining
# 320. dha at the beginning of the main clause awakens
expectation for an unforseen event or accidental encounter and makes
the description livelier.
[[see # 207; correction according to # 207, to The Glossary"
(Tsimshian-German), and to footnote 8 of Language Sample IV; dlig.;
see also # 244]]
Matt. n20 ada ash ltaIksh.g.agaud ga gwa, dha, alridTga na
angelsh ga MTy-gn ga... = and als er solches im Innern erwog, da
erschien der Engel des Herrn... = and when he pondered such things
to himself, at that time an angel of the Lord appeared... [[King
James; But while he thought on these things, behold the angel of the
Lord appeared... ]].
Matt. 2;19 ada ltha al zaksh Herod, dha alala" ga angelsh ga
MryTn... = als aber Herodes gestorben war, da erschien der Engel
des Herrn... = but when Herod was dead, at that time an angel of the
Lord appeared... [[King James: But when Herod was dead, behold,
an angel of the Lord appeared... ]].
Matt 28g11 wai lthag.adoultht ga, dha, habash ga nagazToush ga
na lTithkshit ga zulzap ga... = als sie aber hingingen, siehe, da
kamen einige von den H&ern in die Stadt... = but when they went,
behold, at that time a few of the guard came into the city... [[King
James; Now when they were going, behold, some of the watch came
into the city... ]J.
Mark 14;3 ada astir dliat gish ga Bethany ga, zum Walpsh Simon
ga leper ga, ashi-dha gish ga wil y-gwuk gut ga, dha, _gpiduk.sh ga
201
gault ga hanak ga = und als er in Bethanien war, in dem Hause Simons,
des Aussgtzigen, als er zu Tische sass, da gerade kam ein Weib =
and when he was in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, when he
sat at the table, just then a woman came [[King James: and being in
Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, as he sat at meat, then came
a woman... ]].
Mark 14:43 whahTyash ga houit ga, dha goiduksh gut Jesus ga...
= nicht lange darauf, als er noch redete, da kam Jesus... = not long
afterwards when he was still talking, at that time Jesus came...
[[King James: And immediately, while he yet spake, cometh Judas]].
Luke 24:36 ada ashT hahouit ga gwa, dha, al sha lip haitk ga
gish ga shpagait ga = und als sie noch davon redeten, da trat er selbst
mitten unter sie = and as they still spoke of it, at that time he himself walked in the midst among them [[King James: And as they thus
spake, Jesus himself stood in the midst of them... 1].
Luke 11:37 wai ashT algiakt ga, dha, haitk gish ga gault ga
Pharisee gish ga = NAThrend er aber noch im Sprechen war, da rief
ihn ein Pharisger... = but while he still was speaking at that time a
Pharisee called him... [[King James: And as he spake, a certain
Pharisee besought him...1].
ash and the stronger ashT express that which takes
place simultaneously [[see # 207]]:
Matt. 25:10 ada ashT.gadoultht gish ga dumt gTukt ga, dha, al
goiduksh ga shanakshit ga = und als sie hingingen, urn zu kaufen, da
kam der Bria'utigam = and when they went to buy, at that time the
bridegroom came]].
Matt. 26:47 ada ash!' a'algiakt ga, guksheina ga, .goiduksh
Judas ga = und als er noch redete, siehe, da kam Judas... = and when
he still spoke, behold, at that time Judas came [[King James: And
while he yet spake, lo, Judas one of the twelve came... ]].
# 321.
202
Matt. 9:27 ada ash-it "idukt gut Jesus ga, adatliyEkut ga
unshum yrita ga... = und wNlarend Jesus von
dupkadFlt ga
dannen ging, folgten ihm zwei Blinde nach = and while Jesus went
from that place, two blind men followed him [[King James: And when
Jesus departed thence, two blind men followed him... 1].
Luke 17:14 ada ltha wilt ga, ashihriwaluksht ga, dha
shikshakshintk = und es geschah, wahrend sie hingingen, wurden sie
rein = and it came to pass, while they went, they became clean [[King
James: And it came to pass, that, as they went, they were cleansed]].
John 9:1 ada ashr yryat ga, adat nTsh ga gault ga yFta ga... =
and wghrend er vortiberging, sah er einen Mann = and while he passed
by, he saw a man [[King James: And as Jesus passed by, he saw a
man... ]].
Mark 1:16 ada astir y-gt gish ga zozash ga akshum Galilee ga,
adat nTsh Simon ga dish Andrew ga... = und w &hrend er lg.ngs des
Galilaischen Meeres hinging, sah er Simon und Andreas... = and
while he went along the Sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew.
[[King James: Now as he walked by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon
and Andrew... 1].
# 322. ltha signifies that which is completed and lasts or con-
tinues [[see # 282 and # 283]];
wil [[signifies]] that which has just made itself manifest [[see
# 282]];
[[and]] dum [[signifies]] that which is subsequent, no matter
whether starting from a present or past point of time, [[and]] conceived of as imminent [[see # 273]].
I feel justified only in referring to # 285 in the case of na, since
sufficient [[information]] already is imparted there.
[[Note especially # 131 under "Independent Formatives,
Auxiliaries of Time and of Modality" for a discussion of the four
203
formatives collectively; see # 207 for ltha, wil, and dum defined as
conjunctions. ]]
[[The]] following examples may serve as illustration:
a) examples of ltha and wil:
John 20:22 ada ltha houit ga gwa, ada wilt... = und als er
dieses gesagt hatte, da... = and when he had said this, then...
[[King James: And when he had so said, he shewed...]]
John 20:2 lthat kshagash da MTy'gn ga... = sie haben
herausgenommen den Herrn... = They have removed the Lord [[King
James: They have taken away the Lord]].
John 7:10 ada lthat bakhapt ga waikiat ga wil lualgiat ga, ada
= und als seine Brilder zu dem Feste hinaufgegangen waren,
da... = and when his brothers had gone up to the festival, then...
[[King James: But when his brethren were gone up, then.. ]].
= als sie aber es
John 8:9 ada lthat nakriFit ga, ada
hOrten, da... = But when they heard it, then... [[King James: And
they which heard it, being convicted... ]1.
John 14:29 dum wil gashimhoudiksha shim, da zidg ltha wait =
auf dass ihr glaubet, wenn es geschehen ist = so that you believe when
it has come to pass. [[King James: when it is come to pass, ye might
believe. ]]
Luke 4:42 ada ltha zi.irshta ga, ada
= als es aber Tag
geworden, da... = but when it became day, then... [[King James:
And when it was day, he departed... 1].
Luke 17:15 ada ltha nrsht ga gault ga ltha dimautkshit ga = und
als er sah einen, der gesund geworden war = and when he saw one
who had become healed [[King James: And one of them, when he saw
that he was healed... 1].
Luke 7:4 ada lthagutgoiduksht gish Jesus, ada
und als
sie zu Jesu kamen, da... = and when they came to Jesus, then...
204
[[King James: And when they came to Jesus, they besought him... ]1.
Luke 7:1 lthat shadalfish ga tkgnish ga nahouit gish ga zum
.g.a,zumUsh ga giat ga ada wilt zTint gish ga Capernaum ga = nachdem er
alles ausgeredet hatte vor den Ohren der Menschen, da ging er
hinein nach Capernaum = after he had finished speaking before the
ears of the people, then he went into Capernaum. [[King James: Now
when he had ended all his sayings in the audience of the people, he
entered into Capernaum. 1]
(Note the difference between ltha and wil in the last two
examples !)
Luke 2:4 ada wil di doulthsh Joseph ga... = da machte sich
auch auf Joseph... = then Joseph also went up from... [[King James:
And Joseph also went up from... 1].
Luke 2:7 ada wilt da,gpiduksh ga... = und sie gebar... = and
she brought forth....
Luke 2:40 ada wil bash ga lthquaumlthk gaga und es wuchs das
Kind = and the child grew....
Mark 15:33 ada wil shgFutk = da trat die Finsternis ein = then
darkness entered [[King James: there was darkness... ]1.
Mark 15:36 ada wil bash ga gault ga = da lief Einer = then one
ran [[King James: And one ran... ]].
b) examples of dum:
Luke 17:6 ada n'dumt waran shimt = und er wird euch gehorsam
sein = and it will be obedient to you. [[King James and it should
obey you. ]1
Mark 14:28 dum ksh.g.au.ganu da gwashim a Galilee = ich werde
vor euch hingehen in Galilga = I will go before you into Galilee.
John 8:21 ada dum drishim = und ihr werdet sterben = and you
will die [[King James: I go my way, and ye shall seek me, and shall
die in your sins... ]1.
205
John 3:30 dum,g.up tkuliy7 ga, ada al dum shay-Syut = in
Zukunft muss er wachsen und ich aber werde abnehmen = In the
future he must increase, and I will decrease [[King James: He must
increase, but I must decrease]].
# 323. zida appears in subordinate clauses whenever the future
or a future expression is used in the main clause. zida gives notice
that the action of the subordinate clause took place or is taking place
prior to or along with the beginning of the action in the main clause.
[[see # 207]]
Luke 12:11 ada zida lthat dahaba shima synagoguesit... gilau
za akabagushk ga shim = wenn sie euch aber fahren werden in ihre
Schulen, ... so sorget nicht (Man vergleiche im Lateinischen cum,
ubi primum -) = and when they will bring you to the synagogues...
then don's worry [[compare in Latin cum, ubi---primum---. 1] [[King
James: And when they bring you into the synagogues... take ye no
thought... ]].
Luke 12:37 g_umgault walsh ga tkulhilkw;ulimlthk gaga, CI zida
ltha goiduksh ga mi7ya-n ga, ada dumt wash ga wil ilrlthkshit ga = selig
sind die Knechte, die der Herr, wenn er kommt, wachend finden wird
= Blessed are those servants, whom the lord, when he cometh shall
find watching.
Mark 10:34 ada zida ltha gwun sha dit, ada dum gik giniatk gut
ga = und wenn der dritte Tag da ist, wird er wieder auferstehen = and
when the third day is here, he will rise again [[King James: and the
third day he shall rise again]].
Matt. 13:49 ninT dum w-a-1 da da: zida ltha shaba harizoka = also
wird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt da ist = so shall it be, when
the end of the world is here. [[King James: So shall it be at the end
of the world. ]]
206
# 324. hi, previously mentioned [[in]] # 115 [[and # 207]],
designates simultaneous action or action which follows immediately
(soon, as soon as):
Mark 9:15 ada shim hit nTsht ga wilhelgiat ga, ada shalidukshk
gut ga = und sobald als das Volk ihn sah, da entsetzten sie sich = and
as soon as the people saw him, then they were amazed [[King James:
And straightway all the people, when they beheld him were greatly
amazed...1].
John 11:20 adat hit naknFit gut Martha ga, ltha dumzpiduksh
Jesus ga, ada doultht gish gut ridaltk gut ga = und sobald Martha es
hOrte, dass Jesus kommt, geht sie ihm entgegen = and as soon as
Martha heard that Jesus was coming, she went toward him [[King
James: Then Martha, as soon as she heard that Jesus was coming,
went and met him... ]].
# 325. hig.auk = before, previously (hi -g.auk) [[see # 324,
# 197]]:
John 10:40 ada wilt gik zaush ga nadau gish ga Jordan ga,
wil baptizet gut John ga giat ga hTgauk ga = und er zog wieder hin
jenseit des Jordan an den Ort, wo Johannes getauft hatte die Menschen
vorher = and he went again across the Jordan to the place where John
had previously baptized the people [[King James: And went away again
beyond Jordan into the place where John at first baptized]].
John 16:4 ada althga na houT a gwai a gwashim alth hikauk = und
nicht habe ich euch solches gesagt vorher = and I have not said such
things to you before [[King James: And these things I have said not
unto you at the beginning]].
# 326. gilwil = before, previously:
John 1:30 Loiduksha gaul da da giada da tkulg:nri gu yag.ai gilwil
kshzauga dida. goi = es kommt ein Mensch nach mir, welcher aber
vor mir da war = a man cometh after me who was there before me
207
[[King James: After me cometh a man which is preferred before
me]].
John 20:4 adat gilwil bat da gaul da disciple dat Peter ga = und
zuvor lief der andere Jager (schneller als) dem Petrus = and the
other disciple ran before [[faster than]] Peter [[King James: and the
other disciple did outrun Peter]].
# 327. "after" [[ nachdem]] is the introductory clause [[subordinate]] can be expressed through the joining of ltha plus zpudi (# 283):
Mark 15:20 ada ltha zpudrsh gut haiy-Furt da, adat shadoz.ash ga
gwishgwashk gut gish nTat = und nachdem sie ihn verspottet hatten,
zogen sie ihm den Purpur aus = after they had mocked him, they took
the purple off him [[King James: And when they had mocked him, they
took off the purple from him]].
# 328. In addition, shLabo (compare # 284) appears with
perfective meaning:
Mark 6:44 ada sh.g.ab-O-sh ga na t'in gapsh ga... = und die gegessen hatten... = who had eaten [[King James: And they that did eat]].
Mark 2:4 ada ltha lthgukshk gish ga dumt gwun dag.audit gish ga
aw-it ga ash ga sh.gabUsh ga giat ga... = und als es unmOglich war,
ihn zu ihm hinzubringen bei der Ueberft!ille des Volkes = and when it
was impossible for him to draw near to him with the crowd of people
[[King James: And when they could not come nigh unto him for the
press]].
Note: lugwil also may indicate completion; compare # 136.
# 329. nitkula-nt, n'tkulgn gwa = thereafter [[with past]], from
now on [[hereafter with present]], (in enumeration) finally:
John 3:22 n'tkulan gwa, ada wilgoiduksh Jesus ga dTlth na
disciples gut gish ga lakyZibum Judea ga = darnach kamen Jesus und
seine Anger in das jadische Land = thereafter Jesus and his disciples
came to the land of the Jews [[King James: After these things came
208
Jesus and his disciples into the land of Judaea]].
Matt. 25:11 n'tkulant ga ada wil digutgoiduksh ga na,g.az-ioush ga
whaz,ulgiatgum hananak ga = zuletzt kamen auch die anderen Jungfrauen (Aufzghlung) = finally the other virgins came also [[enumeration]] [[King James: Afterward came also the other virgins]].
# 330. "from that time on" or (more emphatically) "from this
moment on" = wil w7..tk... or nTriTsh ga wil w"aTtk...
Matt. 4:17 ninTsh ga wil w3.tk gish ga gwilthm-alshk gish Jesus
ga = von dieser Zeit predigte Jesus umher = from that time Jesus
preached all around [[King James: From that time Jesus began to
preach]].
Matt. 16:21 ada wil Watk gish gat gwunrazunt gish ga disciples
gut ga... = von der Zeit an zeigte er seinen JUngern... = from that
time on Jesus showed to his disciples... [[King James: From that
time forth began Jesus to shew unto his disciples.... 1].
Matt. 26:16 ada wil wItk gish ga dumt
= and von der
Zeit an suchte er... = from that time on he sought... [[King James:
From that time he sought... ]].
"from now on" (Matt. 23:29) watk ga dada-. graFn; ( "from
now on ": compare # 135) [[see also # 158]]:
[[Matt. 23:39 Awil houyia. da gwashim, Wak ga dada. 016-n,
althga ma dum shim gik nTzT, wazait dum wil hou shim, Gumgaulth
w-alsh ga g-ugoidukshit gish ga na wash ga Mry7n ga. = Denn ich sage
# 331.
euch: Ihr werdet, mich von jetzt an nicht sehen, bis ihr sprecht:
Gelobt sei, der da kommt im Namen des Herrn! = For I say unto you,
Ye shall not see me henceforth, till ye shall say, Blessed is he that
cometh in the name of the Lord. ]]
# 332. am shzanak (sligunak) = after a little while, after a
short while, a short time afterward:
209
Mark 14:70 am shganakt ga, ada gik housh ga gwunmakshk gut
gish Peter = nach einer kleinen Wei le sprachen abermals zu Petrus,
die dabei standen = a short time afterward, those standing close by
spoke again to Peter [[King James: And a little while after, they that
stood by said again to Peter]].
Matt. 26:39 ada wil am shgunaksh ga wil ya-t ga... = und eine
kleine Wei le ging er... = and he went a short while... [[King James:
And he went a little farther... ]].
Mark 1:19 ada ltha am shganaksh ga wait ga adat nTsh James
ga... = und nach einer kleinen Wei le kam er und sah Jacobus = and
after a short while he came and saw James [[King James: And when
he had gone a little while farther thence, he saw James]].
Mark 2:1 ada ltha gik zrnt gish ga Capernaum ga ada ltha am
shganakt ga = und wieder ging er hinein nach Capernaum nach einer
kleinen Wei le = and after a little while he again went into Capernaum
[[King James: And again he entered into Capernaum after some
days]].
# 333. wagait dum (wil) = until [[see # 207]]:
Luke 19:13 nahriwaTIat shimit wagait dum wil gpidukshrit =
handelt, bis dass ich wiederkomme = act until I come again [[King
James: Occupy till I come]].
Matt. 2439 ada althgat wilait wagait wil goiduksh ga gTtk gish
ga aksh ga = und sie wussten es nicht, bis die Sintfluth kam = and they
knew it not until the flood came.
# 334. ltha nak (ga) = after a long time, for a long time
(compare # 314):
Matt. 25:19 ltha nakt ga ada wil goiduksh ga MryFrish ga
tkulhilkwaulimlthk gaga... = nach langer Zeit, da kam der Herr der
Knechte... = After a long time the lord of those servants cometh.
210
John 5:6 lthat nrsht gut Jesus ga wil shg'aut ga, adat wilaish ga
ltha naksh ga da wilt ga... = als Jesus ihn liegen sah und vernahm,
dass es schon lange der Fall ware... = when Jesus saw him lie and
understood that he for a long time the case had [[King James: When
Jesus saw him lie, and knew that he had been now a long time in that
case... ]].
# 335. hawalthk = not yet, before [[see # 207, # 266]]:
John 13:38 shimhou, shimhou, houyil da-gwan, hawalthk ga za
algiaklth zouz, ada gwili ma dum ksh-gnzout = wahrlich, wahrlich, ich
sage dir, ehe der Hahn krght, wirst du mich dreimal verrathen =
Truly, truly I say unto you, before the cock crows, you will betray
me three times [[King James: Verily, verily, I say unto thee, The
cock shall not crow, till thou hast denied me thrice]].
Luke 2:21 ada ltha liihoigiaksh ga yrikla a sh-5, dit ga dum dat
circumciseish ga lthquaumlthk gaga, adat Jesus gut shuwgdit ga,
n'lthat sh-awrdit ga angel gish ga hawalthk ga shid-atk ga dash ga zum
nashei lumlth gaga = und als acht Tage vergangen waren, dass das
Kind beschnitten wurde, da erhielt es den Namen Jesus, genannt von
dem Engel, bevor es im Mutterleibe empfangen wurde = and when
eight days were accomplished for the circumcising of the child, his
name was called JESUS, which was so named of the angel before he
was conceived in the womb.
# 336. [[This word]] hawe-nilth, hawe-nith, is related in sound
and meaning to hawalthk [[see # 207, # 267]]:
Mark 8:17 wagait haw-71171th ma shim wilai dT. ? = vernehmet
ihr noch nichts... ? = perceive ye not yet..
John 4:49 Mry-in, yagai goidukshin haw-enith zaga ltheilthk giT =
Herr, komme herab, ehe mein Kind stirbt = Sir, come down before
my child dies [[King James: Sir, come down ere my child die. ]]
211
III. Reason, Purpose
# 337. The final clause in sentences of reason and purpose is
introduced by gun [[see # 207]]:
Mark 4:37 ... adat oit ga .gaup ga agw7kshau ga, gun ltha sha
holtk gut ga = ...und er (der grosse Windwirbel) warf die Wel len in
das Schiff, also dass es volt wurde = ... and it [[the large whirlwind]]
threw the waves into the ship, so that it became full.. [[King James:
And there arose a great storm of wind, and the waves beat into the
ship, so that it was now full. ]]
Mark 15:5 ada gik wagait althga dTlamak gish Jesus; gun shimt
lirshg.nalthk gut Pilate ga = und Jesus antwortete nichts welter, also
dass sich Pilatus sehr verwunderte = But Jesus yet answered nothing;
so that Pilate marvelled.
John 6:6 dumt shpaltg.aud ga gun houit ga gwa = um ihn zu
versuchen, deshalb sagte er dieses (weil er ihn versuchen wollte... )
= to test him, therefore he said this [[because he wanted to test
him... ]] [[King James: And this he said to prove to him... 1].
John 8;45 ada wil houyu da shimhou dit, gun althga shimhoudikshim 7. goi = und ich sage die Wahrheit, deshalb glaubt ihr mir nicht
(weil ich... ) = and I tell you the truth, consequently you don't believe
me [[because I... ]] [[King James: And because I tell you the truth ye
believe me not]].
John 13:29 17.wil nagazTout ga haligagaudit, gish ga wilt Judas
gut in habaulshk ga gw.gulth ga, gun housh Jesus gish niat... = denn
einige meinten, weil Judas den Beutel bei sich trug, deshalb sprache
Jesus zu ihm... = For a few thought because Pilate had the bag, for
that reason Jesus had spoken to him... [[King James; For some of
them thought because Judas had the bag, that Jesus had said unto
him]].
212
Matt. 13:2 ada shagait y7sh ga wi wilhelgiat gish ga awat ga,
guna mok gut gish ga zum agwThshau ga... = and zusammen stro"mte
viel Volk hin zu ihm, also dass er in ein Schiff trat... (weil...
deshalb) = and together many people flocked to him, so that he entered
a ship... [[because... for that reason]] [[King James: and great
multitudes were gathered together unto him, so that he went into a
ship... ]].
Matt. 8:28 11:15.1tk gut ga dupkad751t ga lialthaultk gish ga hadak
gut ga halik... , shimgul shikshtfel ga, Lun althgat na. tin y gish ga
gaina ga = es kamen ihm entgegen zwei von bOsen Geistern
Besessene..., sehr grimmig, also dass Niemand auf der Strasse ging
= there came toward him two possessed with evil spirits... very
fierce, so that no one went in the street [[King James: there met him
two possessed with devils, coming out of the tombs, exceeding fierce,
so that no man might pass by that way]].
# 338. nini gun and nini gwai .gun are more emphatic [[than
gun]] (compare nini # 57, # 58):
John 8:47 nini gwai ma gun shim wha naknTO dit, awil althga
amya shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakaga = darum hOret ihr nicht, denn
ihr seid nicht von Gott = ye therefore hear them not because ye are
not of God.
John 15:19 al wil yag,ai althga halizo.galth nhawi:1 da gwashim,
nan am kshanaknr shim da halizogut, nTrift g.un libaluksha shim
halizogut = aber ihr seid nicht von der Welt, sondern ich habe euch
von der Welt erwahlet, darum hasst euch die Welt (well... ) = But you
are not of the world, but I have chosen you from the world, for that
reason the world hates you [[because...]] [[King James: but because
ye are not of the world, but I have chosen you out of the world, therefore the world hateth you]].
213
John 19:11 althga n'dum shgriilth gutgiacrg, gwan "a- ma dum
libiltw7ltk girt, ami n'za wha ginamtk ga crg, gwan watk gut gish ga
lak-gga: ninTzun yagai gawirgksha hadak ga
dazaudir da gwan = du
wurdest nicht Macht haben, gegen mich zu handeln, wenn dir sie
nicht gegeben ware vom Himmel; deshalb aber hat der grOssere
Slide, der mich dir Uberantwortet hat = you would not have power to
act against me if you were not given from heaven; for that reason he
who has delivered me has the greater sin [[King James: Thou
couldest have no power at all against me, except it were given thee
from above: therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the greater
sin]].
Mark 6:14 ltha gik ginTatk gish John Baptist da shpag.ait
= es ist wieder auferstanden Johannes der Tgufer aus
der Mitte der Todten, and darum... (weil... ) = John the Baptist has
risen from the midst of the dead and therefore... [[because...]]
[[King James; That John the Baptist was risen from the dead, and
therefore mighty works do... 1].
# 339. awil = for [[because]] [[see # 207]]:
Mark 13:7 awil dum zup wa1 di7ya gwa = denn es muss also
geschehen = for it must thus take place [[King James: for such things
must needs be]].
Mark 13:11 "gwil althgat nrishimlth alalgiagut, yagai Amt ga
Haik ga = denn nicht ihr seid es, die da reden, sondern der heilige
Geist ist es = for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost.
ada
John 6:55 17wil shimhoum wune-ya na shameyrit = denn die rechte
Speise ist mein Fleisch = for my flesh is the real nourishment [[King
James: For my flesh is meat indeed]].
# 340. dum = so that, in order to, in order that [[see # 207,
# 322E;
dum wha = so that... not, in order that... not [[see # 207]]:
214
John 6:29 gwai na halthalshash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakg.ga,. dum
shimhoudiksha shim dish prat gri na haizit ga = das ist das Werk
Gottes, dass ihr glaubet an den, den er gesandt hat = This is the work
of God, that ye believe on him whom he hath sent.
John 6:31 na ginamt ga anai ga watk gut gish ga lakes gish
dupniat ash ga dumt gapt ga = er gab Brod vom Himmel ihnen, um
davon zu essen = he gave them bread from heaven in order to eat of it
[[King James: He gave them bread from heaven to eat]].
John 14:13 nTnT dum walut, dum wil lthautk gish ga Nagw7t gish
ga Ltheilthk gaga = dieses will ich thun, auf dass der Vater geehret
werde in dem Sohne = This I want to do, so that the father be honored
in the son [[King James: that will I do, that the Father may be glorified in the son]].
John 16:1 gwai gau ltha houya da gwashim, dum wil wha
lthimLush_gpsh shimt = solches habe ich zu euch geredet, damit ihr
euch nicht grgert = Such things have I said to you so that you not be
provoked [[King James: These things have I spoken unto you, that ye
should no be offended]].
# 341. op za = in order that... not [[and]] seems to indicate
that something fearful should be prevented [[see # 207, # 269]]:
Luke 4 :10, 11 awil damtk ga dit, Dum haizumg.ut ga angels gut
ga wila want, a dumt habauldint ada zurrizalanon da dumt wil gwilth
mandukiagwunt, op za lip gwandumukshlth shTun alth ligi laup = denn
es stehet geschrieben: er wird befehlen seinen Engeln von dir, dass
sie dich bewahren and auf den Handen tragen, auf dass du nicht etwa
deinen Fuss an einen Stein stosset = for it is written: he will command his angels to keep you and to bear you in their hands in order
that you not by chance strike your foot against a stone [[King James:
Luke 4:10 For it is written, He shall give his angels charge over
thee, to keep thee:
215
Luke 4:11 And in their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at
any time thou dash thy foot against a stone]].
Luke 5:37 ada althgat nest in ltigushzuzilth shu wine alth zum
lthg,z.uldum wine op zit* ghaklthrawun dalth shif winelth wilu
gingiant... = und Niemand fasset jungen (neuen) Wein in alte Weinbehglter, auf dass nicht der gunge Wein die alten Schl'Auche
zerreisst... = and no one puts young [[new]] wine in old containers,
in order that the young wine not rupture the old leather bottles...
[[King James: And no man putteth new wine into old bottles; else the
new wine will burst the bottles... 1].
IV. Condition
# 342. amT expresses the real condition [[as opposed to the
unreal]] [[see # 207]]:
John 15:6 amT ligit na- wha liihokshk ga dida goi, shamakshit
nTw-a71da anTshit, ada dhudridit = wenn Jemand nicht in mir bleibet, der
wird weggeworfen wie eine Rebe und verdorret = if anyone does not
abide in me, he is cast away like a vine and withers [[King James: If
a man abide not in me, he is cast forth as a branch and is withered]].
Mark 11:31 arnr dum houm lake wil w'S.tk ga dit; ada dum hou
dit... = wenn wir sagen werden, sie (die Macht) ist vom Himmel, so
wird er sagen... = if we will say, it [[the authority]] is from heaven,
then he will say [[King James: If we shall say, From heaven; he will
say]].
Matt. 8:31 amTlth ma kshaliFunum, hashhaizuma za dup zilum
haba wilshazaitdFltha gwashaut = wenn du uns austreiben willst, so
schicke uns, hineinzugehen in die Heerde Sue = if you will drive us
out, then send us into the herd of swine [[King James: If thou cast
us out, suffer us to go away into the herd of swine]].
op zit appears to be only a phonetic variation of op zat.
216
# 343.
Through [[the]] addition of tlfiza" to "amr, 70 the condition
is expressed as indefinite and consequently put into the ideal sphere
(unreal and potential condition) [[see # 207th
John 839 amT na za kithgiT.sh Abraham -a" gwashim, na dum
halthal da shim na halthalshash Abraham = wenn ihr die Kinder
Abrahams wg*ret, so wtIrdet ihr thun die Werke Abrahams = if you
were Abraham's children, then you would do Abraham's works [[King
James If ye were Abraham's children, ye would do the works of
Abraham]].
John 8042 amr na za nagw7.t shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-gga,
na ma dum shim shTebuniit = wenn euer Vater Gott ware, so wiirdet
ihr mich lieb haben = if your father were God, then you would love me
[[King James If God were your Father, ye would love me]].
Mark 1240 amT ma za anaukt, da'aklthkgun ma dum shakshanil
= wenn du willst, so kannst du mich wohl reinigen = if you want, then
you can cleanse me [[King Jamesg If thou wilt, thou canst make me
clean]].
Matt. 2704O amiza Lthg7lthk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak"Ega gwan,
tikiy3:n a lak guz-Szut = wenn du Gottes Sohn bist, so steige herab vom
Kreuz = if you are the son of God, then climb down from the cross
[[King James if thou be the Son of God, come down from the cross]],
# 344, gin indicates that the opposite of the factual is
assumed (compare # 135) [[see # 207]]0
Matt. 6g1 ama nidum wha wwlshim da na ama halthalsh shimt
hazazaklthk ga giadit, dumt am wilt nTsh ditg ain gin zat ksht-a'un shim
ga Nagw7t shim ga zum lak-aga = hiitet euch, dass ihr nicht Almosen
gebet vor den Leuten, so dass sie es gut seheng nicht hgttet ihr (in
diesem Falle, angenommen, ihr thgtet es... ) Lohn bei euerm Vater
im Himmel = take care that you do not give alms in front of the people,
so they see itg you would not have [[in this case assumed you would do
217
it]] reward of your Father in heaven. [[King Jame
Take heed that
ye do not your alms before men, to be seen of them.. otherwise ye
have no reward of your Father which is in heaven]].
Mark 1L19 amiza zaklth waikia giadit, ada za al gina dido-lsha
nakshdit.
dumt ga da walk da naksh dit = wenn der Bruder eines
Menschen sterben und aber sein Weib leben solite so soil der
Bruder nehmen sein Weib = if the brother of a man die and his wife
should live.. then the brother shall take his wife [[King James If
a man's brother die, and leave his wife behind him, and leave no
children, that his brother should take his wife]].
# 345. To note briefly here, dependent conditional clauses,
also, by preference appear formulated as relative clauses.
Matt 5g31 ligit na dumt in shamaga naksh dit, am dumt ginam
sh75-rishgum bashuk ga dash nTat = wenn Jemand sich von seinem
Weibe scheidet so soil er geben ihr einen Scheidebrief = if someone
separates himself from his wife, then he shall give her a letter of
separation [[King James Whosoever shall put away his wife, let him
give her a writing of divorcement]].
Matt. 10° 14 ada ligit na t'in wha anauk shim,
shadod7 gaum
da g.ashashr shimt = und wenn Jemand nicht aufnimmt euch, ... so
schi.ittelt den Staub von euren Filssen = and if anyone does not receive
you, ...then shake the dust from your feet [[King James? And whosoever shall not receive you, . shake off the dust of your feet]],
Luke 9A8 ligit tia7dumt in anauga lthquaumlthk ga gwa
zurn
wayut nayir anauga dit; adat ligit na dumt in anaugout,
= wenn
Jemand di.eses Kind aufnehmen wird in meinem Namen, so nimmt er
mich auf und wenn Jemand wird mich aufnehmen = if someone will
receive this child in my name, then he receives me also, and if
someone will receive me... [[King James Whosoever shall receive
,
218
this child in my name receiveth me; and whosoever shall receive
me... ]].
V. Concessive
# 346. z7, zh7 (= although, even if, even though) is the sole
conjunctive occurring in the concessive introductory clause. The
final clause has no corresponding particle. [[like German so or
English then If anyone... , then he.... ]] [[# 207]]
Mark 1618 ...ada z7dumt aksha hadazum gaut, ada althga
dum ligit hanwirggwut = und wenn sie auch etwas Schlechtes trinken
sollten, so wt;.rde es ihnen doch nicht schaden = and even if they
should drink something bad, then it would not harm them [[King
Jameso and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them]].
Matt. 26g60 ada althgat W5t, zo withe-1 ga .g.abigum mag.aunshk
gut ga Lutzpidukshit ga = und sie fanden keins, wiewohl viele falsche
Zeugen herzutraten = and they found none, although many false witnesses came [[King James But found none yea, though many false
witnesses came, yet found they none]].
Matt. 1313 awil zho nakriTizk ga dit, ada althgat nTsht; ada zho
naknOksh dit ada althgat nakrroit = denn obwohl sie sehen konnen, so
sehen sie doch nicht, und obwohl sie hOren kOnnen, so hOren sie doch
nicht = for although they can see, then they do not see, and although
they can hear, then they do not hear [[King Jameso because they seeing see not; and hearing they hear not]].
John 4e2
althga dit lip baptize a dit Jesus, amuksha na
disciples gut ga
obgleich Jesus nicht selbst taufte, sondern
seine Anger = ... although Jesus himself baptised not, but his disciples.
219
Appendix
Language Samples
220
Since an ample number of examples from the Gospel translations
have already been given in the preceding grammar, I would like to
include here now the samples of text which were sent to me for my
use by Mr. Boas. (Language Samples I-IV). --- To this, I will add a
few portions from the Common Prayer (Language Sample V). The
latter follow the transcription of the Gospel translations while the
Boas material deviates in many respects.
Wulaqt1Vtk (where a misfortune happened
by a landslide), Inverness*.
Tla
Having
ga
left
KsiVnga
Skinar
wul
(past)
where
gasga
at
g'altga
of a certain
(Perfect)
asEhVntga.
nu
lat
they camp
Tla
T s'Emsiainga amia/t
gasga
the Tsimshian come from they from the
they make salmon.
gyVatsga;
there;
sEmIg/gyitga,
chief,
hVopEtga
night
Em
ada
and
g'a
And then for a while
Ada wul
the child
han-a-/aqsa
woman
gE/ga
sEmlEgyidahVwutga.
which
very he was particular whom
she should marry.
dak''aimdsen kq/EdEksga gVltga
a/m
comes
secretly
a certain nice
nVgasga tlgu7,/lksga.
And he goes
where lies
young
the chief's
daughter.
Compare the phonetic explanations placed at the beginning of
"The Glossary" with these language samples (from Boas). a
a sFpals Em'
iVotga.
man.
Adat
k4Asga wul
221
Ada
figlut
And
he says
gasga dEmt*
(?)
Adawul
kad-al/wutltga.
And then
they left.
de batga
with run him.
(elope with him).
And
Tlat
wasga
(Perfect) they having reached
and then he
tqal ha/yint
against makes her stand
tssVentga,
ada
he enters,
and
adawult
gasga
at
gye/laciga,
outside,
,
na'otga
(plural) his mother
dEp
say
ks'a
Then
out
his father:
otlga
run
tssE/lEm ctOloltga.
And then into
she accompanies them.
Adawult
asga
being
16-m5/msga
hearts.
in good
Kantlg/kga.
It is morning.
ki:VEdEksga
tlgua
come s
a little old person,
wudsagyaltga,
"F151/yetga
da
'She stands
at
tlemktT yetkgatga.
his sisters.
Adawul
tqYoqgatga
And then
they eat
Adawul
Then
KsEmwutssZ=7/enga
Female Mouse
Ada
ha. ut ga-L
"Tqevel
giantsem7Vnt!"
And
she says
"Burn
your earring here!" and
See # 340.
adaEl
but
and
(go for her sake),
Adawul
his house,
nuguVt:
nak'anuwa/n-e",
gya'larat,
CS/yaga.
outside here, " he replies.
nawa:Iptga,
dTs
nat?"
"Did not you (past) make work you my dear's?
"Ayentl
enVoatga.
she consents.
Adat
ada
wa/atga.
her name.
wa'lsga
she does so
222
tIguI'lksga;
the chiefs daughter;
daqtga
tlgua
asti
from fire she takes it the little
adaElwult
but then she
wud'Algyatga.
Adawul hVutgag
old person.
Then
she saysg
tEi/ngVdEnt ?I'
the taker of you here?"
"Ayent, "
"No, "
"DItl!
"My dear!
WureyeriZ,
do you know,
"HatsaerEldEt, "
she replies.
"The snail, "
lia/usga
KsEmwuts°Elengag
"Ndaiel
it said
the female mouse:
"Go!
otl,
wul
run,
where
gy'F'eqkEn!
run away!
dsoqs
stay
dEp
nEgug/dEn.
Da
(plural)
your parents.
Just
atlgE
not
nEsa/ba
na
visible
(past)
sti/op'El
back of house
NenVet1
13
y-O/kEn
baq
There is slime.
The same
in
go on road
up
ada mE
you
y'Vg e t !
over
go!
nEgu-a"IldEn
gyE/egEt.
parents
below. "
Sis
She pretends
And
atigE
waraida
not
far
ya kEn
walk on road
yaga.
liya4gEsEmt
you went (plural)
Ye/tlEt.
and
Ada
sEm- ba'sga tlguOilksga.
And very afraid the chief's daughter.
she answered.
who
dVyaga.
Ada
dO/yaga.
g75
ITen71 wul
It is where
.as,
go
downward.
sqan-j/esit
mountain that
ds/oqs
stay on beach
dEp
(plural)
wI/lesga tlgua'lksga.
And then she does the chief's daughter.
Adawul
rim
after a while
ksErgagal.
to go out
AdaElwu/1
But
batga.
she runs.
223
SEm- to
Exactly in
yaltgatga
she goes
Tlana/ksga
Having some time
(past)
waldga,
adawull
done so,
then
Adat
wul
wuralisga
And he
then
knows
hukh-Votkgasga
he called them
matldEsga tlgua
wudVgyatga.
she told
the little old person,
na
gua/desga
na'kstga.
he misses her her husband.
gy'Veqgatga.
she had escaped.
tqanVesga
all
rcilia/gEtga.
Tla
they pursue her.
(Perfect)
nE
his
saga /it
And then together
Adawult
ts'alptga.
great tribe.
wT
sEmt
exactly she
Adawul
Then
wItga
reaches
tlgua'lksga
sEm
laq'oisga s qane/isga,
the chief's daughter the very top
of the mountain,
qstVmEgga.
great noise.
nEgnaletga
wi
she hears
AdaEl
But
eilusga
ts'Et
And then she guesses they they
bat
And then down she runs
pursue her.
tralwula liaiusga
always
sounds
nevet s gEt ga:
rakstanVga !
she looks:
behold!
tlaloga;
landslide;
VI"
gasga
sqan-e/isga.
from
the mountain.
qstairnEciga;
great noise;
tla
(perfect)
kanka/nga liElnatga
trees
fall
just
Adawult
Adawu"la tgye
lOyalyet.
da
ada
gyilEks
and back
yikaya/sga
wT
down comes
great
a.da
wu/d
lEplVopga
and
great
rocks
2 24
gyikgya/gEltgatga.
roll down.
Adawu/1
ayawa/sga
Then
screamed
hanalaqga;
the woman;
ne-/ets ga
wul
dsoqs
dEp
nEgua/dga,
sees
where
stay
(plural)
her parents,
ts 'Em
gag,"5/5ditgasga
they finish (have gone) into
13k6 Em;
to go into canoe;
a/qtlgatga.
she succeeds.
gun
di
And then also towards (into)
Adawul
aphalyetget gasga
turns round
at
asgEt gun
she ordering
gaqs'a..VogE.
the canoes.
Adawul
131k6em
Then
go into
nEguaftga.
Matgaga,
adaEl
the canoe
of her father.
She is safe,
but
tIVosga
wi
where
great lands lide
gyilgs
nEknVetsgatga,
they look,
nE
wul
(past)
st)
whe re
rakstana/ga !
behold!
dso/qtga.
they had been.
Ada
And
wi hgfld Em hats' aE/rEltga
great many snails
wula
matltga tlguallksga
And then she tells the chief's daughter why
leanuwa/ltga.
make happen it.
wg!ltga.
it happened.
(perfect) she
qsialos
wul
back
tlat
A dawu
Ada
n'elnEtga
da
And
it is
at
Wulaqtl'ilotga wulawa/ldet.
Inverness
where it happened.
t-k-at.
Kanuw-aide
da
wul- q -t
It makes name
at
where landslide-misfortune happening.
225
PRAYER 1.
Neqno/q,
Neqno/q;
sEm'Vyits,
sEmlfyits !
Necinoq,
Neqnoq;
chief,
chief!
ramrVdEn!
have mercy!
tgye-
ne--/e
wal
tlErE/nt
nts'iiipEnt.*
Man
salikya
downward
look
doing
under you
thy people.
Up
pull
sVE nt
ada ma
thy foot,
and
off
ts'-int!
sweep thy face!
PRAYER 2.
Neqno/q,
Neqno/q;
sErn'glyits,
Neqnoq,
Neqnoq;
chief,
tEE/n
a yen
else nobody the one to
Neqnoiq!
Neqnoq!
sEm'Vyits !
chief!
ramrg/dEn!
have mercy!
qsEpei-61 nEksEn
tlE/rEnt!
make you receive smoke
under you!
ramra/dEn!
have mercy!
PRAYER 3.
Lo
Into
sVikya na k.sEn-a.itlgEnt,
thy breath,
draw
sErri'Vyit!
chief!
dEm
(future)
gya/kset!
it be calm!
Instead of n ts'apEnt, I hear also
nEsEgyatEnt = your people made by you.
[[italicized in Schulenburgr s Grammar]].
wul
that
226
Before dinner the Tsimshian burn some food as an offering for
Neqnoq. After having done so they pray
Wa,
sEm!Vyits!
There,
chief!
man
That is all left
Tawa
tlguan7e.
to your child.
dEm
(future)
abEn guaa
qpiy7
gaibEnme:E.
you eat this
part
of our food.
da
gua'a;
tawavl
Man
da
at
here;
that is all left
at
gua'a
here
G yr/EnEm !
Give us food!
Satirical Song, Mocking the Inhabitants of MEqtlakqatla
Emigrating with Mr. Duncan to Alasca.
1.
Oyeya, 3yeya, a.
Oyeya, ayeya, ae
Gyil'afdsE
Do not (future)
AtsEda
When you
2.
wigya'tgEn.
be you homesick.
lalyegEn,
will leave,
tsEda
suwYdEn.
when will be you a Tongas woman.
Oyeya, "Oyeya, a.
Oyeya, oyeya, a.
ME
You
di
warn ya wus
will only send a present also
tsE
Atl
gEn-e-Iguatl
Of
preserved berries kept in grease bay (sea -lion .guts)
ndE
sineksg,!k.
227
3.
Oyeya, Fyeya, Aa.
Oyeya, Oyeya, a.
Gyila
na
Do not
past
Caledonia.
Caledonia.
Because
gyinadta's
they left behind
Tlats3cle.
qgainEgEn.
When you
will have eaten rotten salmon heads.
Wul
4.
wi hafutgEn!
you cry!
Oyeya, 5yeya, a.
Oyeya, oyeya, a
GyilVna
Do not
GO'
Who
wa kVdEn da
be
foolish
lEbElt hglusEm da
against you talk the
Indian E1edzEn.
Indian Agent.
228
Footnote List for Language Sample I
a These
phonetic explanations are contained in the footnote at the
the bottom of page 201, the first page of "The Glossary" (TsimshianGerman). The footnote reads as follows.
Since I have included the small word-collection of Mr. Boas in
the following glossary, I would like also to mention his phonetic
explanation here
"The vowels have their continental sounds, namelyo a as in
father; e like a in mate; i as in machine; 3 as in note; u as in rule.
in addition the following have been used: a, o as in German; a = aw
in law; E = e in flower. "
"Among the consonants the following additional letters have been
g*, a very guttural g, similar to gr.; k, a very guttural k,
similar to kr; q, the German ch in Bach; H, the German ch in ich;
used
Q, between q and H; c = sh in shore; s = th in thin; tl an explosive,
dorso-apical 1; di a palatal, dorsal 1. (following a consonant
designates the u position of the organs of articulation. "
229
III.a
Tlguanaax
Ein Mg,dchen,
A girl,
tlguotlga sEmlyit
ein Kind eines liguptlings,
of a chief
a child
sa.
Tage.
day.
tqane
alle
every
always
hauktakt
ga
Und
ihr Bruder
Perfect nehmen seinen Bogen
And
he r b rothe r (perfect)
Futurum
s chie s s en
den Raben
(future)
to shoot
the raven
he
weint
crie s
nE
le-gaqt
er
immer
t lEmktTyet
g3
gyagadat
traf einmal
hit once
go
wThautga
Ada
dEm
t
tliwu la
to take
draussen.
outside.
kaaqat.
Ada
at1gE
sEmhlum
ts akt.
den Raben.
Und
nicht
ganz
todt.
the raven.
And
not
completely dead.
tsa walbEt.
ts"ElEm g.aat
er nimmt ihn in sein Haus.
Dann hinein
he takes him in his house.
Then into
Ada
ama
ot s gaa
tlEmktiyet,
seine Schwester,
ihr Herz
good her heart his sister,
gut
ts'ElEm gaatga
hinein
er nahm ihn
into
tla
Und Perfect
And (perfect)
Ada
gyalaqt.
atqa
his bow
he took him
Ada
wul
to
Und
dann
in
And
then
in
neEt
tsEda tla
Perfect sie sah ihn
als
(perfect) she saw him
as
tlEmktiyetga
ihr Bruder
kaaxat.
Ada
wul
den Raben.
Und
dann
her brother
the raven.
[[accusative]]
And
then
[[nominative]]
For atqa, Boas finds no explanation.
230
1-6
amsga
in
gut
in
good
wilpga,
dem Hause
the house
kaotgaa.
ihr Herz.
her heart.
adat
und sie
and she
/
kearne elEkta sga
Zusammen
Together
sie spielt /nit ihm in
she plays with him in
kiqpat
ksErtasga
sie geht hinaus
mitunter
sometimes she goes out to
/
wult
gErElgat gyik
wieder dann
Praeteritum einmal
again then
(Past)
once
NEsga
tsa
Si la
/
I
wult
gyEpaektga
Und
dann
And
then
er fliegt fort der Rabe.
he flies away the raven.
/
gyilaqga.
ksE rtgasga
sie ging hinaus draussen.
she went out to outside.
kaaqka.
Ada
gytlaqka.
draussen.
outside.
,
nestga
Ada
wul
Und
dann sie sieht es
then she sees it
And
[[nominative]]
tlEmktiyetga, ada wul
die Schwester, und dann
and then
the sister,
yaagatgaa,
sie folgt ihm,
she follows him,
nda
WO
where
[[nominative]]
wula gyEpaegasga
er fliegt
he flies
kgaqka.
der Rabe.
the raven.
Adat
Und
And
yaagasga
dann sie folgt ihm
then she follows him
wul
[[nominative]]
nE
tqa1-L.ndat.
Ada
Prgter.
hinter ihm.
behind him.
Und
st)
(past)
And
ku5t1stakElian
sie sieht ihm nach
she looks him toward
sie ist hinter ihm
tlEmktiyetga
seine Schwester
she is behind him
his sister
taqaodasga
[[nominative]]
ndat
wo
where
tla naksga waltga.
einige Zeit lang.
for a time.
Adat
wul
Und
dann
And
then
231
wasga
sie findet es
she finds it
walpsga
das Haus
the house
lfaqka.
.4
miansga
ndaa
TsEda
der Herr
der Krthe.
where the master of the crow.
Als
wo
tseent
tlgu3t1gasga
Perf.
er geht hinein der Sohn
(perfect) he goes into
the son
As
miansga
des Herrn
der Kra:he,
of the master of the crow,
tla
[[nominative]]
kErEtaqsga
dann er fragt ihn
then he asks him
ada
and
wul
and
maata
"Warst du
"Atl
tlgu-Outlgat.g
seinen Sohn
his son,
[[accusative]]
"Were
Ada wul
daflEmaqtlgasga
aqtlkate"?2
erfolgreich"? Und dann er antwortete ihm
successful? " And then he answered him
you
tlgualgatga:
sein Sohn:
his son,
[[nominative]]
"Tqal
hayitktgada
gyalaqat".
Ada
wul
13
amsga
'Dagegen
"On the contrary
sie steht
she stands
draussen".
outside. "
Und
dann
in
gut
And
then
in
good
kact
nEguiat.
Ada
wul
hautgasga
Herz
se in Vater. .
Und
dann
And
then
er sagt zu
he says to his servants,
heart his father.
"Ts 'ElErn hFotktl"!
"'Hine in
Ada
wul
ruft sie"!
Und
dann
calls she !"
And
then
2alth ma da'aklthktTY
tgalwaalErnqtlgatga
seinen Dienern1
ksaoxasga
sie gehen hinaus
they go out
232
tqalwaalEmqtlgatga.
seine Diener.
Ada
Und
ts'ElEm st5ltgasgala
sie begleiten sie
dann hinein
his servants.
And
then
witp.
das Haus.
the house.
/
And
then
he lets her him marry
[[accusative]]
.
liEtlts gaa
gyilaqga...
er pas st auf
he pays attention
draus sen. .
outside
neetskatsgasgaa,
er blickt hindurch,
he looks throughout,
dann
And
then
.
/
Ada tkram 3
heimlich(?)
And secretly
Und
gyawunt.
Ada
wul
ts'ElEm
jetzt.
Und
dann
now.
And
then
hinein
into
ts rElEm
hinein
wo
where into
wul
his son.
[[accusative]]
bastgasga
Und er ftirchtet sich
And he is afraid
.
/
Und
.
Ada
tsa walpgaa.
dEm tseentgasga
das Haus.
in
urn hineinzugehen er
the house.
in
he
to go into
Unominativen
wul
leaqas ga
ein wenig offen
a little open
.
mEistaagaa.
ein Astloch.
a knothole.
tla
er sieht sie seine Schwester Perf.
(perfect)
he sees her his sister
neetsga
tlEmkti..tyetga
[[nominative]]
3
in
tlgu5t1gatgaa.
nakskentgasga
Adat wul
dann er lgsst sie ihn heirathen seinen Sohn.
Und
wul
Ada
in
they accompany her
into
kaedEksga tlEmkayetgaa.
ihr Bruder.
Und dann er kommt
her brother.
And then he comes
Ada
tsa
wul
If the t in tkl'am still belongs to ada, kam could be an
abbreviation of the otherwise frequently occurring gumzin = to be
"furtive. " [[Note difference in placement of diacritic' ]]
233
naksgatga
ihren Mann
her husband
[[ac cusativell
saga
Tage
days
kaaqkaa.
Ada
die Kr.glie.
Und
the crow.
And
skanaqst
wul
lange Zeit
long time
dann
then
seine Schwester,
his sister,
t'aoqtlk Em
vor Betrtbnis
for sorrow
mEla
beide
both
Ada
wul
er wartet
Und
damn.
he waits.
And
then
tqal
entgegen
fact to face
tlEmktTyetga,
.t
goupEl
wul gyapsga
Pe rfectum zwanzig
twenty
(perfect)
tla
waatgasga
sie findet ihn
she finds him
tlEmktTyetga:
seine Schwester:
his sister,
outside.
And
then
dann
er sagt
And
then
he says
dFlimgasga:
Und dann sie antwortet:
And then she answers,
Ada
tiky-eeqkEnt".
dEm
tsvikEn".
Futurum du stirbst"
you die. "
(future)
"Nda
I
dann
Und
hauktIktil.
den Bogen".
the bow. "
(na)
Und
weinen.
cry.
ErgasEn7...
Ich ftIrchte..
I fear
.nEitsEn
siehe
"see
draus s en.
hausga
Futurum Entfliehe.
"(Future) flee. "
.
wul
wul
ihr Bruder
her brother,
"No. "
Ada
Ada
"N°dErri
"Nein.
gyilaqga.
bg.k.
t1Errikti'yetgaa
"Ayin.
ksErsga
sie geht hinaus
she goes out
Iw
"Where
4ma, second person
wul
Ada wul:
Und dann:
And then,
Ada
wul
haus ga
Und
dann
And
then
sie sagt
she says
iFtlkEn
ada
gehe zurtIck and
and
go back
mg
4
du
you
dakgedEqs
bringe
bring
234
tqain7
g4ta
dEm
alle
all
Leute
people
(future)
Ada
wul
Futurum zusammen mit dir".
Und
dann
together with you. "
And
then
ietlgatgaasga
er geht zurtick
he goes back
sElawant".
awaasga
zu
nEguaatga.
seinem Vater.
his father.
to
nEguaatgag
matlgasga
er erza!hlt ihm seinem Vater:
his father,
he tells him
[[nominative]] [[dative]] [[dative]]
Adat
wul
Und
dann
And
then
tla
wa yE
Pe rf.
ich fand sie
I found her
(Perfect)
tlEmktiyo.
meine Schwe ste r.
Ada
tqane
gyata
dEm
Und
Leute
Futur.
my sister.
And
alle
all
ada
dEp dEm
and
wir
and
we
is akuat,
werden ihn todten,
him kill,
will
I
people
1
tqfne"
gya"tatasga
dann
alle
then
the y went
all
Leute
people
walqstgaa.
Einen weiten Weg sie gingen.
they went.
A long way
Naksk-cioil
haietgasga
es stand
it stood
5
walpsga
das Haus
the house
waluksh ga
begleiten mich,
(future) accompany me,
t lEmkt-iyF5.
... gaa
...nehmen meine Schwe ste r .
my sister.
to take
walqasga5
sie gingen
wul
st7513,
Ada
Und
And
sEkstFltTaa.
sie begleiten ihn.
they accompany him.
Adat
Und
And
sEm.yit
des Hguptlings,
of the chief,
wasga
dann sie fanden es
then they found it
wul
wul
wo
where
kaaqka.
miansga
des Raben.
des Herrn
of the master of the raven.
235
tqanetguatitlkta6
dann sie umringen es alle
then they surround it all
g4tat nokdonsga7
wul
Adat
Und
And
..t.
tlEmktiyesga
tseensga
Und dann er geht hinein der Bruder
the brother
And then he goes in
Ada
walpga
das Haus.
the house.
wul
hanaaqt.
tlgua
des (kleinen Weibes) Mg.dchens.
girl.
of the (little wife)
8
hakl'iosga
ringsum
people around
Leute
er tritt hinter
/
IK'.mtsEn ts eentgasga,
Heimlich er geht hinein,
he goes in,
Secretly
/
tlEmktryetga.
seine Schwester.
he steps behind his sister.
m-Stltga
Und
dann
And
then
er erzghlt ihr:
her,
he tells
gyilaqat.
ksErEn
gehe hinaus draussen.
Imperativ
"(Imperative) go out to outside.
wir werden niedergerissen haben Haus
house
torn down have
we will
ksErEsga
sie ging hinaus
she went out
6
7
hanaaqta.
die Frau.
the wife.
Adat
Und sie
And she
Ada
wul
Und
dann
then
And
walp
koai..1
as net
wul
"Amt'Et1
tla dEm
/
Adat
/
guaa
.
dieses".
this. "
Ada
wul
Und
dann
And
then
ksetqaia-guasga 9
nimmt ihn heraus (?)
takes him out (?)
[[accusative]]
tgwadaltk, # 119
noktVon- doesn't appear otherwise; a substantive in all
probability; should it perhaps be naqudZin?
8
hagau, # 198
9
perhaps ksha-tk7.-yak... out, completely, follows-- -she her
husband. [[See next page ]]
236
Ada
nakstga.
Und
ihren Mann.
And
her man.
[[accusative]]
wul
koa2. lasga
1ptgaa.
Ada
dann
reissen sie nieder das Haus.
Und
then
tear they down
the house.
And
wa_L
leaaqka...
des Raben...
Ada
wul
dann
miansgaa
ts 'akusga
sie tOdten ihn den Herrn
Und
dann
then
they kill him
the master
of the raven.
And
then
wul
h
n't'Emk'iustEt.
adat
gasga
nehmen seinen Kopf.
und sie
his head.
and they take
t'Emlane"
qts ak its En
sie schneiden ab seinen Hats
his neck
they cut off
sigEranot,
trocknen ihm,
Und sie
And they dry it,
Adat
datl
nEnsuwatga
adat
nennen ihn
und sie
and they call him
den
the
WilbatlkEtllaax.
Ada
wul
sarait
hLsga
gyatga
Skalpirten,
scalped one.
Und
dann
then
zusammen
sie sprechen
they speak
die Leute'g
A dEmt
Futurum
(Future)
And
together
naksga
wir tOdten den Mann
the husband
we kill
tsakusgaa
atlgaat
nicht sie (will es)
not she (wants it)
/
the people,
tlgua
der kleinen
hanaaggaa.
Ada
Frau.
Und
of the little
wife.
And
hfyetstEt.
die Frau Futur. sie schickt ihn fort.
the wife (future) she sends him away.
hanaaqt
dEmt
waldEt.
I\TFik'an
wihgidE
keal'aqk"a-i
gyawun.
er thut es.
he does it.
Allmlhlich
Gradually
viele
many
Raben
jetzt.
raven
now
Ada
Und
And
237
IV.
Die Wihalait.
The Wihalait [[Great Dance]]
Gye
Vor langer Zeit
A long time ago
atigE
nicht
not
twulait
sie wussten es
they knew it
2
Wihalait
tEtlgyatl
den grossen Tanz.
die vormals lebenden Menschen
the formerly living human beings the great dance.
3
qsqaneistEt
(ging) auf die Berge
(went) up the mountains
mountain goats.
n-elisga
2
Ein
Mann
One
man
t
wa
sqane-list
ada
wult
und dann
er fand den Berg,
Perf.
(Perfect) he found the mountain, and then
mEsicilla.
den weissen Baren.
er sah ihn
he saw him the white bear.
1=
i"OotEt
gO"
a dEmt
um (Futur. , Absicht) zu schiessen
order to shoot
in (future, intent)
Tla
mE'te.
Bergziegen.
GIErElt
ya/aka,
Adat
wul
Und er
dann er folgte,
then he followed,
And he
ada
und
and
lthagiat.
hala/it = to dance, wT = great, also: the great dance (in contrast to the ordinary dance: Shimhalait). Wihalait is often also
called Ola la. The three names Ola la, Niiiot lam and MElitla are loan
words, which are taken from the Kwakiutl language. The dance, and
the ceremonies belonging to it, originally belonged only to the
Kwakiutl tribe [[but]] have spread, in the course of time, to their
neighbors (Boas). [[See footnote a, Ethnographic Introduction]]
3
Is qsqangis- an abbreviated plural form? In the Gospel translations: shg.unish (singular), shikshganish (plural).
238
wul
t
g"O'ut
kasga
dann
er
s chos s
ihn
then
he
shot
it
nda
anaheatEt
wo
seine Seite,
his side
where
yVakatEt.
folgte ihm.
followed him.
/ ga
was
fand ihn
found it
4
hauw1/1.
Ada
wul
bVts gEtEt
den Pfeil.
the arrow.
Und
dann
er traf ihn,
And
then
he hit him,
mEs '74a.
den weissen Bgren.
the white bear.
Adat
wul
Und er
dann
And he
then
wulb ia /atEt.
nakska 5
ging er.
Nach einer Weile da
then went he.
After a while
Tla
sqariF/istEt.
den Berg.
the mountain.
Adat
wul
Und er
And he
dann
then
tse'En
Und dann er trat ein
And then he made his appearance
wul
Ada
tsEm sqanE#ist.
den Berg.
der weisse Bg,r in
the mountain.
the white bear in
Adat
mEs'O"la
wul
Und er dann
And he then
tqal
gegen
toward [[at]]
[[nominative]]
lia-/yitgat
tqa 6
gya'laqt.
Ada
wul
ksEr
gErelta
er stand
ganz
draussen.
Und
dann
herausgeht
ein
he stood
completely
outside.
And
then
comes out
one
gyetat wa/tgatat7
herausgekommen er
come out he
Mann,
man,
4
kasga = gish ga.
ltha naksh ga.
6=
tka.
7
= wItk gut
5=
tsEm
in
in
sqanF'ist.
dem Berge.
the mountain.
Adat
wul
Und er
dann
And he
then
239
tsEiE'm hVotgatEtasga tsa w71p.
das Haus.
in
er rief ihn
hinein
he called him in the house.
into
d'VtatEt8
er setzt ihn
he sets him
n7iiska 9
sah
saw
nEsimi5uwan
Adat
wul
Und er
And he
dann
w5.711pEt.
Hauses.
zur rechten Seite des
on the right side of the house.
Adat
wul
Und er
And he
dann
gyatatasga
tqalpqata natVtltatla
Gesellschaften Leute
vier
people
society
four
{{secret society members]]
And he
wul
Ksk`Voq
then
Die ersten
The first
c
tkung'itsEnt
dann
er sah sie
then
he saw them
adat
und er
and he
dann
er erzghlt ihm,
he tells him,
then
goudi.
Tla Ica.'odEtl°
ada
Darnach
Afterward
und
wulareodEt.
die ITOlotlEm was sie thaten.
the NO-Intlem what they did.
NVotlEm
t mgt1
nish ga.
101tha
wulalVotEt.
was sie thaten.
what they did.
wul
8dhl.
9
what they did (?).
saw them
mkung'itsEn MF'itla
die Weit la
du sahst sie
you saw them the MEitla
kyek
then
tsE wa'lpEt.
dem Hause.
in
the house.
in
dEmtkunVitsEn wulalVotEt (?)
was sie thaten (?).
Und er dann sah sie
Adat
then
dEm
Fut.
(future)
and
TlakEodE
Darnach
Afterward
sEwulaligyEmrasga
er soll es lehren
he shall it teach
240
nts '51Iptga ,
tsEda
seinem Volke,
to his people,
wenn
when
wulalVotEt.
den grossen Tanz was sie thaten.
dann er sah sie
then he saw them the great dance
what they did.
ada
wul
und
da
and
then
Ada
tqa'ne"
Und
alle
all
And
Tlak'VodEt
Darnach
Afterward
i'e'tlget.
tla
Perf.
er zuruckkehrt.
(perfect) he returns.
tkunVitzEnt
kyek
lEbVstEt
sie farchteten
they feared
m5:/t1tasga
gFupElt
zwei
wul
two
then
Wihalait
natatltrvti
dann Gesellschaften
i.F'ot:
sagte zu ihm der Mann:
said to him
the man,
Leute
people
society
a Wihalaitat.
den grossen Tanz.
the great dance.
dEm
sEmral
sehr
very
gya'tat
Tlakg'odEt adat
wul
Darnach
Afterward
und er
dann
and he
then
tsEda
wulawFldEt,
zu thun also,
Fut.
(future) to do thus,
wenn
when
[[nominative]]
iVtlgetasga
nkalts'apt.
Perf.
er zuritIckkehrt (in) seine Stadt.
his city.
(perfect) he returns (to)
Tlaka'odEt
tla
Darnach
Afterward
ka8gac ( ? )11
tca'ne
was er gesehen hat alles
what he seen has
everything
k EinVitsEn
11=
nVEt12
er
he
gau ga (tlanT gau = all things, see # 65).
12nTat.
dEm
Fut.
(future)
241
wulawaldEt.
Ada
wul
gyek
k"VedEks
er thut also.
he does thus.
Und
da
dann
And
then
then
er kommt zu
he comes to
tla
gutle? sEt
drei Tage
Perf.
(perfect) three days
Tlak-if odEt
Darauf
Thereupon
sqanevistEt
Berge
im
in the mountain
tsEm
goes out
d'a/tEtasga
skana'x
15
lange
drinnen er sass
he sat
inside
long
nEwEtlda
gutlE/dat
gerade wie
exactly like
drei
three
dEmt
Fut.
(future)
ksEr
geht heraus
SEmhalai'clEt...
dem wahren Tanze.
the true dance.
k'gtl.
Jahre.
years.
Ada
dann er
And then he
Und
nk"alts'a/ptgaa.
halyetsasga
sie schicken ihn in sein Dorf.
his village.
they send him to
t
er
wa
nk' alts Ta/ptEt.
Ada
wul
lE igw5Yntg atEt 13
fand
Und
dann
er stieg auf
he
found
sein Dorf.
his village.
And
then
he climbed up
ts'uw-en kant
des Baumes
Gipfel
of the tree
top
klailyemawasga nk'alts'apga.
seinem Dorfe.
nahe
his village.
near
neistga
tqa/nE
sie sahen ihn
they saw him
alle
all
gyaltEt tla
(Perf. )
Leute
people (perfect)
13
wult
Tla
(Perf. )
(perfect)
n laq
auf den
on the
Adat
wul
Und
dann
then
And
kVEdEkst.
er kam.
he came.
13 = in, to, up, see # 108. gw"intk --- (in the Gospel translations) touch upon, border on.
242
k'S.'edEksasga wa'tgadat
Mskanl/kt14
ada
wul
Nach einer Wei le
und
After a while
and
dann herunter
then down here
tgy7
kant.
na laq ts'uwa/n
seinem Gipfel des Baumes.
auf
of the tree.
his top
on
adat
und er
and he
gyek
Und er
And he
wieder
again
ga"psga
Down here
he moved
er ass sie
he ate them many.
lEb'estEt.
sie ftirchteten sich.
they were afraid.
14
wult
Ada
dann er
And then he
Und
Darauf
Thereupon
wul
M sk'anI/ktEt
Nach einer Weile
After a while
gyatatasga
die Leute
the people
ada
wult
und
dann
and
then
msk'ana'kt will be identical with am shg.anakt (Mark 14:35,
14.70).
15
nahm ihn
took him
Tla k'VodEt
h5'ut
Und dann sie flohen
And then they fled
Ada
ga'asgEt
tsgitldat.
er ass ihn auf
he ate him up.
tla
ass ihn (Perf. )
ate him (perfect)
ga/pdat
kig/ldat.
einen.
dann noch
another.
then
wihVldEt.
viele.
from
Herunter
ka nista15
wul
Adat
von
iVadat
er ging
Tgy7
kVodEt...
a hak (?)
beschwerlich ( ?) auf seinem
with difficulty ( ?) on his back.
leg/ltga gya'tga
Menschen
einen
human being
one
[[accusative]]
er kam
he came
ka will probably be gay nishta see # 291, Addenda.
243
iVotga.
den Mann.
the man.
Raccusativen
gya'tga
kitieggita 16
sie nahmen ihn fest die Leute
him
the people
they
apprehended
haldVotEt.
sie heilten ihn.
they healed him.
wul
Und
dann
then
And
Msklan-a/ktEt
ada
wul
a/msga
Nach einer Wei le
After a while
und
dann
gut
and
then
good
io"'otasga.
Skuai'it17
der Mann.
the man.
[[nominative]]
Al le Tage ( ?)
ma,otgata
er war gesund
he was well
iVotEt.
der Mann.
the man.
Every day (?)
gyafta t.
Ada
tqalpq
die Leute.
the people.
Und
vier
four
And
Adat
haldgfotEt.
sie heilten ihn.
they healed him.
Tla
(Perf.
(Perfect)
Adat
wul
sE wurVigyemqa
Und
dann
er lehrte sie
And
then
he taught them
natEtltattla
gyaltat
dann Gesellschaften die Leute
the people
then society
wul
wu la la/
ditl
gy7lky
sie machen es wie der grosse Ta.nz,
the great dance,
they do it like
und
wieder
again
wulalY
sie machen es ebenso
they do it just
16
17
and
N5tla'mtat,
wie die NalEm,
like the Naintlem,
ditl
gye-ky
und
wieder
again
and
gidigI.
Since sk'uai/it does not occur otherwise, it is to be thought
very close to tkinT (= every, all, see # 235).
244
nakgtsglotEt.
sie machen es ebenso die anderen.
the others.
they do it like
wulalg.'
g ya 'tat
diti halsEt
die Leute
the people
and
Hunde
and
dogs
A dEmt
Fut.
(Future)
ga'pa
sie essen sie
they eat them
tqan.F.
auf solche Weise
in such a way
alle.
all.
245
Footnote List for Language Samples III and IV
a
Note the placement of the diacritic throughout Language
Sample III and occasionally in Language Sample IV. This placement
of is also found in Chapters IV and VI. In the 1889 Boas Report the
diacritic is always placed following the letter. It is assumed that
the placement of the diacritic above rather than following the letter in
the material borrowed from Boas is Schulenburg's adaptation of the
Boas diacritic.
b
In Schulenburg's Tsimshian language grammar and glossary,
the two German words "da" and "dann" appear to be interchangeable
and = "then" in English.
In "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German), p. 308: wul (B. ) see
wil
In "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German), p. 307 the second
listing under wil is: = da, dann (that which has just made itself manifest). The third entry under wil is: ## 207, 322.
cAlthough in "Die Wihalait" "kyek" and "gyek" both appear
translated into German by Schulenburg as "dann" [[then]], the shared
listing for "kyek" and "gyek" in "The Glossary" (TsimshianGerman), p. 231 is: gik (B.: gyik) = and also, likewise, too, as well,
again, anew, furthermore.
The second entry under gik is: Luke 14:12, 14:6, 4:41.
John 10.31, 16:28, 21:17. Matt. 18:19. ## 170, 287, 289.
Later, toward the end of "Die Wihalait" "gyek, " "gye-lky, " and
`gyeky" are all translated into German by Schulenburg as "wieder"
[[again]].
246
V.
Some Passages from the Common Prayer
Page 19: Na amsh ga MTyan gut Jesus Christ, dilth na
shrebunsh gish ga Shimoigiat ga lakaga, dilth na shila walumsh gish
ga Am da Haiik ga dum gup lthawila hoksh ga da da gum.
1
Translations with Notes: Die Gnade (am = gut) des Herrn Jesu
Christi (vergl. na, # 48), und die Liebe Gottes, und (das Zusammenthun, s. # 12, a) die Gemeinschaft des Heiligen Geistes sei mit uns
immerdar (gup: ## 133, 182, 272, 294).
The grace (am = good) of our Lord Jesus Christ (compare na,
# 48), and the love of God, and (das Zusammenthun, a see # 12, a) the
fellowship of the Holy Gost, be with us evermore (g.up: ## 133, 182,
2-2,294).
2, Page 14: Shimhoudikshand gish ga gup gault ga Shimoigiat
ga NagwIt ga: Tkagutgiatk ga ga: Inzabsh ga laka-ga dilth halizokum
adat Jesus Christ ga gupgaulu Lthelth gut ga, MTyanum ga: gu na
goidukshit gish ga Am da Haiikt ga: kshlaklak gish ga whagulgiatk
gish Mary hagunsh dup Pontius Pilate: tkaldapgunt gish ga lak
kuzak, ada zakt ga ada wakshit ga; tikidaoulthgish ga habsh ga dh-dit
ga kwun sha diga sha ga ada gik ginrat gut ga watgut gish ga shpugait
dhait ga° ada mEnda.oulth gish ga zim laka-ga; ada dhat gish ga na
shimyounsh ga anonsh ga Shimoigiat ga, Nagwat ga, Tkagutgiat ga ga.
Dum gik goiduksh ga dum watgut gish ga kwash ga a dumt dapsh ga
dildoishit ga dilth dhdit ga. Shimhoudikshanif da Am da Haiikut: dilth
am da shugait gdilum Churchut: dilth n'shilawal da uma.m dit: dilth
shalthilth ga na hadadak gut: dilth dum gik nhanTada tkamaud: dilth
aiegedum gundid51shit. Amen.
247
Translations with Notes: Ich glaube (## 79 ff. ) an den einen
j## 133, 182, 272, 294) Gott, den Vater, den Allnilchtigen (tka> ## 117,
238), den Sch8pfer (zap) des Himmels und der Erde, und an Jesum
Christum, seinen eingebornen Sohn (ga ...# 51), unsern Herrn,
welcher (# 63) empfangen ist (# 285) vom Heiligen Geiste, geboren
(kshalaklak ist Singular, wg.hrend die Pluralform: kshaqulthal, # 34)
von der Jungfrau (## 109, 259) Maria, gelitten (Flak) unter Pontius
Pilatus, angeschlagen (# 110) auf (# 189) ein Kreuz und er ist
gestorben und er ist begraben (wVak); er ist niedergefahren (# 98) zur
H011e
ist Plural zu zak, statt hIlash vielleicht haksh = Qual ? hap
= gehen -), am dritten (## 209, 213) Tage wieder auferstanden von
(## 12 b, 34. 200 201, 246, 247; shpagait # 192) den Todten, und er ist
heraufgefahren (# 96) in (zum # 188) den Himmel und er sitzt zur
rechten Hand Gottes, des Vaters, des Allmgchtigen. Er wird
76, 131, 207, 322) wieder (## 179, 287, 289) kommen von (wgtk) hier
(## 54, 55, 138), urn (## 207, 340) zu richten die Lebendigen und die
Todten. Ich glaube an den Heiligen Geist (da ## 49, 50) und eine
heilige zusammen einige (## 127, 209, 211) Kirche und eine GemeinlOsen, shad
schaft der Heiligen (anigm) und an eine Vergebung
# 104) der Stinden (# 36) und an ein Wieder-Auferstehen der Leiber und
ein ewiges Leben. Amen.
I believe (## 79 ff. ) in one (## 133, 182, 272, 294) God the Father
Almighty (tka: ## 117, 238), Maker (zap)b of heaven and earth and in
# 51) our Lord, who (# 63)
Jesus Christ his only begotten Son (ga
is conceived (# 285) by the Holy Ghost, born (kshalaklakc is singular,
whereas the plural form: kshaqulthgl, # 34) of the Virgin Mary, sufd
fered (a-5,k) under Pontius Pilate, nailed (# 110) to (# 189) a cross,
and he died, and he is buried (wai ak);e he descended (# 98) to hell (du
is the plural of zak, f instead of habsh perhaps Eaksh = torment, agony,
pain' - hap = to go-), on the third (## 209, 213) day rose again from
248
(## 12b, 34, 200, 201, 246, 247; shpagait, # 192) the dead, and he
ascended (# 96) into (zum # 188) heaven, and he sits on the right hand
of God the Father Almighty. He will (## 76, 131, 207, 322) come again
from (watk)g thence (## 54, 55, 138) in (## 207, 340) order to judge the
living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Ghost (da: ## 49, 50), and a
holy unified (## 127, 209, 211) church, and a communion of saints
h
(amqm), and in a forgiveness (lthri =7 to absolve; sha: # 104) of sins
(# 36), and in a resurrection of bodies, and an eternal life. Amen.
3. Page 16: 0 Miyan gwunTazun na gumgaudint a lakomt. Ada
ma ginam na gunlTmaut gunt a gum. 0 Miyan dimaut gish Queen. Ada
gumgaudun nakniTm a dup da hint gunt. WishwIshun na Ministers gunt
a hoigiak a dit. Ada ma sha galthgwushgri da na kshnaknishgum
z-a..punt. 0 Miyan dilamaut ga n'zapunt. Ada ma gumgaudk ga na
giant. Ginamlth gungiaksh a ashTt nringumi 0 Miyan. Awul althgat
gig: na za t'in lth5;num amuksha ntingunt 0 Shimoigiat. 0 Shimoigiat
liTshikshakshun gagaudumi. Ada gilau ma za kbaga nflth5duk shim
Haiikunt a gum.
Translations with Notes: 0 Herr, erzeige (nT) deine (# 48)
Gnade (gum, gaud) an uns (lak). Und gieb dein Heil an uns. 0 Herr,
erhalte (maut, di-: 102, 249) die K5nigin. Und gnN:dig erho're uns,
wenn wir dick rufen. Bekleide (wash) deine Diener mit Gerechtigkeit.
Und mache (sha: # 104) frOhlich (lthgwishgri) dein auserw`g.hltes (nT)
Volk. 0 Herr, hilf (# 31) deinem Volke. Und segne dein Erbtheil.
Gieb (# 123) Frieden, so lange (## 207, 321) wir (leben), o Herr. Denn
(Ewil) kein Anderer (# 71) ist dabei (# 52) far uns (ltha- num.), ausgenommen (## 181, 292) du (nugun) o Gott. 0 Gott mache rein inwendig
(# 107) unsere Herzen. Und nicht (# 270) (za: # 132) nimm fort (# 97)
dienen heiligen (statt "im" ist "um" zu denken, # 127) Geist bei uns.
249
0 Lord, show (nT)i thy (# 48) mercy (gum, zaud)j to us (lak)k.
1
And grant thy salvation to us. 0 Lord, preserve (maut, di-: # 102,
249) the queen. And mercifully hear us whenever we call thee.
Clothe (wash)m thy servants with righteousness. And make (sha: 104)
thy chosen (nT)n people joyful (lthgwishgri).° 0 Lord, help (# 31) thy
people. And bless thine inheritance. Grant (# 123) peace as long
(## 207, 321) as we (live), 0 Lord. For (awil)P none other (# 71) is
here (# 52) for us (ltha-nurn)q thou (nu,gun)r excepted (## 181, 292), 0
God. 0 God, make clean our hearts within (# 107). And take not
(# 270) (za: # 132) thy Holy (is to be thought "urn" # 127 instead of
) Spirit away from (# 97) us.
4. Page 28: Gumgautk ga Shimoigiat ga lakaga a gum, ada
dumt gumgautk gum ga: ada dumt sha gugwaluksh ga zalt ga gum.
Dam wul wilaiintk ga wilaigTaunt a lak halizokut: na amawIlum gun
dirnaudumsh gunt a tkani wilzokzokut. Am dumt ama-dalgun giatit 0
Shimoigiat: am tkanT giat a dumt 'in ama-dalgunt. Am dum
gulthshkwushghtlada wilzokzoka ada dum wramlahou da dit: wul ma
dum hoigiakum dapa giatit, ada ma dum dadauntk ga wilzokzokut a lak
halizokut. Am dumt ama-dalgun giatit 0 Shimoigiat: am tkanT giat a
dumt in arna-dalgunt. Dum dagoiduksha yob a na gian dit: ada
Shimoigiat ga lakaga lip Shimoigiat gum ga dumt 'in gumgautk gum ga.
Dumt gumgautk ga num ga Shimoigiat ga lakgga: ada tkanT wilgak ga
halizokut dumt 'in shuulgunt ga. Dum shugait n'lthaumsh ga ga
Nagwat ga: dilth Ltheilth ga ga, gunith Am da Haiikut. Na guni
wilawalt gishga wilhT-shidhat ga ga gik waldi growl: ada gup ltha dum
wila walda wugait althga dum shabat. Amen.
Translations with Notes: Gria:dig (gaud) sei Gott uns, und er
mOge uns segnen, und er lasse (sha # 104) leuchten sein Antlitz auf
uns. Auf dass (## 207, 340) erkannt werde (wilai-in) sein Weg (gaina)
250
auf der Erde, sein Heil alien Heiden. Es sollen (# 274) loben dich die
# 49, 52) dich loben.
Menschen, o Gott: es sollen alle Menschen
Es sollen sich freuen (lthgwishei) (gulth = gwilth, umher, uberall) die
VOlker und sollen es laut ausrufen; denn du wirst in gerechter Weise
(hoigia,gum, # 127) richten die Menschen und du wirst fUhren die
Vnker auf der Erde. Es sollen loben dich die Menschen, o Gott: es
sollen alle Menschen dich loben. Es wird das Land bringen
(golduksh = kommen, da: # 103) seine Frucht, und Gott selbst (# 53),
unser Gott, mOge uns segnen. Es m8ge segnen uns Gott, und jedes
Volk ("wilzok" wird wohl gemeint sein) auf (a, a: # 206, a) der Erde
ftirchte (shawilgun) ihn. Es sollen zusammen geehrt sein der Vater
und der Sohn und der Heilige Geist. Wie es war im Anfang, so soil
# 12, a): und es soil so sein bis
es auch jetzt (gra5n) sein
(wagait) in Ewigkeit. Amen.
God be merciful (gaud)s to us and may he bless us and let (sha:
104) his countenance shine upon us. In order that (## 207, 340) his
way (gaina)t be known (wilai-in) upon earth, his salvation to all heathens. The people shall (# 274) praise thee, 0 God; all people (t'in:
## 49, 52) shall praise thee. Nations shall rejoice (lthgwishgu)v
(gulch = gwilth, w around, everywhere) and shall proclaim loudly; for
thou wilt judge the people righteously (hoigiagum: # 127), and thou
wilt lead the nations upon the earth. The people shall praise thee, 0
God; all people shall praise thee. The earth will bring forth (goiduksh
to come; da: # 103) its fruit, and may God himself (# 53), our God,
bless us. May God bless us, and every nation (probably meant to be
uwilz51(11)x upon (a, a # 206, a) the earth fear (shriwilgun)Y him. The
Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost shall together be honored. As it
as
was in the beginning so shall it also now (gTai5n)z be (va..1: # 12, a),
cc
and it shall be until (wagait)bb eternity. Amen.
251
Footnote List for Language Sample V
a das
Zusammenthun, an infinitive functioning as a noun: a putting together, an association. The old spelling has th for t in -than
(= tun).
b
zap, in "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German): (B.: ts'ap) =
to make, create, build (singular).
John 9:14, 2:15; Mark 10:6, 12:1, 14:58.
This citation of "The Glossary!' (Tsimshian-German) serves for
the subsequent glosses of Tsimshian words in these translations of
passages from the Common Prayer. Inserted into the German
translation, these Indian words are preserved in the English translation of the German. All those Tsimshian words are glossed which
do not have an accompanying reference to section numbers in "The
Grammar. "
ckshalaklak, see sixth entry under laklak (singular): to be born.
Luke 2:11; John 9:1; Mark 14:21.
qultha-1, see seventh entry under laklak (singular): plural of
laklak.
Matt. 13:4; Mark 4:4; John 18:6.
kshaqulthal, see tenth entry under laklak (singular): to be
born, (plural of kshalaklak).
John 1:13.
ksha-, see ksha-: is a prefix which indicates the direction
"'out". [[It indicates movement from inside a place as seen by the person outside. ]]
Luke 13:28, 20:12, 24:50; Mark 9:47, 1:43, 1:45, 5:40,
etc.
See # 106.
252
d
- see second hak listing: torment, agony, torture, to
hak,
suffer pain.
Luke 24:46; Mark 9:12.
[[Also see hagun, the second entry under the second ha( listing:
to torture, torment, cause pain.
Mark 5:7; Luke 8:28; Matt. 21:41. ]]
e
wa ak: to bury, inter.
John 12:7; Matt. 14:12, 25:18.
fzak: (B.: ts'ak and ds'ak') = to die (singular).
Luke 7:12; Matt. 2:15; John 6:50, 11:16, 11:39;
Mark 5:39, 12:20, 12:22, 14:31.
dii, see first entry under zak: du is plural of zak.
Luke 24:5, 24:46; John 8:21, 12:1; Mark 6:14, 12:18;
Matt. 2:20 (B.: dEr).
gwak: (passive of wa) "come" [[past participle form in
German]] also has the meaning "originate (in)" or "proceed (from), "
"to be from something here [[to this place]]. "
John 7:27, 9:16.
[[See also ## 12, b; 200; 246]]
h amam,
_
see third entry under am, ama: (B.: ama/m) is the
plural of am.
Matt. 9:13, 13:43, 13:45, 25:37, 25:46, 7:11.
am, ama: (B.: am) = good, righteous, just, pious, devout,
religious (singular).
Luke 2:10, 18:18; Mark 15:43.
In the meaning "holy" (Holy Ghost):
Luke 4:1; Matt. 1:18; John 1:33, 14:26, 20:22;
Mark 1:1, 1:8.
253
_
see first nT listing: (B.: ne) = to see (singular).
Mark 12:15.
[[Also see gwunTazun, the fifth entry under nT: to have
[[[something]]] seen, i.e. [[[to cause or permit something to be
seen]]], to show. ]]
,
jgumgaud [[compare this form entered in "The Glossary" with
the two forms gum, gaud in the language sample]] see third entry
under gaud: (B.: ramrVd) = 1) to have compassion, pity; to have or
show mercy; to forgive, pardon.
Mark 11:25, 10:47, 10:48, 5:19; Luke 1:54, 1:78.
[[See footnote s and # 45 for gum, .g.aud ]1
klak: (B.: laq) = a preposition with the meaning "on, " "upon. "
Luke 10:10, 15:15; Mark 13:3, 4:4, 6:49; John 13:28,
47,35.
# 189.
maut(k) [[compare this form entered in "The Glossary" with the
form maut found in the language sample]]: = healthy, well, healed,
blessed.
Luke 7:10, 15:27; Mark 5:28, 8:25, 11:12.
dimaut(k), see the third entry under maut(k): (compare the
prefix di-):
1
Luke 8:36, 1:71; Mark 15:31.
See under di-: is a prefix whose meaning is "to become," "to
make. "
Luke 6:19, 18:26; Mark 6:5, 15:31, 10:26; Matt. 20:24.
See ## 102, 249.
mwash: dress (singular), wishwash (plural).
Mark 10:50, 10:5, 15:30; John 19:24; Mark 11:7, 15:24;
Luke 244, 2:7; John 19:24.
254
See second entry under wash: to clothe, to dress.
Mark 15:17; Matt. 6:31, 25:36.
nni;
_ see footnote i, the fifteenth entry under nT:
kshanTshk (singular), kshanaknTshk (plural): chosen,
selected; to choose, to select.
Luke 9:35; Matt. 22:14.
olthgwishgri: to rejoice, to be glad (singular).
John 3:29, 8:56; Luke 1:44, 15:5.
Pa- wil: for [[because]].
See ## 207,339.
ciltha-: (B.: tla) = that which is completed and lasts or con-
tinues. In compounds: # 20, 5. In the chapter on the verb: # 76.
As a conjunction we translate it with "as" or "when. "
See ## 207, 282, 322.
num, see under num: (dependent pronominal form) see # 47, e.
rnuzun: personal pronoun (independent) of the second person
singular = you [[familiar form in German but the distinction between
familiar and formal forms does not exist in Tsimshian]].
Mark 8:29; Luke 1:76, 4:34; Matt. 16:18, 16:23, 16:16,
1g20, 267:3.
(B.: nerEn).
## 45, 46.
s
.g,aud:
(B.: leVot) = heart, mind, spirit, feeling, intellect
(singular).
Mark 10:22, 12:30.
[[Also see g,umLautk, found under the second meaning for
g.umgaud; which is the third entry under _gaud: blessed, highly praised.]]
Luke 14:14; Mark 44:61.
[[See footnote j]]
255
t g_aina, see first gaina listing: way, road, path, course,
direction.
Luke 3:4; Mark 11:8.
(Compare gakzaina = street, road, highway).
u
U.
.
-in
wilai: (B.: wu15.4) = to know a fact, or to have knowledge of a
fact; to be acquainted with (singular) [[to know]].
John 11:24, 3:2, 7:27, 4:10, 7:29; Mark 12:12, 15:10;
Luke 24:16.
in: see t'in.
t'in: (B.: tEi'n) the [[masculine article in German]] and the
[[feminine article in German]] (with others being there and taking
part).
It indicates individuals who, present during events, were
participants [[in the events]] (a type of article).
## 49, 52.
v
lthgwishga: See footnote o.
gulth = gwilth: indicates that something repeats or continues
or occurs in different locations ("everywhere, " "around").
Mark 6:7, 12:16, 12:15, 1:45; John 5:9; Luke 2:17, 3:3.
See # 91.
x
wilzok [[compare form found in "The Glossary" with that in the
language sample]], see second entry under zok: (singular) nation.
Luke 21:10; Mark 13:8.
Yshuwilgun: to be afraid of, to respect or esteem.
Luke 20:13; Mark 12:6; Matt. 22:16.
z
(B.: gya wun, k a wun) = now.
John 4:23, 17:5, 17:7.
256
aawal:
_ see also # 245.
bbwazait: preposition with the meaning "until, " "up to. "
John 13:1, 16:24, 12:25; Mark 13:27; Luke 23:5.
See # 203.
cc
See Psalm 67.
257
CORRECTIONS AND ADDENDA
Page 10: The example "to strike d'O'oc (singular), d!Ecdooc
(plural)" mentioned in # 29 is to be deleted. Compare dosh... in # 27.
Page 12, # 34: To be read klthnash-giTut (singular) and klthnadauk (plural) instead of klthna-dauk (singular) and klthna-shgliut
(plural). [[The correction itself contained a typographical error: for
the to-be-corrected item klthna-shguut (plural), Schulenburg had
klthna-schguut (plural). ]]
Page 12, # 38: "To rise, stand up, get up" and "to rise from
the dead" ginTat (singular) and nanTat (plural) may also belong here.
Page 24, # 48: Read "identical" instead of "indentical. "
Page 32, line 4: Read "Menschen" instead of "Manschen. "
[[# 54, example a, Matt. 23:36]]
Page 57, line 1: Read "klthiiun" instead of "kthriun. " [[# 94]]
Page 88: Under the adverbs of place "geluksh = backwards,
back" and "za.ga = right across, diagonally, nearly opposite" also
belong. [[Added to "The Grammar" following # 151, at the end of the
section on adverbs of place. ]]
Page 88, # 148: Read Mark 11:16 instead of Matthew 11:16
Page
88, # 150: Read "qudakshash" instead of "quadakshash. "
Page 91, # 163: Read "a few places" instead of "one place. "
Page 107, # 208: Htsaq! = oh shame! oh fie!" also belongs
here.
Page 112, # 211d: The style of writing "gume't" (John 6:22)
instead of writing "gam'met" is also found.
Page 117, # 222b: In the example John 6:71 "dupkad5lt" is to be
read instead of "duqkad6lt.
Page 112, # 232: Read "gup" instead of 'guq. [[This correction was unnecessary since "gup" not "guq" was already present. ]]
2.58
Page 145, # 291: "gimgia" could have the meaning
in addition besides. " (John 12:1, 16:12).
yet
[[The following are corrections in an addenda to "The Glossary. Ha
Page 203a: "shagiaksh" is to be deleted under "aksh. "
Page 208a: "baq s. under yez" is to be placed under "baq (B. )
s. bak." [[s. = see. ]]
Page 216a: "crcimuksh found in kshadomuksh (see there)" is to
be placed under "dElsh... "
Page 216b: "dsTs see under rEla" [[rE/la]] is to be placed
under "dsTir... " [[dsTi/r]].
" is assumed to be "oldluklthk found in
Page 217a:
ladaluklthk (see there). "
Page 233a: "g'a aYedEksh = to visit" is to be added to the
section on "zoiduksh. "
Page 236b: ".g.ulTen (g.a-lien?) = to commit adultery, Matt. 532,
19:9" is to be placed under "gulTamuksh..
Page 238b: "gushTlsh" belongs under shilsh (see there).
as and b following the page number stand for each of the two columns found on every page of "The Glossary. "
259
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Matthew ligi The Gospel according
to St. Matthew. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,
Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion of
Christian Knowledge, [1885].
Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Mark ligi The Gospel according to
St. Mark. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,
Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion of
Christian Knowledge, [1887].
Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Luke ligi The Gospel according to
St. Luke. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,
Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion of
Christial Knowledge, [1887].
Am da malshk ga na damsh St. John ligi The Gospel according to
St. John. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,
Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion of
Christian Knowledge, [1889].
Photocopies of the four Gospels were obtained from the
Library of the S. P.C.K. , Holy Trinity Church, Marlebone
Road, London, NW1 4DU. The Catalogue of the British Museum
also lists each of the four Gospels.
Boas, Franz. "First General Report on the Indians of British
Columbia 'III Tsimshian. " British Association for the
Advancement of Science. Vol. 59. London: John Murray,
1890.
877-89.
Das Neue Testament [The New Testament]. Berlin: Britische and
Auslgndische Bibelgesellshaft, 1929. (Pages facing the German
text contain the English translation. )
King James Version of the Bible. New York: The Modern Library,
1943.